JP2018130330A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance game amusement by increasing execution frequency of performance that suggests a result of prior identification.SOLUTION: A game machine imparts privilege when a result of impartment determination becomes an impartment support result. Change display of identification holding information is started on the basis of a result of impartment determination, and the result of impartment determination is displayed in a final stop mode. With respect to prescribed special information stored to acquisition information storage means, first suggestive performance showing a possibility of an impartment determination result can be executed. When impartment non-support result is displayed in a final stop mode of the identification holding information based on the special information to be an object of the first suggestive performance, in the case that the special information is stored to the acquisition information storage means, jackpot reservation information is preferentially selected from the stored special information, and second suggestive performance showing a possibility for the selected special information to become an impartment determination result can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  For example, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, special information that is provided on the basis of a game ball launched by a launching means (launching device), an operation port, a display unit, etc., winning a game ball launched by the launching unit Is stored in the acquired information storage means up to a predetermined number (plural). The stored special information is read from the acquisition information storage means when the processing condition (starting condition for grant determination) is satisfied, and whether or not the read special information corresponds to the grant information Determination (whether or not) is performed. When the assignment determination is performed, the display unit (for example, the display unit such as the first result display unit or the second result display unit of the main display unit) starts changing the identification information (for example, the variable display). When a predetermined change time elapses, the change display is terminated, and the result of the determination of application is displayed according to the final stop mode of the identification information.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the determination of the provision of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is performed, it is specified in advance whether the special information corresponds to the provision information, and this pre-specific result It is determined by lottery whether or not the suggestion effect (notice effect) that suggests is executed. Then, when the decision to execute the suggestion effect (notice effect) is made, the suggestion effect is displayed in the effect means (symbol display) prior to the change display of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified in advance. (For example, see Patent Documents 1 to 3).

JP 2000-342804 A JP 2004-215914 A JP 2009-11408 A

  The structure related to these suggestive effects is common, and it is necessary to further improve this type of gaming machine (the gaming machine that performs the suggestive effects) to enhance the gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the execution frequency of effects suggesting a pre-specified result and enhancing the gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the allocated information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the grant determination target special information corresponds to the grant information;
Identification information change that starts display of change of identification information based on the result of the assignment determination, ends the change display when a predetermined change time elapses, and displays the result of assignment determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information Means,
For the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, first pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, First pre-identification means for identifying the predetermined special information before being subject to the grant determination;
First suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first prior determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the special information that is the specific target;
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specifying means is started. First suggestion effect execution means for executing the first suggestion effect before the change display ends,
A gaming machine comprising
When it is displayed that the special information is a grant non-correspondence result that does not correspond to the grant information according to the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified by the first prior specification means, In a case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, a selection unit that preferentially selects special information that does not have the lowest determination probability from the stored special information;
When the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination, the second prior specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result, the selected special information is the target of the grant determination A second pre-identifying means for identifying before
Second suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect indicating the content of the second prior determination information based on a determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
If the second suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the second suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display Second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of
It is characterized by providing.

  2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special information whose decision probability is not lowest is the grant information.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of effects that suggest a specific result in advance, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine of each embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of the pachinko machine of each embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of the pachinko machine of each embodiment. The rear view which shows the structure of the pachinko machine of each embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of the game board of each embodiment (except 3rd Embodiment). (A) The front view of the operating port apparatus which shows the case where an electrically-driven accessory is a closed state, (b) The front view of an operating-port apparatus which shows the case where an electric accessory is an open state. The partial front view which shows an inner frame (resin base) and a game ball | bowl launching mechanism. The exploded perspective view of a game ball launching mechanism. The front view of a game ball launching mechanism. 9A is a sectional view taken along the line 1-1 in FIG. 9, FIG. 9B is a sectional view taken along the line 2-2 in FIG. 9, and FIG. (A) And (b) is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the support member and the mechanism which drives a support member. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram (schematic cross-sectional view) for explaining the relationship among a ball feeding case member, a ball feeding lever, a ball feeding support member, a receiving port, and the like in the ball feeding device. (A)-(c) is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a game ball is sent out (4-4 sectional drawing of FIG. 12). (A)-(c) is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a game ball is sent out (rear view observed from the firing rail side, excluding a base member etc.). The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory view for explaining the distribution table for the first result display section, (b) Explanatory view for explaining the distribution table for the second result display section, (c) is a variation for jackpot Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a time table, (d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation time table for deviation, (e) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation time table for deviation (application example). Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a holding ball storage area. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for probability variation big hits. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows an electric utility opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows a return ball detection process. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state where a game ball is launched by the game ball launching mechanism, and (b) is a schematic front view of the game ball launching mechanism showing a case where a return ball is generated. (A)-(c) is a schematic front view of the game ball | bowl launching mechanism which shows the case where a return ball | bowl is produced. (A) is a flowchart which shows a return ball cancellation process, (b) is a schematic front view of the game ball | bowl launching mechanism which shows a mode that a return ball is canceled. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing a game ball launch control process, and FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in which a part of the game ball launch control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows a discharge control process. The time chart which shows the relationship of a cancellation | release operation execution flag, a discharge | release permission signal, a discharge | release period, a ball | bowl feeding operation | movement, and a discharge | release operation. The time chart which shows the relationship of a cancellation | release operation execution flag, a discharge | release permission signal, a discharge | release period, a ball | bowl feeding operation | movement, and a discharge | release operation. (A) is the time chart which shows the relationship of the cancellation | release operation execution flag of 1st Embodiment, a discharge | release permission signal, a discharge period, a ball | bowl feeding operation | movement, and a discharge operation, (b) is the time which shows the characteristic of the modification 8. chart. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a 1st notification effect among the notification effects of 1st Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a 2nd notification effect among the notification effects of 1st Embodiment, (b) and (c) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the concept of object acquired information. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the hold notice of 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the hold notice of 1st Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice which concerns on the upper operation port in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice concerning the lower operating port in MPU of the main controller. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. The flowchart which shows the command response process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a pending | holding command response process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a jackpot correspondence setting process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a reach correspondence setting process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a non-reach corresponding | compatible setting process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the modification of a jackpot corresponding | compatible setting process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows notice condition establishment lottery winning probability, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows distribution lottery rate, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows notice condition establishment lottery winning probability. The flowchart which shows the jackpot formation winning process. The flowchart which shows the establishment winning process for reach. The flowchart which shows the establishment winning process for non-reach. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display control process. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows the setting process of notification effect. The flowchart which shows the setting process of notification effect. (A) Explanatory view for explaining the occurrence lottery table corresponding to the jackpot, (b) Explanatory view for explaining the occurrence lottery table for out-of-game correspondence, (c) For explaining the occurrence lottery table for reach (D) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production lottery table corresponding to gas leaching. The flowchart which shows a 1st flag deletion process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd flag deletion process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd announcement effect execution determination process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd announcement effect execution determination process. (A) is a flowchart which shows the jackpot effective information determination process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a valid information determination process. The flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. The flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the notice effect. (A)-(b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the notice effect. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the rank of pending | holding information, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the specific example of 1st Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the conditions by which hold information is set as a trigger of execution of a hold notice. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the rank of pending | holding information in the modification 4, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the specific example of the modification 4. In FIG. The flowchart which shows the 2nd notice effect execution determination process of the modification 4. (A) is a flowchart showing a second notice effect execution determination process of Modification 4, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rank of the hold information in a further modification of Modification 4. (A) And (b) is a flowchart which shows the 1st flag deletion process of the modification 5. FIG. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the modification 8, (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the modification 9. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the modification 9, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modification 9. (A)-(e) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method for pinpointing the number of object acquired information. The flowchart which shows the command response process in MPU of the display control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the reach winning process for the reach of the second embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing the non-reach successful win process of the second embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an implementation first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing a second flag erasing process of the second embodiment. The flowchart which shows the 2nd announcement effect execution determination process of 2nd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of 2nd Embodiment, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. The front view explaining the distribution means etc. of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the storage ball storage area of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operation port of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing of the third embodiment, (b) is a flowchart showing data setting processing of the third embodiment. The flowchart which shows the change start process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation display time of 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the hold notice of 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the hold notice of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the pending command corresponding | compatible process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the big win use winning process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the establishment winning process for reach of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the establishment winning process for non-reach of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the flag deletion process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the 2nd announcement effect execution determination process of 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the 2nd announcement effect execution determination process of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the return ball cancellation process of 4th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the time measurement process after completion | finish of 4th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the characteristic of the application example of 4th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the return ball | bowl detection process of the modification 11. FIG. (A) is a front view of the game ball launching mechanism of Modification 12, and (b) is a flowchart showing return ball detection processing of Modification 12. (A) is a front view of the game ball launching mechanism of Modification 13, and (b) is a flowchart showing return ball detection processing of Modification 13. The flowchart which shows the discharge control process of the modification 14. The time chart which shows the relationship of the ball | bowl feed stop flag of the modification 15, a cancellation operation | movement execution flag, a discharge | release permission signal, a discharge period, a ball | bowl feed operation | movement, and a discharge | release operation. The flowchart which shows the return ball detection process of the modification 15. The flowchart which shows the return ball cancellation process of the modification 15. (A) is a flowchart showing the preparation flag management process of Modification Example 15, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the launch control process of Modification Example 15, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example of Modification Example 15. is there. The flowchart which shows the process for game ball | bowl launch control of the modification 15. (A) is a schematic plan view for explaining the modification 16 and (b) is a schematic front view for explaining the modification 17. FIG. 20 is a schematic plan view for explaining a modification example 18; (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the modification 19, (b) is a schematic front view for explaining the modification 20, and (c) is a schematic front view for explaining the modification 21. Longitudinal sectional view. (A) is a schematic front view for explaining the modification 22, and (b) and (c) are schematic plan views for explaining the modification 22. (A) is a schematic front view for demonstrating a comparative example, (b) is a partially expanded front view of Fig.62 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic front view for demonstrating the modification 23. FIG. The time chart for demonstrating the modification 24. FIG. (A) is the flowchart which shows the elapsed time measurement process in a cycle in the modification 24, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the changed part of the content of the return ball cancellation process in the modification 24. (A) And (b) is a schematic plan view for demonstrating 5th Embodiment. (A) is 5-5 sectional drawing of Fig.130 (a), (b) is 6-6 sectional drawing of Fig.130 (a). (A) is a schematic plan view for demonstrating 5th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the modification 25. FIG. (A) And (b) is a schematic front view for demonstrating the modification 26. FIG. (A) And (b) is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the modification 27. FIG. (A) And (b) is a schematic top view for demonstrating the modification 27. FIG.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

<Outline of pachinko machine 10>
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view. In this specification, “front” refers to the “direction approaching the player with respect to the gaming machine”, and “rear” refers to the “direction away from the player with respect to the gaming machine”.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

<Configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12>
Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. A through gate 35 is provided in each of a left portion (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed region L) of the center frame 42 described later and a right portion (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region R) of the center frame 42. Yes.

  On the back side of the game board 24, detection sensors (not shown) are provided corresponding to the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34. When a ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a corresponding detection sensor, and a predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result. . In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed. The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operating port 33, 34, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 33, 34. Furthermore, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the general winning port 31 are all opened upward.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening. The aspect which is not discharged | emitted from is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  Details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state), and FIG. 6B is a state where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (supported state or guide state). Shows the case.

  The working port case 33a constituting the upper working port 33 projects to the near side, and the lower side length of the working port case 33a (that is, the left and right width at the lower part of the upper working port 33) is that the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. In some cases, the length is greater than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the interval between the two operation openings 33, 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the operating port 33 becomes an obstacle, and therefore the lower operation is performed until the electric accessory 34a is sufficiently opened. It is impossible to win a game ball to the mouth 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are arranged side by side. More specifically, since they are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game balls flowing down toward the upper side of the operating port device are the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port. Any of the mouths 34 can be won. In other words, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are performed according to the operation mode of a launch handle 8A (see FIG. 1) described later. It is difficult to target. In addition to the configuration in which the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper portion and a lower lower portion. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 33, or a failure nail may be implanted obliquely below the working port case 33a.

  Here, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is the low-frequency support mode (described later), the electric accessory 34a per unit time is compared to the high-frequency support mode (described later). The frequency of opening is relatively low. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, it is difficult to win a game ball in the lower working port 34 or to determine whether or not the game ball is won based on a winning in the lower working port 34.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is connected to a drive unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 24, and is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. The game ball can be switched to a predetermined open state in which it is easy for a prize to be won when a shift to (open / close execution state) is won.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area PE can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between is smaller than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display section 43, when the variable winning device 32 enters the opening / closing execution mode (or when the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating opening 33, and the lower operating opening 34 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning. The first result display section AS and the second result display section BS constitute a specific example of identification information changing means. In addition, a change display (for example, a change display of numbers performed in the 7-segment LED, a blinking display displayed by the LED) executed in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is a change display of the identification information. The final stop mode of the identification information is configured by the stop result of the change display (variation display). As will be described later, the result of the game (whether or not to shift to the open / close mode) Or the like) is displayed. Further, a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped on the first result display unit AS based on a winning at the upper working port 33 (first working port) is referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the lower working port 33 (second working port). A symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped and displayed on the second result display unit BS based on a winning to the operation port) may be referred to as a “second special symbol”. Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, although the aspect which arrange | positions a 1st operation port and a 2nd operation port up and down is illustrated, even if the up-and-down position of a 1st operation port and a 2nd operation port is reverse, The first working port and the second working port may be arranged on the left and right.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section BS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the lower operation port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are used. Also good.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41, together with a display lamp unit 63 (to be described later) for performing game lighting and the like, and a speaker unit 64 (to be described later) for producing a sound effect on the game, etc. A specific example of the device is configured and a notice effect is performed. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. Further, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 and the second holding ramp portion 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 47. In addition, the structure etc. by which each holding lamp | ramp parts 45-47 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a launching handle 8 </ b> A is arranged in a rotatable state at the lower right side of the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 (front door frame 14). The firing handle 8A includes a touch sensor 87 for detecting that the player is touching, and a stop switch 89 that is operated to stop the firing of the game ball. In addition, the firing handle 8A incorporates a variable resistor 88 for detecting the amount of rotation operation applied to the firing handle 8A (see FIG. 16).

  To explain further with reference to FIG. 5, the game board 24 is provided with an inner rail portion 5A and an outer rail portion 5B, and the inner rail portion 5A and the outer rail portion 5B are arranged substantially in parallel, A guide rail portion 5E is configured, and a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 7A (see FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. The guide rail portion 5E is provided in a substantially arc-shaped path from the lower center of the game board 24 toward the upper left side of the game board 24.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball launching mechanism 7 </ b> A is attached below the attachment portion of the game board 24 in the resin base 21. Then, the launch operation of the game ball is performed by operating the launch handle 8A provided on the front door frame 14. Next, the game ball launching mechanism 7A will be described in detail.

<Game Ball Launching Mechanism 7A>
As shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the game ball launching mechanism 7A has a launch rail 74 that defines the launch direction of the game ball and a game ball at a predetermined launch position 74W (near the lower end of the launch rail 74). A launching device 75 that launches, a ball feeding device 76 that supplies a game ball to the firing position 74W, and a support member 77 that supports the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 76 at the firing position 74W. The components (the launch rail 74, the launch device 75, the ball feeding device 76, the support member 77, etc.) are mounted on the lower part of the resin base 21 (inner frame 13) via the metal base member 78. Has been. That is, the base member 78 on which the component parts are mounted is fixed below the attachment portion of the game board 24 in the inner frame 13, so that the component parts are integrated with the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the base member 78 is an aluminum member formed in a substantially triangular shape (the upper end is horizontal, the lower end is raised to the left, and the right end is vertically extended). It is. And the peripheral side of the base member 78 is fixed to the resin base 21 (inner frame 13) by screwing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11, at the portion of the base member 78 where the support member 77 is mounted, a long hole 78 a inclined upward to the right is provided so as to penetrate the front and back of the base member 78. ing. In addition, the long hole 21a is provided also in the site | part aligned with the long hole 78a in the resin base 21 front and back.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the firing rail 74 is the front surface portion of the inner frame 13, and is disposed obliquely upward from the right to the left below the attachment portion of the game board 24. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the firing rail 74 is formed with a groove portion 74M having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined by fitting the game ball into the groove portion 74M. Configured {see FIG. 10 (a)}. Further, the inclination angle of the firing rail 74 (the inclination angle of the groove 74M, the angle formed by the firing path with respect to the horizontal) is about 25 to 35 degrees. Here, the launch rail 74 constitutes a specific example of the launch path configuration means, and this launch path configuration means regulates the launch direction of the game ball.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a passage detection sensor 74b for detecting the passage of a game ball is mounted in the middle of the launch rail 74 (for example, a distance of 3 to 5 game balls from the launch position 74W). Has been. As the passage detection sensor 74b, for example, a penetration type proximity switch can be used. As shown in FIG. 10B, the proximity switch has a substantially rectangular plate-like outer shape, and the proximity switch includes a detection hole 74c penetrating in the plate thickness direction. The detection hole 74 c has a size through which a game ball can pass, and the axis of the detection hole 74 c is substantially parallel to the firing path of the firing rail 74. The detection hole 74c has a substantially hexagonal shape, and one top 74d is aligned with the bottom 74e of the groove 74M of the firing rail 74. The substantially V-shaped groove 74M of the firing rail 74 is substantially flush with “inner wall portions 74g and 74h forming the top 74d in the detection hole 74c”. For this reason, the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 can pass through the detection hole 74c.

  As the passage detection sensor 74b, a magnetic detection type proximity sensor can be used. The passage detection sensor 74b converts a magnetic field change caused by the game ball passing through the detection hole (through hole) 74c into an electric signal. To the main control board 201. In this case, a LOW level signal is output when the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect a game ball, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. Then, the MPU 202 returns based on measuring the input interval of the HI level passage detection signal (first embodiment) and the input time of the passage detection signal of the HI level (see the modification 11 in FIG. 113). The presence or absence of a sphere can be determined. However, the HI level signal may be output when the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball, and the LOW level signal may be output when the game ball is detected. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting the game ball. Furthermore, the passage detection sensor 74b is not limited to the proximity sensor, and other types of sensors such as an optical sensor (see Modification 18 described later) may be used. In addition, two passing detection sensors are provided in the launch rail 74 along the passing direction of the game ball, and the presence or absence of a return ball is determined depending on which of the two passing detection sensors detects the game ball first. (Refer to Modification 12 in FIG. 114, Modification 13 in FIG. 115, etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the support member 77 is mounted on the base member 78 at a position above the lower end portion of the firing rail 74 so as to be operable in an obliquely upwardly inclined direction. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, a predetermined bracket (not shown) is used behind the base member 78 and obliquely above the lower end of the firing rail 74. A solenoid 77a is attached. A part of the plunger 77b protrudes downward from the solenoid 77a, and a rear end portion of a transmission member 77d (for example, substantially rod shape) is connected to the joint 77c at the protruding end of the plunger 77b. When the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) is excited, the protruding amount of the plunger 77b decreases, and when the excitation of the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) is stopped, the protruding amount of the plunger 77b increases.

  The transmission member 77 d is inserted through the long hole 21 a of the resin base 21 and the long hole 78 a of the base member 78 with the rear end portion being disposed on the resin base 21. The front end portion of the transmission member 77d is integrated with the back surface of the support member 77. For this reason, the plunger 77b and the support member 77 can operate integrally through the transmission member 77d. The solenoid 77a is connected to a main control device 81 as drive control means. In the first embodiment, the solenoid is exemplified as the driving unit that drives the support member 77, but the mode of the driving unit is not limited to the solenoid. For example, other actuators such as a motor can be used.

  When normal (when the game ball is supported at the firing position 74W), as shown in FIG. 11A, the excitation of the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) is stopped, and the protruding amount of the plunger 77b is increased. . At this time, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the lower end side of the support member 77 is located at the upper rear part of the game ball F arranged at the launch position, so that the game ball is supported at the launch position. On the other hand, when a game ball (hereinafter referred to as a return ball) that runs backward on the launch rail 74 is generated, the solenoid 77a is excited as shown in FIG. 11B, and the protruding amount of the plunger 77b is reduced. For this reason, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 9, the support member 77 rises, and the support member 77 is retracted from the rear of the game ball F arranged at the launch position 74W. The game ball F on the launch rail 74 is discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74, passes through a communication passage (not shown), and is guided to the lower plate 72.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, a spacing portion 7D is provided between the upper end portion of the firing rail 74 and the lower end of the guide rail portion 5E. Among the rail portions 5B, the “inclination angles of the portion BD constituting the lower end portion side of the guide rail portion 5E” are substantially equal. That is, the game ball F that is launched by the launching device 75, passes through the launch rail 74 to its upper end, jumps over the interval portion 7D, and reaches the portion BD is pressed against the inner side surface BE of the outer rail portion 5B by centrifugal force. Meanwhile, the game area PE can be reached by rolling the outer rail portion 5B and ascending the outer rail portion 5B (by being guided to the guide rail portion 5E). Then, a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 75 but could not jump over the interval portion 7D, or is guided to the guide rail portion 5E by jumping over the interval portion 7D, but without reaching the game area PE The game ball that has returned to the part 5E falls as a foul ball to the interval part 7D. Then, the foul sphere that has fallen through the interval 7D is discharged to the lower plate 72 through the foul sphere passage. Note that the foul ball passage is integrally formed with a passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. In the first embodiment, the width of the spacing portion 7D is about 45 mm to 55 mm.

  Here, in this specification, the “return ball” means that the game ball at the launch position 74W is fired by the launch device 75 in the launch direction (direction of the guide rail portion 5E as viewed from the launch device 75 side). A game ball that cannot complete 74, runs backward on the launch rail 74, and returns to the launch position 74W. In particular, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-130160 and the like, when the launch rail 74 is installed at a steep slope (for example, 50 to 80 degrees), the launch intensity given to the game ball by the launch device 75 is high. If it is weak, there is a high possibility of producing a “return ball”. Further, if a subsequent game ball is fired until the “return ball” on the firing rail 74 returns to the firing position 74W, the return ball and the subsequent game ball collide, and the return ball is played in the firing direction. Sometimes. When the spacing portion 7D is narrow, etc., the launch rail 74 is completely run and entered the guide rail portion 5E, but the guide rail portion 5E runs backward, jumps over the spacing portion 7D, reaches the launch rail 74, It may run backward on the firing rail 74 and become a “return ball”. Even when the “return ball” is generated, if the operation of the firing handle 8A is continued, the game balls continued from the ball feeding device 76 are sequentially sent to the firing rail 74, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the firing rail 74. There is a possibility that game balls (two, three, four, five, etc.) will accumulate. Hereinafter, the collection of a plurality of game balls on the launch rail 74 may be referred to as “ball pool” or “ball jam”.

  A player who intends to solve such a “ball pool” by himself holds the game ball stored in the upper plate 71 with his hand and prevents the game ball from being supplied from the ball feeder 76 to the firing rail 74. However, the game balls accumulated on the launch rail 74 are repeatedly fired several times with a weak launch strength (a launch strength that can reach the interval portion 7D). Thereby, it is conceivable that a large number of game balls on the launch rail 74 sequentially reach the interval portion 7D, drop from the interval portion 7D, and be discharged to the lower plate 72 through the foul ball passage.

  However, if such a measure is taken, the game is interrupted and a smooth game cannot be executed, and the player is different from the original game (the firing intensity is finely adjusted, It is compelling and annoying to collect the game balls. In particular, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-130160, etc., when the launch rail 74 is installed at a steep slope, the launch handle 8A is operated in a normal rotation operation (not a full rotation operation). It is difficult to give a launching strength that can reach the gap portion 7D to a game ball in which a ball pool is generated even if a rotation operation that is normally performed to perform the operation is performed. In addition, when the launch rail 74 is installed in a steep slope in this way, if the number of game balls that accumulate on the launch rail 74 becomes large, it is substantially possible to cause the large number of game balls to reach the interval portion 7D. It is impossible, and the player cannot solve the “ball clogging” by himself. It should be noted that a case where a predetermined profit can be obtained by placing a game ball in a predetermined part at the time limit (a case where a so-called V acquisition round to be described later has arrived) If it occurs, the “opportunity for profit acquisition” that should have been originally acquired is deprived, which is severe for the player.

  Further, even if the launch rail 74 is installed at a steep slope, when the number of game balls accumulated on the launch rail 74 is relatively small, the launch handle 8A is fully rotated, and the launch device 75 is particularly large. It is also conceivable to give firing strength. In this case, the game ball to be fired is driven to the deepest part (the deepest part) of the right-handed region R (it is driven with a strength that cannot be won in the winning opening), and the game ball has no profit (winning etc.). ), Which is a so-called “waste ball”. Thus, since it is a great loss for the player to generate “waste balls”, it is desirable to collect them without making them “waste balls”.

  And if the frequency of “ball pool” is high, or if it is difficult to resolve “ball pool” by yourself, it is necessary to have the pachinko hall clerk resolve the “ball pool”. It becomes. In this case, the pachinko hall clerk must first unlock the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1), open the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13, and remove the return ball from the firing rail 74. It is. In this case, the player stops the game for a while (until the operation of removing the return ball is completed and the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13 and the cylinder lock 17 is locked). It will be necessary. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the discharge means is provided and the occurrence of the ball pool can be suppressed regardless of the installation angle of the launch rail 74, the game can proceed smoothly.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the launching device 75 is arranged on the base member 78 further below the mounting portion of the support member 77. This launching device 75 is a solenoid-type launching device and is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device 98 described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a plunger 75 a having an axis substantially parallel to the path of the firing rail 74 and a striking portion 75 b attached to the upper end (left end) of the plunger 75 a are provided. And based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device 98, it is possible to repeat excitation / de-excitation at regular intervals, and “the upper end (left end) of the plunger 75a is the guide rail portion 5E ( It is possible to repeat (moving forward (protruding) in the direction of FIG. 7) and “retreating in the direction away from the guide rail portion 5E” (reciprocating in a direction substantially parallel to the path of the firing rail 74). .

  Further, the projection speed of the plunger 75a is adjusted based on the operation amount of the launch handle 8A, and the striking force (the launch speed of the launch ball, the flight amount) that the launch device 75 loads on the game ball is adjusted. . That is, since the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 8A is detected through the variable resistor 88, the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the detected rotation operation amount. The launching device 75 is not a solenoid-type launching device, but may be a launching device using a motor and a launching rod, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when normal (when the game ball is supported at the firing position 74W), an empty space 77u is provided below the support member 77, and the rear center of the game ball F is empty. It is opened backward (in the direction of the launching device 75) through the space 77u. When the launching device (solenoid) is excited, the hitting portion 75b enters the empty space 77u and pushes the center of the rear of the game ball F, whereby the game ball F is shot.

  Next, the ball feeder 76 will be described. The ball feeding device 76 is a device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 one by one to the firing position 74W (near the lower end of the firing rail 74). As shown in FIG. 8, the ball feeding device 76 includes a ball feeding case member 76a, a ball feeding solenoid 76b, and a ball feeding lever 76c. The ball feeding device 76 (ball feeding case member 76a) is supported by the base member 78 using a ball feeding support member 79a. Here, the ball feed support member 79a is a fat member that is long on the left and right, and is mounted on the front surface of the base member 78 and closer to the upper edge thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the ball feeding case member 76 a has a substantially box shape (for example, made of resin) opened rearward, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 flow down to the firing rail 74 side. It functions as a passage forming member. Further, a ball feed lever 76c and a ball feed solenoid 76b are incorporated in the ball feed case member 76a (see FIGS. 13 and 14). Further, a receiving port 76d is provided on the left end side of the ball feeding case member 76a so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 can be received inside the ball feeding case member 76a. Then, the game ball F guided from the ball tray portion 71 is introduced into the ball feeding case member 76a from the receiving port 76d.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball F that has entered from the receiving port 76d is located inside the ball feed case member 76a and located behind the lower right corner of the receiving port 76d (hereinafter referred to as a standby position) 76e. Be guided to. That is, floor portions 76f and 76g for restricting the guiding direction of the game ball received in the receiving port 76d are provided at the rear of the lower edge portion of the receiving port 76d and the rear of the lower left corner portion. Among these, since the floor 76g behind the lower left corner is inclined downward in the right direction, the game ball that has reached the floor 76g is guided to the standby position 76e. Further, the floor 76f behind the lower edge of the receiving port 76d is inclined downward to guide the game ball that has reached the floor 76f backward. Then, after the game ball received in the receiving port 76d is received in the receiving port 76d, the game ball is guided rearward by the floor portion 76f, and then guided to the right by the floor portion 76g and a course changing projection 79g described later. The standby position 76e is reached. That is, the receiving port 76d is sized to allow the game balls F to enter one by one, and the floor portions 76f and 76g and the course changing projection 79g guide the game balls that have entered from the receiving port 76d to the standby position 76e. ing.

  At the right end of the ball feed support member 79a, as shown in FIG. 8, there are two attachment portions 79b protruding in the U-shape on the front side and forming attachment holes penetrating vertically. It has been. Further, at the right end portion of the ball feeding case member 76a, a mounted portion 76i that can be engaged with the mounting portion 79b is formed in a shaft shape that protrudes downward from a support surface having a thickness in the vertical direction. The right end portion of the ball feeding case member 76a is supported by the support surface of the attached portion 76i on the upper surface of the attaching portion 79b, and the shaft portion of the attached portion 76i is inserted into the attaching portion 79b, thereby The case member 76a is supported so as to be rotatable about the right end of the case member 76a.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, an engagement receiving portion 79e is provided at the left end portion of the ball feed support member 79a. Further, the engaging claw portion 76j protrudes rearward from the rear left end portion of the ball feeding case member 76a, and the ball feeding support member 79a so that the left end portion of the ball feeding support member 79a and the left end portion of the ball feeding case member 76a overlap. On the other hand, when the ball feeding case member 76a is pushed in, the engagement claw portion 76j is elastically engaged with the engagement receiving portion 79e. Thereby, the ball feed case member 76a is fixed to the ball feed support member 79a.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the front wall 79f of the ball feed support member 79a has a course changing projection 79g with the left side projecting greatly forward and the projection amount gradually decreasing toward the right. A ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h that is continuous with the right side portion of the change projection portion 79g and is formed one step higher than the periphery is provided. Among these, the course changing projection 79g is provided above the floor 76g and at a position where a game ball rolling on the floor 76g can slide. Then, as described above, the traveling direction of the game ball guided backward by the floor portion 76g is changed to the right side and guided to the standby position 76e. Further, the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h is located behind the standby position 76e, and the game ball guided to the standby position 76e is moved in three directions together with the lower edge side of the floor portion 76g and the upper edge portion 76w of the ball feed lever 76c. Support from.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the ball feed lever 76c includes a lever main body 76k, a shaft support portion 76m provided at the right end portion of the lever main body 76k, a ball receiving portion 76n provided at the left end portion of the lever main body 76k, And a metal plate 76p mounted on the upper surface of the lever main body 76k. Further, the metal plate 76p is provided at a portion between the shaft support portion 76m and the ball receiving portion 76n on the upper surface of the lever main body 76k. Note that the ball receiving portion 76n is configured in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and forms a space in which only one game ball can be received (see FIG. 13).

  The lever body 76k is swingably supported by the ball feed case member 76a using a support pin 76r inserted into the shaft support portion 76n. Further, the ball receiving portion 76n is opened in a U-shape on the left side and opened in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and can receive one game ball. Further, the upper surface of the bottom 76s of the ball receiving portion 76n has a downward slope toward the rear (toward the firing rail 74).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the ball feed solenoid 76b is attached so as to face the metal plate 76p of the ball feed lever 76c. Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the ball feed solenoid 76b is not energized, the ball feed lever 76c is lowered by its own weight so that the left side portion of the ball feed lever 76c is lowered around the support pin 76r. Rotate. However, when the left portion of the ball feed lever 76c is rotated so as to be lowered, the restricting projection 76t provided on the ball feed case member 76a supports the ball feed lever 76c from below. That is, the restricting protrusion 76t protrudes from the back surface of the front wall portion 76u constituting the ball feed case member 76a, and restricts the movement range of the ball feed lever 76c. The position of the ball feed lever 76c when the left end portion of the ball feed lever 76c is supported by the restricting projection 76t is hereinafter referred to as a “lowering position”.

  When the left end portion of the ball feed lever 76c is supported by the restricting projection 76t, when the ball feed solenoid 76b is energized and a magnetic force is generated, the ball feed lever 76c is supported as shown in FIG. The metal plate 76p rotates around the pin 76r in the direction approaching the ball feed solenoid 76b. As a result, the left end side of the ball feed lever 76c is raised, and the position of the ball feed lever 76c at this time is hereinafter referred to as “rise position”. In this way, the ball feed lever 76c can swing with reference to the support pin 76r by turning the ball feed solenoid 76b in an energized state or a non-energized state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h is located on the rear side of the ball receiving portion 76n when the ball feeding lever 76c is in the raised position, and after the ball receiving portion 76n and the ball receiving portion. A game ball cannot enter between the side wall portion 79h. Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, the ball feeding support member 79a is not present on the lower side of the ball receiving rear side wall portion 79h, and the direction of the firing rail 74 (the firing rail 74 attached to the base member 78). It is open to.

  Next, the ball feeding operation performed by the ball feeding device 76 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. Here, in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the game balls F1 that have entered the ball feeding case member 76a from the receiving port 76d are taken into the ball receiving portion 76n one by one by the ball feeding lever 76c, and are moved to the firing position. FIG. 13 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the ball feeding case member 76a is cut along a plane parallel to the base member 78 (cross section 4-4 in FIG. 12) in order to explain the state of being supplied; FIG. 13C shows a case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in a non-energized state, and FIG. 13B shows a case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in an energized state. 14A to 14C, the game balls F1 entering the ball feed case member 76a from the receiving port 76d are taken into the ball receiving portion 76n one by one by the ball feed lever 76c and supplied to the launch position. In order to explain the state of being played, it is a rear view seen from the rear of the gaming machine, and shows the relationship among the launch rail 74, the ball feed lever 76c, and the ball feed case member 76a. 14A and 14C show a case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in a non-energized state, and FIG. 14B shows a case where the ball feed solenoid 76b is in an energized state. 14A to 14C, the phantom line displayed in front of the receiving port 76d (the effort in the drawing) indicates the course changing protrusion 79g and the ball receiving rear side wall 79h.

  As described above, the game ball F1 guided to the standby position 76e includes the lower end edge of the floor portion 76g, the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n of the ball feeding lever 76c in the lowered position, and the ball receiving rear side wall portion. 79h, the state is supported from three directions (supported from three directions and not lowered). Here, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the ball receiving portion 76n of the ball feeding lever 76c includes an opening 76v that opens to the left, and the opening 76v is directed to the floor 76g described above. ing. However, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, when the ball feed lever 76c is in the lowered state, the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n and the lower end portion of the floor portion 76g. Since the distance is less than the diameter of the game ball, it is stopped at the standby position 76e.

  From this state, when the ball feed solenoid 76b is energized and the ball feed lever 76c is raised, the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n is raised as shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 14 (b). Since the distance between the upper edge portion 76w and the lower end portion of the floor portion 76g slightly exceeds the diameter of the game ball, the game ball F1 located at the head of the floor portion 76g (game ball at the standby position 76e) Enters the ball receiving portion 76n. However, as described above, since the ball receiving portion 76n forms a space in which only one game ball can enter, the game ball F2 following the game ball F1 has a lower end (standby position 76e) of the floor portion 76g. ).

  As shown in FIGS. 13B and 14B, when the ball feed solenoid 76b is energized, a ball receiving rear side wall 79h is disposed behind the game ball F1 accommodated in the ball receiving portion 76n. Therefore, even though the bottom 76s (see FIG. 8) of the ball receiving portion 76n has an upper surface inclined rearward (in the direction of the launch rail 74), the game ball F1 is more than the ball receiving portion 76n. Flowing downward (fired rail 74 side) is restricted. When the ball feed solenoid 76b is in a non-energized state in this state, the ball feed lever 76c rotates to the lowered position as shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 14 (c). At this time, since the ball receiving portion 76n moves below the rear side wall portion 79h and the rear side of the ball receiving portion 76n is opened, the game ball F1 accommodated in the ball receiving portion 76n moves along the upper surface of the bottom portion 76s. It moves and moves to the lower end side (launch position 74W) of the firing rail 74.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 14 (c), when the ball feed solenoid 76b is in a non-energized state, the ball of the next game ball F2 is caused by the upper edge portion 76w of the ball receiving portion 76n. The flow down to the receiving portion 76n is restricted. Accordingly, by repeatedly executing the on / off operation of the ball feed solenoid 76b, the game balls F (F1, F2, F3, etc.) are temporarily held one by one at the standby position 76e and then moved to the launch position 74W. Will be guided. The on / off state of the ball feed solenoid 76b and the excitation / non-excitation of the launch device 75 (solenoid) are configured to be synchronized. That is, based on the operation of the launch handle 8A and when a condition for launching a game ball F2 to be described later is satisfied, first, one game ball F2 is first launched by the ball feeder 76 by the launch rail 74. The positioning member 77 holds the firing position 74W. Thereafter, the launch device 75 is driven and controlled, and the game ball F2 is launched toward the game area PE.

<Configuration of front door frame 14>
A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially polygonal shape, a substantially elliptical shape, or a substantially perfect circle shape whose upper portion is rounded in an arc shape, and the above-described window panel 62 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. Further, around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 7A side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 72 does not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 2) of the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism 7A and the function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper tray 71. It has a function as a saucer for storing game balls (so-called foul balls) discharged from the gap 74D and game balls (return balls) that have returned to the launch rail 74. Further, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

<Configuration on the back side of the gaming machine body 12>
Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power source. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Contained and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81, and are coupled between the board box 83 and the mounting base by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Processing is performed. In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is made, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 8A is performed. Specifically, drive control of the launching device 75 (solenoid constituting the launching device 75) constituting the game ball launching mechanism 7A and the ball feeding device 76 (ball feeding solenoid 76b) is executed.

  Further, the power source / launch control device 98 is provided with a power switch. By operating the power switch, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to the on state (on state) or the shut off state (off state). Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, the state of the power failure can be maintained, and when returning from a power failure, the state can be restored. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. The details of the electrical configuration related to the hold notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211g, 74b, and the like provided in the main control device 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211g, 74b, a prize-winning ball-entry unit (a payout-compatible ball) such as a general prize-winning port 31, a variable prize-winning device 32, an upper working port 33, a lower working port 34, a through gate 35, and the like. A plurality of detection sensors provided in the first control unit 81 are connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (success determination) for each winning part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a solenoid 77a (a driving source for the support member 77), a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main display section is operated in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display part RS in 43 is executed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  Details of the power supply and launch control device 98 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. As shown in FIG. 16, the power source / launch control board 98a constituting the power source / launch control device 98 is provided with a power source circuit 98b. The power source circuit 98b provides external power supplied from the commercial power source. Based on this, the necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. In addition to the power supply circuit 98b, the power supply and launch control board 98a is provided with a launch control circuit 98c responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball. The game ball launching mechanism 7A is driven when a “predetermined launch condition” shown below is met.

  In addition, a launch handle 8A is connected to the input side of the input / output port of the power / fire control board 98a. Specifically, a touch sensor 87 for detecting that the firing handle 8A is touched by the player, a variable resistor 88 for detecting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 8A, and the firing handle 8A A stop switch 89 that is operated to stop the launch of the game ball even when being operated by the player is connected. Further, a launching device 75 (solenoid constituting the launching device 75) and a ball feeding device 76 (ball feeding solenoid 76b) are connected to the output side of the input / output port, and the launching device 75 and the ball feeding device 76 are connected to each other. Drive control is performed by the power source / fire control device 98 (fire control circuit 98c).

  A main controller 81 is connected to the input / output port of the power / fire control board 98a. Detection signals from the touch sensor 87 and the stop switch 89 are input to the main control device 81 via the power source / launch control device 98. Although details will be described later, the main control device 81 is configured to set whether or not to fire based on these signals and to input a signal indicating that to the power source / fire control device 98. That is, the power supply / launch control device 98 (launch control circuit 98c) controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 7A based on information from the main control device 81 and the launch handle 8A.

  The above-described launch control circuit 98c is provided with a transmission circuit 98d that satisfies a condition, a reception circuit 98e that is permitted to fire, and a launch IC 98f. Among these, the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 98d has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. doing. Further, the emission permission receiving circuit 98e sets the "transmitting from the MPU 202 as one condition that the HI level condition establishment signal is transmitted from the condition establishment transmission circuit 98d to the MPU 202 of the main control device 81". HI level launch permission signal (signal corresponding to launch permission) ". Further, the launch permission receiving circuit 98e has a function of continuously supplying a corresponding signal to the launch IC 98f when the launch permission signal is received.

  Note that the MPU 202 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, and at the end of reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal, emits the HI level. End transmission of the permission signal. Here, “a signal indicating that the launch handle 8A is touched by the player is received from the touch sensor 87” and “a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated by the player are received from the stop switch 89”. If not, the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 98d transmits a HI-level condition-satisfying signal (a signal corresponding to the condition-satisfying) to the MPU 202 of the main control device 81.

  When the launch IC 98f receives a launch permission signal of HI level or a signal corresponding thereto from the launch permission receiving circuit 98e, the launch IC 98f receives the launch device 75 of the game ball launch mechanism 7A and the ball feeder 76, respectively. And a function of outputting a drive signal periodically. In this case, the launch IC 98f outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. In addition, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeder 76 than in the launcher 75 so that the game ball is fired after one game ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74. (See FIG. 43).

  Note that the firing strength of the game ball by the launching device 75 becomes stronger as the launching handle 8A has a larger amount of rotation operation. In this case, the firing handle 8A is provided with a variable resistor 88 as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the handle portion. In the launching IC 98f, the launching device 75 is supplied with a voltage input from the variable resistor 88. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the.

  To explain further with reference to FIG. 15, the voice lamp control device 82 applies to each of the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 and the front door frame 14 provided in the variable display unit 36 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided are driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the symbol combination display time on the symbol display device 41 and finally the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The presence or absence of reach and the contents of reach production are determined.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state in which a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then an explicit movie is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state in which a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then the common video Is displayed. In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  Further, a first hold display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, and a second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G. Among these, the first hold display area (non-priority hold display area) Ga has the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in the left-right direction as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33. The sections are displayed so as to be juxtaposed. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 is four, and the first reserved display area Ga corresponding to this is the first unit reserved display area Ga1, second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set. For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball is displayed in the upper operation port 33. When the number of holds when winning is 4, the predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. The display contents in the first hold display area Ga will be described later in detail.

  In the second hold display area (priority hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the lower operating hole 34 is four, and the second reserved display area Gb is associated with the first unit reserved display area Gb1, second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set. For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. In the case where the number of holds is 4, the hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Gb1 to the fourth unit hold display area Gb4. The display contents in the second hold display area Gb will be described in detail later.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery generation of jackpots, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining jackpot types such as a probabilistic jackpot result and a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43 And the second result display unit BS and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the symbol display device 41. It is set to be. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 232 including a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total number of reservations storage area. In the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 19 (a) and the success / failure table for high probability mode (high) in FIG. Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability correspondence state) and a high probability mode (high probability correspondence state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), there are two random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot. . On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), there are 21 random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot. It is. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. Further, in the present embodiment, common information is provided for the number of random numbers that are won in the low probability mode and the number of random numbers that are won in the high probability mode. Common information may not be provided between the number of random numbers and the number of random numbers won in the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to increase the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable prize winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 15 times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 32a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 8A is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 7a is configured so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 32a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 increases from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to when it ends, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 is not substantially generated.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the minimum secured time is secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character releasing lottery is performed. By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time in the display part 44 for an accessory) and increasing the winning probability, the low frequency support mode is applied. The advantage of the high frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit in FIG. 20A and a second result display unit in FIG. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 20A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low-probability corresponding special game result), the unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result (non- Explicit high-probability corresponding game result or latent probability variation state), explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or sudden probability variation result), 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result) Has been.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained at the previous mode. It is a result. In other words, the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (non-explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), in the distribution table for the first result display section, “0-9” among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0-29” corresponds to the normal jackpot result. “10-14” corresponds to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, “15-19” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and “20-29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result. ing.

  As described above, the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot result, thereby diversifying the mode of the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when the three types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the next highest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency support mode, and in the opening / closing execution mode the low-frequency winning mode is maintained and the previous mode is maintained in the support mode The implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In particular, in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the support mode is maintained in the previous mode, although the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. That is, when an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the normal gaming state, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode although the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destination. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display section or the distribution table for the second result display section is used, the probability of a promiscuous jackpot result when the jackpot is won is the same. Yes. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is determined based on whether or not a big win is won based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and a big winning win based on the winning to the lower working port 34. (Specifically, 2/3). However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the lower working port 34 and a probable big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big winning result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the upper working port 33 and In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probable jackpot result or an explicit 2R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/4, and a 15R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/2. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  In addition, in the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends as described above, but since the support mode is maintained in the previous mode, the 15R probability variation jackpot result and explicit When compared with the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the chance that the electric ball 34a is less likely to be in an open state reduces the chance of receiving a game ball, and the lottery based on the distribution table for the second result display section Is less likely to occur.

  As described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower working port 34 among the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and accordingly, the frequency of winning in the lower working port 34. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, and the change of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result in the game times to be, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 17 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first terminated in the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbol variation display is terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any one of the valid display items is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of variation display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS and when the symbol display apparatus 41 determines the variation display time (variation pattern) of the symbol. .

  More specifically, the variation type counter CS is a loop counter for use in determining the change time of the identification information (the change time of the identification information), and the MPU 201 executes the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 232 at the start of the change. The variation display time is determined with reference to the variation type counter CS stored in the above and the variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. That is, the main control device 81 determines the variation display time in the first result display section AS when changing based on the winning of the upper working port 33, and when changing based on the winning of the lower working port 34. The variable display time in the second result display unit BS is determined. Also, the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are based on the variable display time determined by the main control device 81, and the symbol display device 41 can select from the variation modes that can be varied and displayed within the variation display time. The details of the variation mode of the symbol to be displayed are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to variably display the symbol, and outputs a sound from a speaker (sound output device) in accordance with the variation display. 47 and 63 are lit and blinked.

  Here, in this embodiment, as the variable display time table to be referred to when determining the variable display time, the big hit variable display time table {FIG. In FIG. 20, an outlier variation display time table {FIG. 20 (d)} to be referred to when an outage result is obtained. In the first embodiment, a common table is used as the jackpot variation display time table and the variation display time table for losing regardless of the winning lottery mode (in the high probability mode and in the low probability mode). Although the case of using is illustrated, as a display time table of at least one of the jackpot variable display time table and the off-set variable display time table, a variable display time table that is different for each of the lottery modes may be used. In this case, for example, the variation time determined using the variation display time table for the high probability mode tends to be shorter than the variation time determined using the variation display time table for the low probability mode. Also good.

  In the first embodiment, as the jackpot variation display time table and the deviation variation display time table, a common table is used regardless of the support mode (in the high frequency support mode and in the low frequency support mode). However, as the display time table of at least one of the jackpot variable display time table and the off-set variable display time table, a variable display time table that is different for each support mode may be used. In this case, for example, the variation time determined using the variation display time table for the high frequency support mode tends to be shorter than the variation time determined using the variation display time table for the low frequency support mode. There may be.

  Next, a specific example of the variable display time table will be illustrated using (c) and (d) of FIG. First, FIG. 20C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. This jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot (if 15R probability variation jackpot result or normal jackpot result) The group is divided into 15R jackpot group (group) to be referred to and 2R probability jackpot group (group) to be referenced in the case of 2R chance jackpot (explicit 2R chance jackpot result or unspecified 2R chance jackpot result) Yes. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS is associated with each divided group.

  When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a jackpot random number value at the start of fluctuation, the execution is performed according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area. The variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the area is determined. Here, referring to the 15R jackpot group (group), the variable display time is set to the first time (30 seconds) or the second time (60 seconds) longer than the first time. The association between the value of the variation type counter CS and the variation display time is such that the variation display time is the first time (30 seconds) when the count value of the variation type counter CS is between 0 and 39. When the value is between 40 and 198, the variable display time is the second time (60 seconds). Further, when the variable display time is the first time (30 seconds), the variable effect is performed in a normal reach manner under the control of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212. Further, when the variable display time is the second time (60 seconds), the variable effect is performed in a super reach manner under the control of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212.

  The normal reach is a reach that has a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which “the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2” are aligned after the short reach (so-called “bits are stopped and the symbols are aligned”). The super reach is a variation pattern in which “the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2” are aligned after reaching for a variation time longer than that of the normal reach (for example, a reach developed from the long reach or the normal reach). The variable display time table for the 15R jackpot result is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result (15R probability variation jackpot) or the normal jackpot result (15R regular jackpot), so that the player has a sense of expectation. Therefore, super reach is more easily selected than normal reach. For this reason, the super reach is a reach with a high expectation to obtain a jackpot result than the normal reach. However, in the present embodiment, the normal reach is selected even in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result (15R probability variation jackpot) or the normal jackpot result (15R normal jackpot), so any reach can be selected. It is now possible to provide a game that can be expected to win big hits.

  Note that there are many normal reach and super reach executed by the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, with different contents of effects even in the same variation time. For example, in addition to a normal reach where no character is displayed, when two symbols on the active line L1 become the same symbol and reach a reach state, or at other timing, a predetermined character or character information is once or plural times Reach is provided to display the times and perform a notice effect. Various characters are displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach types with different contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of change, and a reach that adds a big hit due to re-change. ing. Thereby, various variation effects can be executed and the interest of the player can be enhanced. In addition, as at least one of the normal reach and the super reach, a plurality of ones with different fluctuation display times may be set, and one of them may be selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

  In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot result (in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result), a variable display time is determined using a 2R probability variation jackpot group (group). However, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the variation display time is determined to be the third time (31 seconds) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS between 0 and 198. Even when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the one corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS may be selected from a plurality of 2R fluctuation patterns.

  In the variation based on the 2R probability variation jackpot result, one mode is selected from a plurality of prepared 2R probability variation jackpot variation modes under the control of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, and in the selected mode. Variation production is performed. As a variation mode for the 2R probability variation jackpot result, for example, a variation mode in which “a symbol in the middle symbol row Z2” is arranged through a final reach together with a predetermined character can be exemplified.

  FIG. 20D is a variation display time table for detachment that is referred to when a losing result is obtained in the success / failure lottery. This variable display time table is divided into a non-reach group (group) that is referenced when no reach occurs and a reach group (group) that is referenced when reach occurs. The value of the variation type counter CS is associated with each of the divided groups. Specifically, at the start of fluctuation, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a jackpot value (jackpot random number value) (is a value that is out of place), and the reach random number counter C3 If no reach occurs based on the value of, the variable display time is used for the non-reach group (group), which is the fourth time (for example, 7 seconds) or longer than the fourth time. It is determined as any one of the fifth time (for example, 10 seconds). When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 149, the fourth time (fluctuation display time; 7 seconds) is set. When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 150 to 198, the fifth time (fluctuation display time; 10 seconds).

  Further, at the start of the fluctuation, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a value (big hit random number value) that is a big hit (the value that was out of place), and the value of the reach random number counter C3 When the reach is generated based on this, the variable display time is set to the first time (30 seconds) or the second time (60 seconds) using the reach group. However, when the value of the variation type counter CS is 0 to 195, the first time (variation display time; 30 seconds) is set, and when the value of the variation type counter CS is 196 to 198, the second time (variation display time). ; 60 seconds).

  As described above, the variation display time table in FIG. 20D is a variation display time table used regardless of the probability mode when the result is a failure in the winning / failing lottery. However, the variation display time table in FIG. An application example is possible in which the display time table is a variable display time table that is used only when the probability mode is the low probability mode. In this application example, a variable display time table used in the high probability mode is provided in addition to the variable display time table of FIG. An example of the variable display time table used in this high probability mode is the variable display time table shown in FIG.

  The variable display time table shown in FIG. 20E is also divided into a non-reach group (group) that is referred to when reach does not occur and a reach group (group) that is referred to when reach occurs. Each of the divided groups is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS. That is, if no reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variable display time is set to the fourth time (for example, 7 seconds) or the fourth time for the non-reach group (group). It is determined as any one of the fifth time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the time. However, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 190, the fourth time (fluctuation display time; 7 seconds) is set. When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 191 to 198, the fifth time (fluctuation display time). ; 10 seconds). In other words, in the variation in which the outlier result is displayed without generating reach, the variation display time (fourth time) is shorter when the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode than when the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is likely to be set.

  In the variable display time table shown in FIG. 20 (e), when the reach is generated based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, the variable display time is set to the first time using the reach group. (30 seconds) or the second time (60 seconds). However, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 197, the first time (fluctuation display time; 30 seconds) is set. When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 198, the second time (fluctuation display time; 60 Second). In other words, in the fluctuation that generates reach and displays the result of losing, the fluctuation display time (fifth hour) is set shorter when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode than when the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode. There is a high possibility of being.

  Further, at the start of the fluctuation, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a value that is a jackpot (the jackpot random number value) (is a value that is out of place), and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is If the reach is to be generated based on the determination, the sound lamp control device is used when the variable display time is the first time (30 seconds), regardless of whether the winning / not determining lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. Under the control of the control device 82 and the display control device 212, a fluctuating effect is performed in a normal reach manner. Further, when the variable display time is the second time (60 seconds), the variable effect is performed in a super reach manner under the control of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example in which one type of normal reach or one type of super reach is selected with reference to the variation display time table for jackpots and the variation display time table for outliers is illustrated, but a plurality of types of normal reach are selected. 1 normal reach may be selected, or one super reach may be selected from a plurality of types of super reach. In this case, multiple types of normal reach (normal reach A, normal reach B) are distinguished by “expectation that will be a jackpot result at the time of appearance (expected degree that game result will be a jackpot result)”, or multiple types of super reach (super reach) A and Super Reach B) may be distinguished by “expected degree of jackpot result at the time of appearance”. For example, when Super Reach B appears while the pattern (symbol) changes in the symbol display device 41, the expectation that the jackpot result is displayed as the display result of the change is higher than when Super Reach A appears. May be.

  Further, in at least one of the jackpot variable display time table and the off-track variable display time table, the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of reserved numbers is larger. In particular, in a non-reach group (group), the variable display time may be set shorter as the number of common reservations CRN increases. Specifically, the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “1” is “21 sec”, the variable display time when “2” or “3” is “9 sec”, and “4” or more. The variable display time may be “3 sec”. In this case, when a large amount of hold information is stored in the hold ball storage area 232, the variable display time is shortened, and the hold digest (to be the target of the lottery or change display) can be performed efficiently. Progresses smoothly.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, the MPU 202 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Configuration of the holding ball storage area 232>
Next, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  The first result display section holding area Ra stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. Is a reserved area for In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for storing. Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It consists of an area and more. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are stored on hold.

  The C1 storage area is composed of 2 bytes, and the jackpot counter C1 value of any of 0 to 599 is stored using the lower 10 bits of 0 to 9. The upper 6 bits of 10 to 15 in the C1 storage area are unused areas.

  The C2 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the jackpot type counter C2 value of any of 0 to 29 is stored using the lower 5 bits of 0 to 4. The upper 2 bits of 5 to 7 in the C2 storage area are unused areas.

  The C3 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and one of the reach random number counters C3 of 0 to 238 is stored using all 8 bits of 0 to 7.

  The reserved number storage area is a storage area for storing the number of use of the storage area, that is, the number of the game balls won in the upper operation port 33 and held. The reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value of 0 to 4 is stored using the lower 3 bits of 0 to 2. The upper 5 bits of 3 to 7 in the reserved number storage area are unused areas.

  In addition, in the reserved ball storage area 232, the total number of holds for storing information of the sum of the number of holds in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of holds in the second result display area reservation area Rb. A storage area is provided. The total reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value from 0 to 8 is stored using lower 4 bits of 0 to 3. Of the total reserved number storage area, the upper 4 bits of 4 to 7 are unused areas.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 18 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb, that is, a C1 storage area having a 2-byte configuration, a C2 storage area having a 1-byte configuration, and a 1-byte configuration. And a C3 storage area.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Thereafter, in step S104, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the operating ports 33, 34 is executed, and in addition, in a step S105, a winning process for winning in accordance with winning in the through gate 35 is executed. This timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The winning opening process for the operation port in step S104 and the through winning process in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning prize) in the upper operation port 33. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the upper working port 33.

  In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the lower working port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower working port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S207. In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34.

  In step S209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S206 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is finished as it is. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process S501 of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding result display unit hold area is set to 1 in step S302 In addition to the increment, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are used for the first result display unit. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  If the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used for the second result display section. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved memory number RbN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  In subsequent Steps S305 and S306, the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that a winning has occurred in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, and a hold described later. A confirmation process for hold notice and a process for setting a hold command, which are processes for executing a notice, are executed. These processes will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the information acquisition process ends.

  Note that the hold command set by the processes in steps S305 and S306 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described later. When the voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, the voice lamp control device 82 executes processing for turning on the first hold lamp unit 45. The first hold lamp unit 45 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the first start hold memory number RaN is 1, the leftmost first hold lamp unit 45 is turned on, and the first start hold memory number If RaN is 4, all the first holding lamps 45 are turned on. Further, when a hold command transmitted based on a winning to the lower working port 34 is received, a process for lighting the second hold lamp unit 46 is executed. The second hold lamp unit 46 is sequentially lit from the left side. For example, if the second start hold memory number RbN is 1, the leftmost second hold lamp unit 46 is turned on and the second start hold memory number If RbN is 4, all the second holding lamp portions 46 are turned on.

<Winning winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not the accessory reserve storage number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  If it is not determined in step S401 that a game ball has won the through gate 35, or if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the accessory reservation storage number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 The prize winning process is terminated without storing.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35 and the number of stored item reservations SN <4, the process proceeds to step S403, and the number of stored item reservations SN is incremented by one. Subsequently, in step S404, the value of the electric utility product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the electric utility reservation area 233 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the main winning process is terminated.

  In the through winning process, a process for turning on the third holding lamp unit 47 is executed. The third hold lamp unit 47 is sequentially lit from the left side. For example, if the accessory reservation storage number SN is 1, the leftmost third reservation lamp unit 47 is turned on and the accessory reservation storage number SN is If it is 4, all the 3rd holding | maintenance lamp | ramp parts 47 will be lighted.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S509 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S511 and S512 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, if a production command such as a variation command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S503, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S504, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the result display sections AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S505, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 506, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34 a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. The details of the power combination support process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S507, processing for determining whether or not a “return ball” exists on the firing rail 74 is performed. Subsequently, in step S508, when a “return ball” is generated, a process of eliminating the “return ball” is performed. Furthermore, in step S509, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, “Reception of launch permission of power source and launch control board 98a” is set under the condition that the condition fulfillment signal indicating the fulfillment of condition is received from the “satisfaction transmission circuit 98d” of the power supply and launch control board 98a. A process of transmitting a firing permission signal (a signal corresponding to the firing permission) to the circuit 98e "is performed.

  In the subsequent step S510, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is reached (steps S511, S512). That is, in step S511, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S512, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S509 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process shown in FIG. 27, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game times starting process of steps S603 to S605 and the game times progressing process of steps S606 to S609. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start process in steps S603 to S605. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common hold number CRN is “0” means that the start hold storage number is “0” for both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S604. In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed, and then the game number control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S708 to S713.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display hold area Ra and the second result display hold area Rb, the second result display hold area corresponding to the lower operation port 34. The hold information stored in Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, the first reserved storage number RaN of the first result display unit reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S703, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S705, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S706, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S707, a shift time command (shift occurrence information) that is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift time command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 16). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received shift command.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S708, the second reserved storage number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S709, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S710, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the memory | storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S711 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In subsequent step S712, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S713, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the second holding lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings based on the received shift command.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in a high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S803 by referring to a high probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not.

  After the process of step S802 or step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big win are executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S806, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 20A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is a numerical range of a normal jackpot result, a numerical range of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot Determine which of the resulting numerical ranges is included. On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, in step S807, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 20B). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  After the process of step S806 or step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S809, any stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round in which a probable jackpot result will occur. Execute the stop result setting process for probability variation jackpot to set whether to end the variable display at.

  The stop result setting process for probability variation big hit will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Here, as already described, in the distribution table for the first result display section, as the probability variation jackpot result, a plurality of types of game results including an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result. However, in the distribution table for the second result display section, only one type of 15R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the first result display unit. In step S901, a negative determination may be made or an affirmative determination may be made. On the other hand, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 34 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the second result display section. In step S901, an affirmative determination is always made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the distributed game result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If it is an explicit 2R probability change jackpot result, in step S903, the stop result table for explicit 2R probability change in the stop result table storage area 224 is referred to, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE The address information of the stop result data corresponding to is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S904. Thereafter, in step S905, after the explicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (explicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is stored in the explicit 2R probability variation flag (explicit high probability correspondence information), this stop result The setting process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in step S906 by referring to the stop result table for implicit 2R probability change in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S907. Then, after storing the implicit 2R probability variation flag (implicit high probability correspondence information) in the implicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (implicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S908. This stop result setting process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in step S909 by referring to the stop result table for 15R probability change in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information of the stop result data corresponding to is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S910. After that, in step S911, after the 15R probability variation flag storage area (high probability correspondence special information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is stored, this stop result setting process Exit.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S809, the process proceeds to step S813. On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots in the stop result table storage area 224, the address information of stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S811, after the normal big hit flag (low probability correspondence special information) is stored in the normal big hit flag storage area (low probability correspondence special information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, this stop result setting process Exit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813.

  If the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the flow proceeds to step S812. In step S812, for the off time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a losing result, and the variable display is ended. Execute the stop result setting process. In the outage stop result setting process, referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224, stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813.

  In step S813, a variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game time in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is executed. The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S1001, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202.

  In the subsequent step S1002, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any probability variation jackpot flag or normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1002 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. In step S1002, an affirmative determination is made. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to when the presence / absence of reach occurrence is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 in step S1003. In step S1004, the variable display time information corresponding to the variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends. In the present embodiment, the reach generation variation display time table referred to in step S1003 is the jackpot variation time table exemplified in FIG. 20C or the deviation variation time table exemplified in FIG. 20D. However, the aspect of the reach generation variation display time table is not limited to this.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, the current variation type counter CS of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S1005. The variable display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and in step S1006, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends. In this embodiment, the reach non-occurrence variable display time table referred to in step S1005 is a non-reach group in the out-of-run variable time table illustrated in FIG. The mode of the variable display time table for use is not limited to this.

  Further, as described above, the variable display time information when no reach occurs may be set such that the variable display time is shortened as the number of common pending counts CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the common pending number CRN may be used, and the variable display time may be set shorter as the number of the common pending number CRN is smaller. . When the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, the larger the first start pending storage number RaN is, the shorter the variable display time becomes, and the second start pending storage number RbN is equal to or greater than “1”. In this case, the variation display time may be set to be shorter as the number of the second start pending storage numbers RbN is larger. When the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, the larger the first start pending storage number RaN is, the shorter the variable display time becomes, and the second start pending storage number RbN is equal to or greater than “1”. In this case, the variable display time may be longer as the number of the second start reserved memory number RbN is larger, or may be set to be constant without depending on each of the reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), after step S813, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S814. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the first variation command is set in step S815. The first change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information. On the other hand, if the second result display section flag is stored, a second variation command is set in step S816. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information.

  After executing the process of step S815 or step S816, the type command is set in step S817. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, and the like as game result information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S815 to S817 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect at the game time based on the received change command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received change command and type command to the display control device 212 as they are. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed based on the variation command and the type command.

  After that, in step S818, the variation display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game round among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 27), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 31). The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. In the change end process, the address information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of step S809, step S810, or step S812 of FIG. The result display unit is controlled to be displayed on the display unit.

  In the subsequent step S609, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The change end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 32, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the implicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any one of the above flags is stored, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1104. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In a succeeding step S1105, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1106. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if it is the high-frequency winning mode, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1107.

  After executing the process of step S1106 or step S1107, an opening command is set in step S1108. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). This opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received opening command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. In addition, the opening command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the opening command, thereby displaying corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display). Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed. After executing the process of step S1108, the gaming state transition process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, and a prize winning opening / closing process is executed in step S1109. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 32a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 32c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. The big prize opening 32a is opened. Further, when the big prize opening 32a is being opened, the variable prize driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big prize opening 32a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 32c is stopped and the special winning opening 32a is closed. Note that the opening limit time and the opening limit number are different between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode as described above.

  In a succeeding step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending command is set in step S1111. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. In addition, the ending command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the ending command, thereby terminating the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode.

  Thereafter, in step S1112, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, in step S1202, a flag erasure process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In the subsequent step S1203, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1204, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In subsequent step S1205, a high-frequency support command (high-frequency support setting information) that is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the target command. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored, it is determined in step S1207 whether the high frequency support flag is stored. If the high frequency support flag is not stored, steps S1208 to S1208 are performed. After executing each process of step S1210, the migration process is terminated. In this case, in step S1208, the flag erasing process is executed. In step S1209, a high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In step S1210, a low frequency support command (low frequency support setting information), which is information for allowing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is sent to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the command to send. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, and after executing the processes in steps S1202 to S1205, the present migration process is terminated. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  If it is determined in step S1206 that the implicit 2R probability variation flag is not stored, this means that the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the fact that the normal jackpot flag is stored. In this case, the process of step S1211-step S1214 is performed. That is, in step S1211, the flag erasing process is executed. Thereafter, in step S1212, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1213, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  In subsequent step S1214, a high-frequency support command (high-frequency support setting information) that is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the target command. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  Incidentally, the high frequency support command set in step S1205 or step S1214 and the low frequency support command set in step S1210 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the high frequency support command and the low frequency support command to the display control device 212 as they are. Based on the reception of the high frequency support command, the display control device 212 specifies that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode. Further, the display control device 212 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode. These will be described in detail later.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 32), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1112 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S1113. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in step S1114, after executing the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition processing is ended. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, and the normal jackpot flag are stored, they are deleted, and if not already stored Maintain state.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the electric role support process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, in the electric power support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34B is opened, and is erased when returning to the closed state.

  If no supporting flag is stored, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not a support winning flag is stored in a support winning flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, after setting the out-of-line display, the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1306 whether the value of the accessory reservation storage number SN is greater than “0”.

  When the value of the stored item reservation memory number SN is “0”, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the reserved item storage number SN is larger than “0”, it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and in step S1308 whether or not the high frequency support mode is determined. .

  If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, the open lottery is performed in step S1309. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  In the following step S1310, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1309 is a support winning. If it is not a support win, the process proceeds to step S1312, without executing the processing of step S1311, and if it is a support win, a support win flag is stored in step S1311 and provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After setting “3” in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1312.

  In step S1312, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the game number counter area is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated. If the game number counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag is erased in step S1314. In subsequent step S1315, a low-frequency support command (low-frequency support setting information) that is information for allowing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. Set as the target command. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1315 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the low frequency support command to the display control device 212 as it is. Based on the reception of the low frequency support command, the display control device 212 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1316. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. Simultaneously with the open lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2.

  In a succeeding step S1317, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in the step S1316 is a support winning. If the support is not won, the main role support process is terminated. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1318, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the main role supporting process is terminated.

  If the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the flow advances to step S1319 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the accessory display unit 44 is being performed, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1320. As a result, the display of the variation of the pattern in the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. In the following step S1321, the supporting flag is stored, and after the support winning flag is erased, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If the in-supporting flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1322, and after executing the electric combination opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric combination 34a, the electric combination support process is terminated. The electric role opening / closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. When the electric accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1403, the closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed, and “250” (that is, 0.5 sec. ) Is set.

  Thereafter, in step S1404, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” in step S1405. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated, and when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, the supporting flag is deleted. After that, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the second timer area T2 is “0”, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the opened state is executed in step S1408.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode, and in step S1410, it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is set, “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1411, and then the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1412, and then the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. .

<Return ball detection processing>
Next, the return ball detection process in step S507 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the return ball detection process is based on the length of the cycle in which the passage detection sensor 74b of the launch rail 74 detects the passage of the game ball (the length of the cycle in which the game ball passes the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). The presence or absence of the return ball is detected. That is, as shown in Example 1 in FIG. 38A, in a normal state (a state in which no return ball exists on the launch rail 74), the game balls G1 that are successively launched from the launch position 74W by the launch device 75 are , Fired at a firing cycle (0.6 second cycle). For this reason, when the game ball G1 is continuously fired, the cycle in which the passage detection sensor 74b detects the game ball G1 is the predetermined cycle (0.6 second cycle). On the other hand, as shown in Example 2 in FIG. 38B, the game ball G1 that is launched from the launch position 74W and passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b cannot pass through the launch rail 74 completely. Suppose that the shooting ball 74 runs backward to become a return ball (game ball G1). At this time, the distance between the return ball (game ball G1) that started reverse running and the passage detection sensor 74b is shorter than the distance between the launch position 74W and the passage detection sensor 74b.

  For this reason, the time for the return ball (game ball G1) to pass through the passage detection sensor 74b arrives earlier than the scheduled time for the subsequent game ball G2 to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b. The scheduled time for the subsequent game ball G2 to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b is the time that the game ball G1 launched from the launch position 74w has passed through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b (return ball) This is the time that has passed by one firing cycle (0.6 second cycle) from the time when it has passed through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b. For this reason, in the case of Example 2, the return ball (game ball G1) is released before one firing cycle elapses from the time when the game ball G1 launched from the launch position 74w has passed the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b. It will pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b.

  Further, as shown in Example 3 in FIG. 39A, in the state where the return ball (game ball G1) exists on the launch rail 74, the game ball G2 that follows with the return ball (game ball G1) is launched by the launching device 75. , The distance from the return ball (game ball G1) to the passage detection sensor 74b is shorter than the distance from the game ball G2 at the launch position 74W to the passage detection sensor 74b (one game ball). short). For this reason, the time during which the return ball (game ball G1) launched together with the subsequent game ball G2 passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b is the passage detection sensor 74b when the subsequent game ball G2 is launched alone. Arrives earlier than the scheduled time of passing through the detection range.

  Further, as in Example 4 of FIG. 39B, when the return ball (game ball G1) is running backward on the launch rail 74 and the subsequent game ball G2 is launched by the launch device 75, The return ball (game ball G1) is bounced by the game ball G2 (bounced in the firing direction). For this reason, the time for the bounced return ball (game ball G1) to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b passes through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b when the subsequent game ball G2 is fired alone. Coming sooner than scheduled. In addition, while the game ball moves to a predetermined position on the launch rail 74 and runs backward in the direction of the launch position 74W, the game ball that follows from the ball feeder 76 is also shown in Example 5 in FIG. Since the launch position 74W is sequentially replenished, there is a possibility that the number of game balls on the launch rail 74 will increase to 2, 3,. In this case, since the distance between the return ball located at the head and the passage detection sensor 74b is further shortened, if the hitting force of the launcher 75 is applied to a plurality of game balls on the launch rail 74, the return ball located at the head However, the time for passing through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b arrives earlier than the scheduled time for passing through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b when the game ball at the launch position is fired alone.

  As described above, when a return ball is generated, the interval at which the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) detects the game ball is the game ball firing cycle (the cycle at which the launching device 75 launches the game ball, 0.6 Generally, it is shorter than the second period. However, even if a return ball is generated, the interval at which the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) detects the game ball depends on the condition of the launch rail (the presence of another return ball on the launch rail, etc.). The possibility of becoming longer or the same cannot be excluded. However, if even one game occurs in which the interval detected by the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) is shorter than the firing cycle, it can be determined that at least one return ball is present on the firing rail 74.

  In the return ball detection process shown in FIG. 37, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the “output state of the firing permission signal” is set to the HI level. That is, when the condition satisfaction signal input from the power supply / launch control device 98 described later is at the HI level and the cancel operation execution flag described later is released, the main control device 81 displays the “launch permission signal”. Is set to the HI level. Here, the case where the condition establishment signal is at the HI level is “when the player is touching the firing handle 8A and the firing stop operation is not performed”. The “output state of the firing permission signal” and the “condition establishment signal” will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the “output state of the firing permission signal” is set to the HI level, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the passage detection sensor 74b detects a game ball. If a negative determination is made in step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505, where “1” is added to the detection interval counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the return ball detection process is once ended. Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. For this reason, when the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect a game ball, the count value set in the detection interval counter TC2 is incremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle). That is, the detection interval counter TC2 is a counter that determines a time during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect a game ball (a period during which non-detection is continued).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, the process advances to step S1506 to determine whether the value of the detection interval counter TC2 is less than “150”. Here, the case where the value of the detection interval counter TC2 is “150” indicates that the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball is “0.6 seconds”, which is less than “150”. The case where the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect a game ball is less than “0.6 seconds”. Here, as described above, “0.6 seconds” is a period corresponding to the game ball firing cycle. When the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball is less than “0.6 seconds” (when the detection interval is less than “0.6 seconds”), it is determined that a return ball has occurred. When the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball is “0.6 seconds” (when the detection interval is “0.6 seconds”), it is determined that no return ball is generated. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, a return ball has been generated. Therefore, when the return ball flag is set, the process of step S1508 is executed, and the return ball detection process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1506, no return ball has been generated, and thus the process of step S1508 is executed, and then the return ball detection process is terminated. Here, in the process of step S1508, a process of setting the value of the detection interval counter TC2 to “0” is performed.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the “output state of the firing permission signal” is set to the LOW level, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the detection interval counter TC2 is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the return ball detection process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503, the process of setting the value of the detection interval counter TC2 to “0” is performed, and then the return ball detection process is terminated.

  Note that Modification 1 that determines whether or not “TC2 = 150” in Step 1506 of FIG. 37 can also be exemplified. In this modified example 1, if “TC2 = 150”, the process proceeds to step S1508 as it is. If not “TC2 = 150”, the process proceeds to step S1507, the return ball flag is set, and then the process proceeds to step S1508. That is, in the first modification, in Step 1506, it is determined whether or not the period during which the passage detection sensor 74b does not detect the game ball (hereinafter referred to as the non-detection period) matches the firing cycle. The return ball flag is set to.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to exemplify Modification 2 in which it is determined whether or not “TC2 = 125 to 175” in Step 1506 of FIG. In Modification 2, if “TC2 = 125 to 175”, the process directly proceeds to step S1508. That is, if the non-detection period is “0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds”, the process directly proceeds to step S1508. On the other hand, if it is not “TC2 = 125 to 175”, the process proceeds to step S1507, and after setting the return ball flag, the process proceeds to step S1508. That is, when the non-detection period is “less than 0.5 seconds” or “exceeds 0.7 seconds”, the return ball flag is set, and then the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In this modified example 2, even if an error occurs between the non-detection period and the firing cycle, if the error is within the allowable range, it is determined that a return ball has not occurred. It is determined that a sphere has occurred. For example, even if the game is continued in a state where no return ball is generated, an inevitable variation in the firing cycle occurs in each pachinko machine 10 or the period of use of the target pachinko machine 10 becomes longer, resulting in launching. The device 75 may rattle or the like. For this reason, an error may occur between the non-detection period and the launch cycle, but if the error is within an allowable range (within a range that can be absorbed, that is, within a range that does not interfere with a smooth game) It is decided that it has not occurred. In the second modification, the “range in which it is determined that no return sphere has occurred” is “a range of plus or minus 0.1 seconds of the firing period (0.6 seconds)”. It may be different from 2. For example, if the lower limit of the range is “minus 1.5 seconds of the firing period (0.6 seconds)” and the upper limit of the range is “plus 1.0 seconds of the firing period (0.6 seconds)” The lower limit of the range is “minus 1.0 second of the firing period (0.6 seconds)”, and the upper limit of the range is “plus 1.5 seconds of the firing period (0.6 seconds)”. Also good.

<Return ball cancellation processing>
Next, the return ball elimination process in step S508 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the return ball cancellation process, it is determined in step S1601 whether or not a cancellation operation execution flag is set. Specifically, the process of step S1601 can be performed by determining whether or not the cancellation operation execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Here, the cancellation operation execution flag is a flag indicating that an operation for canceling the return sphere (hereinafter referred to as cancellation operation) is being executed, and the return sphere cancellation is performed with the return sphere flag set. Set when the process is started.

  The canceling operation is an operation for canceling the return ball, and is an operation for moving the support member 77 obliquely upward as compared with the normal time (when the game ball is supported at the firing position 74W). More specifically, the solenoid 77a is excited, and the amount of protrusion of the plunger 77b is reduced as compared with the normal state (see FIG. 11). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 40B, the support member 77 is raised, and the support member 77 is retracted from the rear of the game ball. Then, the return ball G1 on the launch rail 74 and the game ball G2 newly supplied from the ball feeder 76 onto the launch rail 74 are discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74 and pass through a communication passage (not shown). It is guided to the lower plate 72.

  If it is determined in step S1601 in FIG. 40A that the cancel operation execution flag is not set, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a return ball flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, in step S1603, a process of setting a cancellation operation execution flag, a process of starting the cancellation operation, a process of erasing the return ball flag, and a cancellation operation end timer A process of setting “450 (1.8 seconds)” to te is executed, and the return ball elimination process is terminated. Here, the elimination operation end timer te is a timer that determines when the elimination operation is terminated when the elimination operation is started (when the elimination operation execution flag is set).

  If it is determined in step S1601 that the cancellation execution flag has been set, the value of the cancellation operation end timer te is decremented by 1 in step S1604. That is, the return ball cancellation process is a part of the normal process, and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, the count value set in the cancellation operation end timer te is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

  If step S1604 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the value of the elimination operation end timer te is “0”. If the value of the canceling operation end timer te is not “0”, the return ball canceling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the elimination operation end timer te is “0”, the process of ending the elimination operation and the process of erasing the elimination operation execution flag are performed in step S1606, and then the return ball Terminate the resolution process.

  When the value of the elimination operation end timer te becomes “0”, a process for terminating the elimination operation (a process for stopping the excitation of the solenoid 77a, lowering the support member 77, and supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W). However, if a process for ending this canceling operation is not performed, a warning sound may be generated or a warning lamp may be displayed. For example, a sensor for determining whether or not the position of the support member 77 is in a position for supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W is provided. Even when the value of the elimination operation end timer te becomes “0”, the sensor does not detect “the support member 77 at the position for supporting the game ball at the launch position 74W” for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds). The warning may be performed by a predetermined warning means (a means for warning by sound, a means for warning by light, a means for warning by vibration, a means for displaying a warning image (such as the symbol display device 41)).

  Further, in the game ball launch control process of FIG. 41 described later, when the position of the support member 77 is not in a position to support the game ball at the launch position 74W, the main controller 81 sets the output state of the launch permission signal to the HI level. It is good also as not setting. This point will be described later.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, the game ball launch control process in step S509 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the game ball launch control process, it is determined in step S1701 whether the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. Specifically, the determination in step S1701 is performed based on the condition satisfaction signal input from the power supply / launch control device 98.

  When the player is touching the firing handle 8A, a HI level signal is input from the touch sensor 87 to the power / fire control device 98, and when the fire stop operation is not performed, the power / fire control is performed from the stop switch 89. The device 98 is configured to receive a LOW level signal. Then, in the power source / launch control device 98, on the condition that the HI level signal is input from the touch sensor 87 and the LOW level signal is input from the stop switch 89, the HI level signal is transmitted to the main control device 81 as a condition establishment signal. It is configured to output. That is, the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 98d (see FIG. 16) of the power supply / emission control device 98 outputs a HI level signal to the main control device 81 as a condition-satisfying signal.

  In addition, when the HI level signal is input from the touch sensor 87 and the LOW level signal is not input from the stop switch 89, the power / fire control device 98 outputs a LOW level signal to the main control device 81 as a condition establishment signal. It becomes the composition which is done. That is, the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 98d (see FIG. 16) of the power supply / emission control device 98 outputs a LOW level signal to the main control device 81 as a condition-satisfying signal. Then, the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 makes a negative determination in step S1701 based on this condition satisfaction signal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not a cancel operation execution flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703, where it is determined whether or not the launch is already permitted. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the game ball launch control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, the launch permission state is set in subsequent step S1704. Specifically, the launch permission flag is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  Thereafter, based on the fact that the launch permission flag is stored in step S1705, the output state of the launch permission signal is set to the HI level, and this game ball launch control process is terminated. The main control device 81 shown in the first embodiment is connected to a power / fire control device 98, and a fire permission signal is input to the power / fire control device 98 (a fire permission receiving circuit 98e shown in FIG. 16). It has become. In the power source / launch control device 98, the game ball is launched based on the fact that the launch permission signal is at the HI level.

  Returning to the description of step S1701, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the condition satisfaction signal is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the firing permission state is canceled. Specifically, when the launch permission flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is deleted, and when the launch permission flag is not stored, it is maintained as it is. After executing the process of step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1707, based on the fact that the launch permission flag is not stored, the output state of the launch permission signal is set to the LOW level, and the game ball launch control process is terminated. In the power source / launch control device 98, the launch of the game ball is avoided based on the fact that the launch permission signal is at the LOW level.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, that is, the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level, but the cancellation processing execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the processing in step S1706, the processing in step S1707 The process is executed in the order of processing, and the game ball launch control process is terminated. That is, even if the main controller 81 receives the HI level signal as the condition establishment signal, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. For this reason, in the power supply / launch control device 98, the launch of the game ball is avoided based on the launch permission signal being at the LOW level.

  It can be determined whether or not the position of the support member 77 is at a position (hereinafter referred to as a basic position) that supports the game ball at the launch position 74W by a driving state of the solenoid 77a (a state where excitation is stopped) or a sensor. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41B, a process in step S1702A may be provided between the process in step S1702 and the process in step S1703. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1702A to determine whether or not the support member 77 is in the “basic position” (whether or not the support member 77 has returned to the basic position). . If the determination in step S1702A is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1703. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1702A, the process proceeds to step S1706 and step S1707, and the output state of the firing permission signal may be set to the LOW level. In this case, it is desirable to perform a “predetermined warning” as described above.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42, a description will be given of the launch control process that is periodically executed by the power source / fire control apparatus 98 (specifically, the same period as the normal process in the MPU 202 of the main control apparatus 81: 4 msec period). To do.

  First, in step S5001, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the firing permission signal output to the power source / launch control device 98 (the firing permission receiving circuit 98e) is at the HI level. If the firing permission signal is at the HI level, 1 is added to the value of the firing cycle counter (not shown) provided in the power source / launch control device 98 in step S5002, and the firing permission signal is at the LOW level. In this case, the value of the firing period counter is cleared to “0” in step S5003. Here, the launch cycle counter sets the launch cycle of the game ball to a predetermined one in a situation where the game ball should be launched using the ball feeder 76 and the launch device 75 based on the operation of the launch handle 8A. It is a counter used for this purpose.

  When the process of step S5002 or the process of step S5003 is executed, it is determined in step S5004 whether or not the ball has been fed. The ball fed state is a state where supply of one game ball onto the firing rail 74 by the ball feeder 76 has already been completed in a situation where a game ball is to be launched based on the operation of the launch handle 8A. It is.

  The power supply / launch control device 98 (launch permission receiving circuit 98e) outputs a ball feeding drive signal in S5007 (the ball feeding solenoid 76b performs an on / off operation), and the ball has been fed. It can be recognized that the ball has been fed. In addition, when providing the detection sensor which detects presence of the game ball of the launch position 74W, when this detection sensor detects a game ball, you may recognize it as a ball-fed state.

  If the ball is not already fed, it is determined in step S5005 whether the value of the firing period counter is “150”. The firing cycle counter is incremented by 1 at a cycle of 4 msec (the same cycle as the normal processing) when the firing permission signal is at the HI level. Therefore, when the value of the firing cycle counter is “150”, when the firing permission signal becomes HI level and the output state of the HI level continues, or when one game ball is It means that 0.6 sec has passed in the state where the output state of the HI level launch permission signal has continued since the launch.

  If the value of the firing cycle counter is not “150”, the firing control process is once terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the firing period counter is “150”, the process proceeds to step S5006 to step S5008. In step S5006, the value of the firing period counter is cleared to “0”. In step S5007, a driving signal for ball feeding is output to the ball feeding device 76. In step S5008, the ball feeding state is set. That is, the ball feeding device 76 shifts one game ball to the firing position of the firing rail 74 by outputting a driving signal for ball feeding. Then, the firing control process is once ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5004, 1 is added to the value of the counter after ball feeding provided in the power supply / launch control device 98 in step S5009. Based on the operation of the launch handle 8A, the post-ball feed counter drives and controls the launch device 75 after one game ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74 by the ball feed device 76, and the game ball It is a counter for specifying the timing which fires.

  In a succeeding step S5010, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after ball feeding is “50”. The counter after the ball feeding is incremented by 1 at a cycle of 4 msec (the same cycle as the normal processing) in the ball feeding completed state. For this reason, the case where the value of the counter after ball feeding is “50” means that 0.2 sec has elapsed after the game ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74.

  When the value of the counter after the ball feeding is not “50”, the firing control process is once ended. On the other hand, when the value of the counter after ball feeding is “50”, the process proceeds to step S5011 to step S5013. In step S5011, the power source / firing control device 98 grasps the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 8A based on the signal received from the variable resistor 88 of the firing handle 8A. In step S 5012, a driving signal for launching according to the launching intensity grasped in step S 5011 is output to the launching device 75. Thereby, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74 is launched at a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the launch handle 8A. Thereafter, in step S5013, the ball feeding completed state is canceled, and the firing control process is terminated. That is, the power source / launch control device 98 can recognize that the ball-feeded state has been canceled by outputting a launch drive signal to the launch device 75. As described above, when a detection sensor for detecting the presence of the game ball at the launch position 74W is provided, the detection sensor recognizes that the ball-sending state has been canceled because it no longer detects the game ball. it can.

  Next, using the timing charts of FIGS. 43 to 45, the relationship among the cancellation operation execution flag, the firing permission signal, the ball feeding operation performed by the ball feeding device 76, and the firing operation performed by the launching device 75 will be described.

  FIG. 43 shows a state in which the firing handle 8A is operated at the timing t1 (the player's hand is touching the firing handle 8A) and a LOW level signal is output from the stop switch 89 (from the power supply / launch control device 98). The condition establishment signal input to the main controller 81 is in the HI level). At this time, if the cancellation operation execution flag is released, main controller 81 sets the output state of the firing permission signal to the HI level. In this case, the ball feeding device 76 performs a ball feeding operation at the timing t2 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing t1, and supplies one game ball on the firing rail 74. Then, at the timing of t3 when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from t2, the launching operation of launching the game ball at the launch position 75W by the launching device 75 is executed. Thereafter, the ball feeding operation is performed at the timing t4 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing t2, and the firing operation is performed at the timing t5 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing t3. After that, when the condition establishment signal is at the HI level and the canceling operation execution flag is canceled, “ball feeding operation and the launch operation after 0.2” are repeated at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Can do.

  In addition, after one game ball is supplied onto the launch rail 74 by the ball feeder 76 at the timing of tx1, the output state of the launch permission signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of tx2. And In this case, the game ball on the launch rail 74 is launched by the launch device 75 at the timing of tx3. Thereafter, since the output state of the launch permission signal is at the LOW level at timing tx2, the game ball is not newly supplied on the launch rail 75, and the launch of the game ball is stopped.

  In FIG. 44, the firing handle 8A is operated (the player's hand is touching the firing handle 8A), and the LOW level signal is output from the stop switch 89 (input from the power / fire control device 98 to the main control device 81). In a state where the condition establishment signal is at the HI level), and when the cancellation operation execution flag is released (when the main control device 81 sets the output state of the firing permission signal to the HI level), The case where the cancellation operation execution flag is set at the timing is shown. However, at the timing of ty1, it is assumed that the ball has already been released.

  In this case, at the timing of ty1, since the firing permission signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and since the ball feeding has been released, the ball feeding operation and the firing operation are performed while the cancellation operation execution flag is set. Never done. Then, the firing handle 8A is operated (the player's hand is touching the firing handle 8A) and the LOW level signal is output from the stop switch 89 (from the power supply / fire control device 98 to the main control device 81). It is assumed that the canceling operation execution flag is canceled at the timing of tz1 while the input condition satisfaction signal remains at the HI level. In this case, since the firing permission signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level, the ball feeding device 76 performs the ball feeding operation at the timing of tz2 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of tz1, and one on the firing rail 74. Supply game balls. And the launch operation | movement which the game ball of the launch position 75W launches with the launch device 75 is performed at the timing of tz3 which passed 0.2 second from tz2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 45A, after one game ball is supplied onto the firing rail 74 by the ball feeding device 76 at the timing tv1 before ty3, the cancellation operation execution flag is set. Suppose. In this case, the output state of the emission permission signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of ty3, but the timing of tv2 after 0.2 seconds from tv1 (regardless of the timing of tv2 and the timing of ty3) ), The launching operation is performed by the launching device 75. At this time, if the game ball on the launch rail 74 has already been discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74, the launch operation by the launch device 75 is “empty shot (launch in a state where no game ball exists at the launch position 74W). Do the action). On the other hand, if the discharge is not completed, the launching operation of the launching device 75 may be performed on the game ball remaining on the launch rail 74 (the game ball remaining on the launch rail 74 is hit. There is a possibility of hitting at the part 75b). In addition, in order to prevent the latter situation (a situation where the remaining game ball is hit with the hitting portion 75b), the execution time of the canceling operation is increased (for example, 3.6 seconds, that is, six times the firing cycle). It is also possible to prohibit the launching device 75 from being performed at the timing of tv2, as shown in Modification 15 to be described later. Alternatively, when a sensor for detecting the presence of a game ball on the launch rail 74 (for example, a sensor for detecting the presence of a game ball at the launch position 74W) is provided, this sensor detects the game ball. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the canceling operation may be terminated (described later).

<About reservation notice>
Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display portion and the hold area Rb for the second result display portion of the hold ball storage area 232, This is configured to be performed with a predetermined probability at a timing before the game times related to the hold information are started. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81.

  Hereinafter, after briefly explaining the outline of the hold notice, the electrical configuration and processing structure related to the hold notice will be described.

<About summary of hold notice>
First, the outline of the notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

  As described above, based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the game area PE wins one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display portions AS and BS, and the predetermined stop is performed. A result (a jackpot result or a disapproval result) is displayed, and the change display is stopped. In the result display portions AS and BS, “from when the variable display is started until this variable display stops” corresponds to one game time. In the pachinko machine 10, various effect devices, that is, an effect display device (symbol display device 41), a light emitting means for lighting (window portion 61), in accordance with the change display in the result display portions AS and BS. Various lamp units around the display unit, a display lamp unit 63 above the window unit 61, and sound means (speaker unit 64) for generating sound effects and the like execute a game effect.

  In the following description, as the “holding notice (impliciting effect)”, a special execution condition in addition to the normal type of holding notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice effect”) executed based on the normal execution condition. A special type of hold notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice effect”) executed based on the above will be described. “First notice effect” indicates a specific example of “first suggestion effect”, and “second notice effect” indicates a specific example of “second suggestion effect”. Hereinafter, prior to the control processing of the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect), etc., the outline (outline) of the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect) will be simplified using FIGS. Explained.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the “first notice effect”. Here, in the following description, winning of a game ball in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 (detection of a winning in any of the operating ports 33 and 34 is detected by a detection sensor) is referred to as “actuation winning”. In other words, when a game ball wins in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, the acquisition condition of “special information” is established. In addition, an operation winning that occurs when the corresponding number of reserved start-up memories (RaN corresponds to the above-mentioned winning to the upper operating port 33 and RbN corresponds to the winning to the lower operating port 34) is less than the upper limit value ( Operating prizes that can store acquired information) are called "effective operating prizes", and may be distinguished from operating prizes that occur when the number of start-pending memories is greater than or equal to the upper limit (operating prizes that cannot acquire acquisition information) is there.

  In the “first notice effect”, as shown in FIG. 46, when an effective operation prize is generated (u1), a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first notice effect related to the special information acquired based on the action prize ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first notice lottery” and is displayed as “first lottery” in the drawing) (u2). In other words, a lottery (first notice lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to execute the “holding notice (first notice effect) indicating the possibility of being determined to be a granting result for the special information acquired based on the operation prize”. . Here, as will be described later, the winning probability of the first notice lottery varies depending on the type of special information (such as jackpot information, reach information, non-reach information, etc.), and causes game results and game effects preferable for the player. The winning probability is higher for the jackpot information (for example, jackpot information).

  Further, in the following description, special information in which the determination result is a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result (special information that is a jackpot result that causes a high-frequency winning mode) is referred to as “jackpot information” and will be described later. In addition, the display control device 212 can know the occurrence of “big hit information” by receiving the “probability change response command or normal response command” (see FIGS. 51 to 55 described later). Further, among the special information other than the “hit information”, what is to be reached in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of the grant determination is referred to as “reach information”, and will be described later. By receiving the “reach correspondence command” 212, the occurrence of “reach information” can be known (see FIGS. 51 to 55). Furthermore, among special information other than “hit information”, information that will not be reached in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of grant determination is referred to as “non-reach information” and is displayed as described later. The control device 212 can know the occurrence of the “non-reach information” by receiving the “non-reach compatible command” (see FIGS. 51 to 55).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the holding notice (first notice effect, second notice effect), there are provided directly indicating “possibility to be determined as an assignment correspondence result” and indicating indirectly. However, only one of the former (direct hold notice) and the latter (indirect hold notice) may be provided. For example, the former hold notice may be “Preliminary indication of occurrence of jackpot result”, “Preliminary indication of occurrence probability of jackpot result”, or “Predictive sound of occurrence of jackpot result” For example, a case where “notification” is performed, or “a specific character (a character that appears when a jackpot result is generated or a possibility that a jackpot result is likely to occur)” is displayed (a jackpot notice). Further, as the latter hold notice, it is possible to exemplify a possibility that a specific effect (an effect that appears in a variable display for notifying the jackpot result, such as reach) may occur (for example, reach notice).

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the “first notice lottery” is won, a notice condition establishment flag (described later) is set, and a new pending notice (first notice) is released until the notice condition establishment flag (described later) is released. A prohibition is imposed on the setting of the processing related to the notice effect (u3). Here, setting a notice condition establishment flag (described later) means storing a notice condition establishment flag in a notice condition establishment flag storage area described later, and releasing the notice condition establishment flag means storing a notice condition establishment flag. It means to delete the notice condition establishment flag from the area. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the “first notice lottery” is won, the notice condition establishment flag is set, and when the occurrence lottery is won, the first notice effect is generated. Occurrence lottery may be omitted, and when the “first notice lottery” is won, a hold notice (first notice effect) may be generated.

  When the first notice lottery is won (u2), the special information acquired before the acquisition of the special information subject to the first notice lottery is obtained, and the corresponding result display area reservation area (Ra or In accordance with the variable display based on what is stored in Rb), a holding notice (first notice effect) is performed. Here, the special information subject to the first notice lottery is referred to as “target hold information”, and the special information acquired before the acquisition of the special information (target hold information) subject to the first notice lottery. What is stored in the corresponding result display area reservation area (Ra or Rb) is referred to as “pre-hold information”. Note that with respect to the hold information acquired and stored based on the effective operation winning to the upper working port 33, the first result display unit holding area Ra is the corresponding result display unit holding area, and the lower working port 34 With respect to the hold information acquired and stored based on the effective operation winning, the second result display portion reservation area Rb is the corresponding result display portion reservation area.

  When the “pre-hold information” moves (shifts) from the first area to the execution area RE, a change display (hereinafter referred to as “pre-change display”) is executed (u4), and a hold notice (first notice effect) is made at a predetermined timing. ) Is executed. Here, in the first embodiment, the hold notice (first notice effect) is performed in the “previous change display”, and the hold notice (first change display) (hereinafter referred to as “target change display”). (Notice effect) is not performed (see reference A), “target hold information” is stored in a state where one or more “pre-hold information” is stored in the corresponding result display area hold area (Ra or Rb) Only in such a case, the first notice lottery may be executed so that the first notice effect can be executed. In this case, the probability of winning the first notice effect may be increased as the number of “pre-hold information” increases. Note that the hold notice (first notice effect) may be executed not only in the “previous change display” but also in the “target change display” (see reference B). One notice lottery may be executed to enable execution of the first notice effect. In such a case, a continuous hold notice can be executed by a change display based on the previous hold information (so-called “prior change”) and a change display based on the target hold information (so-called “the change”).

  Further, as described above, when the “first notice lottery” is won and the notice condition establishment flag (described later with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61) is set, until the target hold information is shifted to the execution area RE. 67 (until affirmative determination is made in the process of S3807 in FIG. 67 described later or the process in S3857 of FIG. 6 described later), a prohibition is imposed on the setting / execution of a new hold notice (first notice effect). (Refer to the processing of 55 S3105 and S3112). Accordingly, a plurality of hold notices (that is, a hold notice based on the target hold information and another hold notice effect based on the hold information generated after the target hold information) coexist, and the hold notice (first notice effect) It is avoided that the contents of the production and the control processing are complicated.

  Here, in the following description, “digest special information” means that the special information moves (shifts) from the first area of the result display area reservation area (Ra or Rb) to the execution area RE ( (See FIG. 28). As described above, the “special information (data)” stored in the first area moves to the execution area RE, so that the variable display based on the special information (data) is started.

  When the change display based on the previous hold information (previous change display) ends, the target hold information stored in the first area of the corresponding result display area hold area (Ra or Rb) moves (shifts) to the execution area RE. Then, “target change display” is started (u5). At this time, the notice condition satisfaction flag is canceled. When the variation time of “target variation display” elapses, the result of the assignment determination based on “target hold information” is notified. Then, it is assumed that the hold information acquired after the “target hold information” is stored in the result display unit hold area (Ra or Rb) before the “target hold information” is shifted to the execution area. In this case, the variable display based on the hold information acquired later (acquired information etc. described later) is started. However, when the hold information acquired later is acquired, the “notice condition establishment flag” is set and the hold notice (first Since the setting / execution regarding the notice effect) is prohibited, the hold notice (first notice) for the hold information acquired later is not executed (u6).

  In other words, when the special information is acquired in the normal type of hold notice (first notice effect), when the first notice lottery based on the predetermined special information is acquired on the condition that the notice condition establishment flag is released (result display) (When storing in the reserved area for copies). In other words, special information already stored in the result display area reservation area (Ra or Rb) (that is, special information stored in the result display area after the acquisition of the target reservation information) The first notice lottery is not executed with the target hold information.

  In this way, in the normal type hold notice (first notice effect), it is acquired after the “target hold information” is acquired, and the result is displayed before the “target hold information” is shifted to the execution area RE. Special information (hereinafter referred to as “acquired information”) stored in the department reserve area (Ra or Rb) is not subject to the first notice lottery. Therefore, even if special information with a high winning probability of the first notice lottery or special information that triggers the execution of a high performance effect is included in the acquired information, the acquired information (the hold information) The first notice effect cannot be executed with the target hold information. That is, in a gaming machine that executes only the first notice effect as a hold notice, for example, the result of the target variation display is not the content desired by the player (for example, even if the target variation display results in a losing result), “ The notice effect cannot be executed based on the “acquired information”. For this reason, as a result of earnest research, the present inventor has obtained the knowledge that it is important to enhance the entertainment interest of the game by generating the possibility of performing a notice effect based on “acquired information”.

  In the present embodiment, as a pattern of the hold notice (notice effect), a second notice effect (special type of hold notice) is provided in addition to the first notice effect (normal type hold notice), and is based on “acquired information”. This creates the possibility that a notice effect will be executed. In other words, a process for conducting a notice lottery (second notice lottery) is created for the hold information (acquired information) stored in the result display area hold area (Ra or Rb), and the hold notice may be executed. I am letting.

  FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the “second notice effect”. Specifically, it is assumed that an effective operation prize is generated and the predetermined number of acquired information is acquired when the first notice effect (previous change display) is being executed (v1). Then, the “target hold information” is digested (when moving from the first area to the execution area RE and starting the target variation display), the process of canceling the notice condition establishment flag, and the “acquired information” second from the “acquired information” A process for preferentially selecting a winning lottery (used in the meaning of a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second notice effect) and a process related to the second notice lottery regarding the “acquired information” are performed. Suppose that the result of the second notice lottery is winning (v2).

  Here, the processing for preferentially selecting the winning probability is performed as follows. In the present embodiment, the jackpot information with the highest winning probability is preferentially selected. If the acquired information includes jackpot information but is not valid jackpot information (described later), the subsequent selection is terminated at that point. In this case, although the second notice lottery is not executed, the second notice lottery may be executed without determining the validity. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot information is stored as acquired information, the previously stored jackpot information is selected, and the jackpot information stored later is excluded from the “second notice lottery”. And

  If jackpot information is not stored as acquired information, validity (to be described later) is determined in the order of storage for all acquired information stored in the result display area reservation area (Ra or Rb). The “second notice lottery” is performed for valid items. Then, the “second notice lottery” is performed on the predetermined acquired information. If the acquired information is stored after the acquired information, the validity of the acquired information is judged and effective. A “second notice lottery” is performed. Then, if the result of the “second notice lottery” based on any already obtained information is won or if all the already obtained information is searched (validity determination, second notice lottery), the search for the already obtained information (valid Sex determination, second notice lottery) is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, “second notice lottery” is performed on predetermined acquired information, and in the case of winning, even if there is acquired information stored after the acquired information, the acquired information stored later is “ It is not eligible for the “second notice lottery”. In addition, when the “second notice lottery” based on the jackpot information is lost, if there is already acquired information (other than the jackpot information) stored prior to the jackpot information, it is stored at the destination. The validity is determined for the acquired information in the order of storage, and the “second notice lottery” is performed for the acquired information determined to be effective. However, for the acquired information stored in advance, the validity is determined as the second. It may be excluded from the notice lottery. In the present embodiment, the validity (to be described later) is determined in the order of storage with respect to “acquired information other than the jackpot information”. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, the acquired information other than the jackpot information may be subject to the second notice lottery by giving priority to the “acquired information of a type with a high winning probability” of the second notice effect. For example, when the acquired information is reach information (super reach information, normal reach information), the information may be subject to a preliminary lottery in preference to non-reach information. Furthermore, when the reach information (super reach information, normal reach information) is prioritized over the non-reach information, the “super reach information” for performing super reach in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of the grant determination is The notice lottery may be prioritized over the “normal reach information” in which the normal reach is performed in the variable display (game effect) when the result of the grant determination is shown. Here, as will be described later, the winning probability of the first notice lottery and the second notice lottery is higher for the jackpot information than the reach information, the reach information is higher than the non-reach information, and the super reach information is higher than the normal reach information. Has been.

  Further description will be made with reference to FIG. 47A. When the result of the second notice lottery is a win (v2), a notice condition establishment flag is set (v3). Here, among the acquired information stored in the result display section holding area (Ra or Rb) when the target holding information is shifted, the result of the second notice lottery is selected as “target acquired information”. What is acquired (stored) before “target acquired information” is referred to as “previous target acquired information”. Further, in the present embodiment, the acquired information last stored in the result display section reservation area (Ra or Rb) when the target reservation information is shifted is not necessarily the target of the second notice lottery. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the number of acquired information is “3” and the acquired information acquired third (in the order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition, 3 If the acquired information acquired in the second is the target acquired information, and the acquired number of acquired information is “3”, if the acquired information acquired in the second (in order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition, The acquired information obtained second is the target acquired information.

  The number of “previous target acquired information” described above is a numerical value obtained by subtracting “1” from the numerical value indicating the occurrence order of the target acquired information among all the acquired information. For example, when the number of all acquired information is “3” and is the third of all the acquired information of the target acquired information, the number of “previous target acquired information” is “2” and the target acquired information is the second. In some cases, the number of “previous target information” is “1”. Hereinafter, a numerical value indicating the occurrence order of target acquired information among all acquired information, that is, a value obtained by adding “1” of the number of target acquired information to the number of “previous target acquired information” is “number of target acquired information”. That is, the change from the start of the change display (execution of the previous target acquired information change display) accompanied by the execution of the second advance notice effect to the change display (the target acquired information change display) that is the target of the winning second notice lottery. This corresponds to the cumulative number of displays.

  As described above, when the result of the second notice lottery is winning, when the target change display (change display based on the target hold information of the first notice lottery) is finished, the change display based on “previous target acquired information” (hereinafter, , “Previous target acquired information fluctuation display”) is executed (v4). At this time, when the “previous target acquired information” number is “2”, two “previous target acquired information fluctuation display” is executed, and when the “previous target acquired information” number is “1”, one “ “Previous target acquired information variation display” is executed. Then, along with the “previous target acquired information fluctuation display”, the second notice effect is executed.

  Thereafter, a variable display based on the “target acquired information” is executed, and the result of the assignment determination is displayed (v5). In this embodiment, as will be described later, the “second notice lottery” is won, the notice condition establishment flag is set, and if the occurrence lottery is won, the second notice notice effect is generated. The generation lottery may be omitted, and a “holding notice” (second notice effect) may be generated when the “second notice lottery” is won. Moreover, although 1st Embodiment illustrates the aspect which can perform a 2nd notice effect by "Previous target acquired information fluctuation display" among "Previous target acquired information fluctuation display" and "Target acquired information fluctuation display". , Both “previous target acquired information variation display” and “target acquired information variation display” may be executable. In other words, a continuous hold notice (second notice effect) is executed with a fluctuation display based on the previous target acquired information (so-called “preliminary fluctuation”) and a fluctuation display based on the target acquired information (so-called “the fluctuation”). You can also.

  In the present embodiment, when the special information (target acquired information) won in the second notice lottery is moved (shifted) to the execution area RE, the execution condition of the second notice lottery is satisfied. In addition, the second preliminary lottery may be executed again. Here, the number of times of the second notice effect is counted, and when the predetermined number of times (for example, two times or three times) is reached, the second notice effect may not be performed, or the second notice effect may be limited to one time. Good.

  As described above, the hold notice (first notice effect, second notice effect) is performed using, for example, various effect devices (the symbol display device 41, various lamp units, the display lamp unit 63, and the speaker unit 64). be able to. Hereinafter, the “flow” of the hold notice (first notice effect and second notice effect) executed by the effect display device (symbol display device 41) will be described using FIG. 48 and FIG. 48 to 49 schematically show the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice (first notice effect, second notice effect) is executed using all effect devices (effect display device, light emitting means and sound means), but all effect devices ( You may perform using 1 type of effect apparatuses selected from an effect display apparatus, a light emission means, and an audio | voice means), or 2 types of effect apparatuses.

  “A1” in FIG. 48 indicates that the number of stored pieces of hold information (hereinafter referred to as “first hold information”) acquired based on the winning of the upper working port 33 is “3”, and the lower working port 34 is awarded. The symbol display device 41 is executing variable display based on the first hold information in a situation where the stored number of hold information (hereinafter referred to as “second hold information”) acquired based on the information is “0”. Shows the case. At this time, a display indicating that the number of stored first hold information is “3” is displayed in the first hold display area Ga, and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold display area Gb is “0”. "Individual" is displayed.

  It is assumed that, in the situation of “A1”, a winning to the upper working port 33 is generated, and new first hold information is acquired and stored (“A2”). Moreover, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the hold notice (hereinafter referred to as notice notice) based on the winning. That is, based on the hold information acquired based on the operation winning, a lottery that fulfills the condition (first notice lottery) is performed, and if the lottery that fulfills the condition is won, a notice of hold (first notice effect) is generated. The generation lottery is performed. Then, when the generation lottery is won, it is determined to generate a holding notice (first notice effect). However, as described above, when the first notice lottery is won, the hold notice (first notice effect) may be generated without performing the generation lottery. The same applies to the second notice lottery described later.

  The hold information won in the first notice lottery becomes the above-mentioned “target hold information”. The first hold information acquired before the “target hold information” and stored in the result display section hold area Ra. Is 3 ("A2"). In this case, the first notice effect is generated using the three fluctuation displays (fluctuation display based on each of the three pieces of first hold information) that are started after the fluctuation display illustrated by “A1” and “A2” is finished. Shall be executed. That is, it is assumed that the “holding notice (first notice effect) indicating the possibility that the target holding information is the result of giving” is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, after the first hold information is acquired, the number of the first hold information is “4”, and the number of the first hold information is “4” in the first hold display area Ga. Is displayed. In the first hold display area Ga, the target hold information is displayed as “double circles”, and the other hold information (previous hold information) is displayed as “circled hatching marks”.

  “A3” in FIG. 48 indicates a case where the fluctuation display illustrated by “A1” and “A2” is terminated after displaying the result of detachment. And when the display time (for example, 0.6 second) of a loss result passes, based on the 1st hold information with the oldest storage order in the 1st result display part hold area Ra in the display screen G of the symbol display apparatus 41 Variation display (hereinafter referred to as first variation display) is started. At this time, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga is reduced to “3”. Then, the first variation display is started, and when a predetermined timing arrives, a “character picture for notice effect” appears (“A4”).

  After this, when the first variation display is terminated and the display time of the detachment result has elapsed, the variation display based on the first retention information with the next oldest storage order in the first result display section reservation area Ra (hereinafter referred to as the second variation display). Display)) (not shown). At this time, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga is reduced to “2”. Then, the second variation display is started, and when a predetermined timing arrives, a “character picture for notice effect” appears (“A5”). Then, during the second variation display, it is assumed that the winning to the upper working port 33 is generated twice, and two pieces of new first hold information are acquired and stored (“A6”). For this reason, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga increases to “4”.

  In addition, in the first hold display area Ga of FIGS. 48 to 49, the hold information acquired after the target hold information and already acquired when starting the variable display (target change display) based on the target hold information is obtained. In the figure, “acquired information” is indicated by “circle marks” in the figure. Here, in this embodiment, “holding information acquired after the acquisition of the target hold information and before the start of the target variation display” is “acquired information”. As shown in FIG. 81 (see FIG. 81), “hold information acquired after the acquisition of the target hold information and before the end of the target variation display” can be set as “acquired information”.

  When the second variation display is finished and the display time of the detachment result elapses, the variation display based on the first retention information having the next oldest storage order in the first result display reservation area Ra (hereinafter referred to as a third variation display). .) Is started (not shown). At this time, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga is reduced to “3”. Then, the third variation display is started, and when a predetermined timing arrives, a “character picture for notice effect” appears (“A7”). Further, during the third variation display, it is assumed that an operation prize is generated for the upper operation port 33 and one new first hold information is acquired and stored (“A8”). For this reason, the number of stored first hold information indicated by the first hold display area Ga increases to “4”.

  Subsequently, the third variation display is terminated, and the outlier result is displayed (“A9” in FIG. 49). Then, the first hold information (target hold information) that is the target of the notice effect is moved (digested) from the first area of the first result display portion hold area Ra to the execution area RE, and the target variation display is started. However, if the result of the target variation display is scheduled to be an “outgoing result”, there is a possibility of executing a hold notice (second notice effect) based on “acquired information” (A10). That is, it is searched whether there is jackpot information (probability change corresponding pending command or normal correspondence pending command described later) for the acquired information in the order of storage, and when the jackpot information is found, the jackpot information is effective. If so, a condition fulfillment lottery (second notice lottery) as to whether or not to execute the second notice effect is performed. In addition, when the jackpot information is not included in the acquired information, the validity (to be described later) is determined in the order of storage with respect to the acquired information other than the jackpot information, and if it is valid, the condition fulfillment lottery (second notice lottery) I do. In addition, as described above, when the lottery that fulfills the condition (the second notice lottery) is won for the predetermined acquired information, the lottery for the holding notice (second notice effect) is performed (not shown), and the lottery is generated. Only when winning, the actual hold notice (second notice effect) is generated, but if this lottery is omitted and the condition fulfillment lottery (second notice lottery) is won, the hold notice (second notice effect) is generated. You may let them. Further, as described above, the validity may not be determined.

  After the target variation display is performed for a predetermined time, “displacement result” is displayed (“A12”). Subsequently, the variation display (pre-target acquired information variation display) based on the acquired information (pre-target acquired information) stored before the target acquired information is sequentially performed (“A13”, “A14”). Furthermore, the display of fluctuation based on the target acquired information (target acquired information fluctuation display) is started (“A15”). When this variation display is completed, the variation display result (a jackpot result or a disapproval result) is displayed ("A16"). Here, “A12” in FIG. 49 stores three pieces of acquired information when the target variation display is finished, and three pieces of acquired information (first hold information) are displayed in the first hold display area Ga. However, the acquired information (first hold information) to be processed second is the target acquired information, and the acquired information to be processed first (first hold information) is the previous acquired information. Yes. That is, when a plurality of pieces of acquired information are provided, the acquired information stored last (acquired information stored last before the target hold information is transferred to the execution area) is not necessarily the target acquired information.

<Electrical configuration related to pending notice>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 241 provided in the audio lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. The RAM 244 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the game time control commands (game time control information) such as the change command, the type command, and the change end command described above are received. Also, gaming state commands (gaming state information) such as opening commands, ending commands, high frequency support commands, and low frequency support commands are received. Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command and a hold command to be described later is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected. In this case, among the various commands, various commands other than the shift command are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 that is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, but each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 252 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the sound lamp control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, internal commands for the VDP 255). Generation).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 311 to 315 of the program ROM 253. Details of these areas 311 to 315 will be described together with description of processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags and the like are stored in the respective areas 321 to 329 of the work RAM 254. Details of these areas 321 to 329 will be described together with description of processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing.

  The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Regarding the processing related to the hold notice executed by the main controller 81>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the check process for the hold notice related to the upper working opening, the confirmation process for the hold notice related to the lower working opening, and the setting process of the hold command are set. Yes. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect and the second notice effect are provided as the hold notice, but the following control processing can be applied to the first notice effect and the second notice effect in principle. . However, the control process peculiar to the second notice effect (control process that cannot be applied to the first notice effect, for example, the second notice effect execution determination process) is specified with the phrase “second notice effect ~”.

<Confirmation process for hold notice related to the upper working port>
First, the confirmation process for the reservation notice related to the upper working port will be described. The confirmation process for holding advance notice related to the upper operation port is executed in step S305 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 24) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). In this case, the information acquisition process is executed when a winning is made to the upper working port 33 and also when a winning is made to the lower working port 34. The confirmation process for holding advance notice related to the upper operating port is executed in step S305 in the information acquisition process when a winning to the upper operating port 33 occurs.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process for the reservation notice related to the upper working port. First, in step S1801, information on the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is read, and the information on the number of hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S1802, the big hit determination information among the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the upper working port 33, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1803, it is determined whether or not the current probability lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1804, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1802 is set as the jackpot winning with reference to the low probability mode win / fail table shown in FIG. 19 (a). That it is included in the information. In the case of the high probability mode, in step S1805, with reference to the high probability mode win / reject table shown in FIG. 19B, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1802 is determined as a big win. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S1804 or step S1805, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1802 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1507, it is updated by the type determination information out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper operating port 33, that is, the jackpot type counter C2 Grasp the information obtained from the obtained information.

  In subsequent step S1808, with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit shown in FIG. 20A, the information for determining the jackpot type determined in step S1807 is information set as a normal jackpot result or 15R Specify whether it is included in any of the information set as the probability variation jackpot result.

  Thereafter, in step S1809, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type information grasped in step S1807 corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result. In step S1810, the jackpot type information grasped in step S1807 is determined. It is determined whether or not the normal jackpot result is supported.

  As a result, if it corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1811. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1812. If neither the 15R-probability jackpot result nor the normal jackpot result, that is, the non-explicit 2R-probability jackpot result or the explicit 2R-probability jackpot result, the reach occurrence information is stored in the MPU 202 register in step S1813. Remember. The reach occurrence information includes the type of reach (information on whether the reach occurrence information indicates the occurrence of normal reach or the reach occurrence information indicates the occurrence of super reach). It should be noted that the reach type (reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of normal reach, reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of super reach) is set as the change type of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper working port 33. Although it can be grasped based on information for determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the variation type counter CS (see FIG. 20C), the reach type stored in step S1813 is 1 Limited to species.

  After executing the process of step S1811, step S1812, or step S1813, the process proceeds to step S1814. In Step S1814, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in Step S1802 is common winning information that is information that is a jackpot winning in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Here, as already described, in the present pachinko machine 10, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. Is included in the value group. Therefore, the common winning information coincides with the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot winning in the situation of the low probability mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 307 ".

  For details of the processing in step S1814, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1802 is “7”. If it is “7”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1814. . If it is not “7”, it is next determined whether it is “307”. If it is “307”, an affirmative determination is made in step S1814, and if it is not “307”, a negative determination is made in step S1814.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1814, the present confirmation process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1814, the common information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1815, and then the confirmation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1806 that the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1802 does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the process proceeds to step S1816. In step S1816, out-of-hold information obtained in step S304 based on the current winning of the upper working port 33 is grasped, ie, information obtained from information updated by the reach random number counter C3.

  In subsequent step S1817, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach determination information grasped in step S1816 is included in the information set as the reach win. Identify whether or not Thereafter, in step S1818, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1816 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. When the reach generation is supported, in step S1819, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then the present confirmation process is terminated. This reach occurrence information also includes the type of reach (information relating to reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of normal reach or reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of super reach). Even in this case, the reach type (reach occurrence information indicating the occurrence of normal reach, reach occurrence information indicating the occurrence of super reach) is included in the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper working port 33. It can be grasped based on the information for determining the variation type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the variation type counter CS (see the lower column of FIG. 20D). Further, when the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, this confirmation process is finished as it is.

<Confirmation process for hold notice related to lower working port>
Next, a confirmation process for holding notice related to the lower working port will be described. The confirmation process for holding advance notice related to the lower operation port is executed in step S305 in the information acquisition process (FIG. 24) when a winning is made to the lower operation port 34.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice related to the lower working port. First, in step S1901, information on the number of hold information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is read, and the information on the number of hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S1902, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 among the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the lower working port 34 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1903, it is determined whether or not the current probability lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1904, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1902 is set as the jackpot winning with reference to the low probability mode win / fail table shown in FIG. That it is included in the information. In the case of the high probability mode, in step S1905, with reference to the high probability mode win / loss table shown in FIG. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S1904 or step S1905, in step S1906, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1902 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1907, it is updated by the type determination information out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the lower operating port 34, that is, the jackpot type counter C2 Grasp the information obtained from the obtained information.

  In subsequent step S1908, with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit shown in FIG. 20B, information for determining the jackpot type determined in step S1907 is information set as a normal jackpot result or 15R Specify which of the information set as the probability variation jackpot result is included. Thereafter, in step S1909, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type information grasped in step S1907 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, after the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1910, this confirmation processing is terminated, and if it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1911. After the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, this confirmation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1912. In step S1912, the information for the outreach determination, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped from the hold information obtained in step S304 based on the current winning of the lower working port 34.

  In subsequent step S1913, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach determination information grasped in step S1912 is included in the information set as the reach win. Identify whether or not Thereafter, in step S1914, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1912 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S1915, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then this confirmation process is terminated. This reach occurrence information also includes the type of reach (information relating to reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of normal reach or reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of super reach). Further, when the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, this confirmation process is finished as it is. It should be noted that the reach type (reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of normal reach, reach occurrence information indicating occurrence of super reach) is set as the change type of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the lower operating port 34. It can be grasped based on information for determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the variation type counter CS (see the lower column of FIG. 20D).

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the hold command setting process will be described. The hold command setting process is executed in step S306 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 24) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). In this case, the information acquisition process is executed when a winning is made to the upper working port 33 and is also executed when a winning is made to the lower working port 34, but the information obtaining process in any case Even so, the hold command setting process is executed.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process. First, in step S2001, it is determined whether either the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If either the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is the probability variation jackpot information. If it is probability variation jackpot information, in step S2003, a probability variation corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area provided in the RAM 204, and if it is normal jackpot information, in step S2004, the RAM 204 is suspended. Set the normal support hold command in the command setting area.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2001 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S2005, and it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. . If the reach occurrence information is stored, a reach corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204 in step S2006. If the reach occurrence information is not stored, in step S2007, A non-reach compatible hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204.

  After executing any of the processes in step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007, in step S2008, a process of setting the number of hold information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S2008, the information on the number of holdings stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1801 or step S1901 in the confirmation processing for the previous holding notice (FIG. 51 or FIG. 52) is first read. The read information on the number of holdings is stored by arithmetic processing such as logical sum for the bits for the information on the number of holdings in the set hold command. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information for is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2009, it is determined whether or not this time is a processing time related to winning in the upper working port 33. If it is a processing time related to winning in the upper working port 33, in step S2010, A process for setting the information of the upper working port for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as described above, as described above, the information on the set hold command is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and some bits of the information are sent to the upper operation port 33. Information indicating that it is related to winning can be set. In this case, in step S2010, the information on the upper working port, that is, “1” is stored in the bit for the information to be awarded in the already set hold command. Note that “0” is stored in the bit as an initial value, and in this case, it means that the command relates to winning in the lower operation port 34. By executing the process of step S2010, the hold command is awarded to the upper operating port 33 with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007. Information for specifying that this is the case is included. In the following explanation (especially the second notice effect execution determination process described later), the probability change hold command and the normal support hold command are jackpot hold information, the reach hold command is reach hold information, and the non-reach hold command is non-reach Sometimes called hold information. In addition, when “big hit hold information”, “reach hold information”, and “non-reach hold information” are illustrated in the flowchart, they may be simply referred to as “hit hit information”, “reach information”, and “non-reach information”.

  In a succeeding step S2011, it is determined whether or not common information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If the common information is not stored, the setting process is terminated as it is. If the common information is stored, in step S2012, a process for setting the common information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as described above, as described above, the information on the set pending command is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and common information can be set for some of the bits. It has become. In this case, in step S2012, “1” is stored for the bit for common information in the already set pending command. Note that “0” is stored in the bit as an initial value, and in this case, this means that the command does not include common information. By executing the process of step S2012, common information is included in the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if this time is not the processing time related to winning the upper working port 33, a negative determination is made in step S2009, and the present setting process is terminated. In this case, in order to specify that the hold command set in any one of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007 relates to winning in the lower operation port 34. Information is included. Also, common information is not included.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 by the external output process in step S501 in the next normal process (FIG. 26). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command to the display control device 212 as it is. The display control device 212 executes a hold notice process based on the received hold command. This process will be described in detail later.

  At the end of the pending command setting process, the probability variation jackpot information, normal jackpot information, and reach occurrence information stored in the register of the MPU 202 are deleted.

  By the way, the setting method of the hold command is whether the display control device 212 is related to winning a prize to the upper operation port 33 by the hold command, whether it corresponds to a predetermined jackpot result, If it is related to the presence / absence, winning to the upper operating port 33 and corresponding to a predetermined jackpot result, it can be specified whether or not it corresponds to common winning information, etc. Is optional.

  For example, a combination of probability change corresponding hold command, normal support hold command, reach support hold command and non-reach support hold command is individually set for each of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, and In addition, for those corresponding to the upper operating port 33, those that include common winning information and those that do not include are set individually. In the hold command setting process, one hold command may be selected according to the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 51 or 52).

<Command handling process executed by display control device 212>
Next, command response processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the command received from the main control device 81 via the voice lamp control device 82 is stored in the command storage area 321 of the work RAM 254 by the command storage processing activated when the command is received. The command handling process is a process for executing various controls corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area 321 that are activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the MPU 252. The command storage area 321 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command. Even when a plurality of commands are received simultaneously. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  In the command handling process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 321 and the command to be read this time is an opening command. If it is an opening command, after executing the processing of steps S3002 to S3004, the command corresponding processing is terminated.

  In step S3002, an open / close execution flag (open / close specifying information) is stored in an open / close execution flag storage area (open / close specifying information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. The opening / closing execution flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and is stored when the opening command is received when the opening / closing execution mode is started. At the end, it is deleted upon receipt of an ending command. In the MPU 252, when the opening / closing execution flag is stored, the display content on the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the opening / closing execution mode, and the setting and execution of the hold notice corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode as described later. And

  In subsequent step S3003, a first notice condition establishment flag (first notice condition establishment information) is stored in a first notice condition establishment flag storage area (first notice condition establishment information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. If is stored, erase it. The first notice condition establishment flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is set to make a hold notice. Yes, it is information that is stored when the condition to execute the hold notice is established for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33, and is deleted when the condition to end the hold notice is established. .

  Incidentally, in the various flag storage area 322 of the work RAM 254, in addition to the first notice condition establishment flag storage area, a second notice condition establishment flag for storing a second notice condition establishment flag (second notification condition establishment information). A storage area (second notification condition establishment information storage means) is provided. The second notice condition establishment flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is set to hold the hold notice. Yes, it is information that is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34, and is erased when the condition for ending the hold notice is established. .

  In the subsequent step S3004, the flags stored for determining the contents of the effect of the hold notice are deleted from the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Details of the flag will be described later.

  When the opening command is received as described above, the stored first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted, so that the notice of hold for the winning action to the upper operating port 33 is set to be given a hold notice. This situation is eliminated when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the hold notice about the hold information stored based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is not executed across the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, even if the opening command is received, the second notice condition satisfaction flag is not erased. Therefore, the situation in which the hold notice is set for the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is not canceled when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the hold notice about the hold information stored based on the winning to the lower working port 34 can be executed across the open / close execution mode.

  If the current read target command is not an opening command, it is determined in step S3005 whether the current read target command is an ending command. If it is an ending command, after the opening / closing execution flag is deleted from the work RAM 254 in step S3006, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  If the current read target command is not an ending command, it is determined in step S3007 whether the current read target command is a high frequency support command. If the command is a high frequency support command, the support flag (support specifying information) is stored in the support flag storing area (support specifying information storing means) provided in the various flag storing areas 322 of the work RAM 254 in step S3008. After that, this command response processing is terminated.

  The support flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and is stored when the high frequency support command is received when shifting to the high frequency support mode. When the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, it is erased when the low frequency support command is received. In the MPU 252, when the support flag is stored, the setting and execution of the hold notice are made to correspond to the high frequency support mode as described later.

  If the current read target command is not a high frequency support command, it is determined in step S3009 whether the current read target command is a low frequency support command. If it is a low frequency support command, the support flag is deleted from the work RAM 254 in step S3010, and then the command response process is terminated.

  If the current read target command is not a low frequency support command, it is determined in step S3011 whether the current read target command is a pending command. If the command is a pending command, the command handling process is terminated after executing the pending command handling process in step S3012. If the command is not a pending command, the variable display control process is executed in step S3013, The command response process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the pending command handling process in step S3012 and the variable display control process in step S3013 will be described in detail.

<Processing for pending command>
First, the pending command handling process in step S3012 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the pending command handling process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether the pending command to be read this time is a probability change handling pending command or a normal handling pending command.

  If it is either the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal response hold command, in step S3102, the information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the command received this time is the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation. It is specified which winning prize of the mouth 34 is related. In the erase counter area 323 provided in the work RAM 254, the first erase counter area corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second erase counter area corresponding to the lower operation port 34 correspond to the command received this time. The information on the specified number of hold is set in the counter area for erasure.

  In the subsequent step S3103, whether or not the first big hit hold flag (first big hit hold information) is stored in the first big hit hold flag storage area (first big hit hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is determined. And whether or not the second big hit hold flag (second big hit hold information) is stored in the second big hit hold flag storage area (second big hit hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 is determined. .

  Here, the first jackpot holding flag is the holding information that is the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result among the holding information that is held and stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the main controller 81. If it is included, this is information for specifying it in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212. Further, the second jackpot hold flag includes hold information that is a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result in the hold information stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the main controller 81. If this is the case, it is information for specifying this in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212.

  In addition, the first erasure counter area in the erasure counter area 323 is a measuring unit for specifying the timing for erasing the first big hit hold flag when the first big hit hold flag is stored. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the first erasing counter area is based on the holding information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra (that is, based on winning in the upper working port 33). (Acquired hold information) is updated to be decremented every time a new game is started, and the information stored in the first erasure counter area after the update is “0” as an initial value. In this case, the first big hit hold flag erasing process is executed.

  The second erasure counter area in the erasure counter area 323 is a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the second jackpot hold flag when the second jackpot hold flag is stored. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the second erasure counter area is based on the holding information stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb (that is, based on winning in the lower operating port 34). (Acquired hold information) is updated to be decremented every time a new game is started, and information stored in the second erasure counter area after the update is “0” as an initial value. In this case, the process for deleting the second jackpot hold flag is executed.

  If either the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, and the hold command handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if neither the first jackpot hold flag nor the second jackpot hold flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether the hold command received this time is related to the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. A jackpot hold flag is stored, and if it is related to winning in the lower operating port 34, a second jackpot hold flag is stored.

  If the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S3103 even if a probability change corresponding hold command or a normal correspondence hold command is received, and a hold notice is issued. The jackpot handling setting process (step S3110) for performing various settings in the process is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is already stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb of the main controller 81. Even if the hold information acquired based on the new winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 corresponds to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result, various settings for performing the hold notice are performed. Absent.

  After the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored in step S3104, whether the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3105 Determine whether or not. If any notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, and the processing for handling a pending command is terminated as it is. In other words, in a situation where a hold notice has already been set for either the hold information relating to the winning to the upper working port 33 or the holding information relating to the winning to the lower working port 34, the probability change corresponding hold is newly set. Even if a command or a normal correspondence hold command is received, no new setting is made for making a hold notice.

  For this reason, as described above, it is acquired after the “acquired information”, that is, the “target hold information” that is the trigger for executing the hold notice, and the result display section before the “target hold information” is shifted to the execution area. In the “acquisition time” of the hold information stored in the hold area (Ra or Rb), either the notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, so the reservation notice (first notice effect) ) Will not be set. With regard to the “acquired information”, after the stored first notice condition establishment flag or second notice condition establishment flag is erased, settings relating to the hold notice (second notice effect) are performed under certain conditions. . This point will be described later.

  If neither the first notice condition establishment flag nor the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, in step S3106, the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal support hold command that is the current read target is activated. It is determined whether or not the transmission is based on a winning in the mouth 33. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 33, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not an opening / closing execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S1908, the work RAM 254 is checked. It is determined whether or not a support flag is stored, and further, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not common information is included in the probability change corresponding pending command or the normal corresponding pending command that has been read.

  As a result, if the opening / closing execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, and the processing for handling a pending command is terminated as it is. If the support flag is stored even if the opening / closing execution flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3107 and an affirmative determination is made in step S3108. Exit. Further, even when both the opening / closing execution flag and the support flag are not stored, if common information is not included, a negative determination is made in both step S3107 and step S3108, and a negative determination is made in step S3109. The determination is made, and the processing for handling the pending command is terminated as it is. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode or in the high frequency support mode, the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal support hold command based on the winning to the upper operation port 33 among the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is received. Even if this is done, various settings are not made for the advance notice. Furthermore, even if a probability change-response hold command or a normal-response hold command based on a winning at the upper working port 33 is received, the hold information related to the transmission of the hold command is a big win in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. If it is not compatible with the common winning information, various settings are not made for making a reservation notice.

  On the other hand, if the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal support hold command that was read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the lower operation port 34, the jackpot correspondence setting process is executed in step S3110. Later, the pending command handling process ends. Further, when the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal support hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, both the opening / closing execution flag and the support flag are displayed in the work RAM 254. Is not stored, and when the common information is included in the hold command, after executing the jackpot handling setting process in step S3110, the hold command handling process is terminated.

  Here, the jackpot correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 56A and FIG.

  In the big hit correspondence setting process, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), first, in step S3201, a lottery process for establishing a notice condition is executed. In the notice condition fulfillment lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for the notice condition fulfillment lottery is read from the established lottery counter area 324 of the work RAM 254. Here, the establishment lottery counter area 324 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 54) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition to the configuration, the configuration is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the notice condition establishment lottery processing, the establishment lottery table (establishment lottery information group) stored in the establishment lottery table storage area (establishment lottery information group storage means) 311 of the program ROM 253 is referred to above. It is determined whether or not the read notice condition fulfillment lottery counter value corresponds to the notice condition fulfillment winning. Although the probability of winning the notice condition is arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the pachinko machine 10 will win the notice condition with a probability of 7/10 in the case of the big hit correspondence setting process. The established lottery table is set. However, the probability of winning in the notice condition establishment lottery process may be different depending on whether the hold command received in step S3101 of FIG. 55 is a probability change support hold command or a normal support hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the case of a probability change corresponding hold command, the winning of the notice condition establishment lottery is won with a probability of 9/10, and in the case of a normal support hold command, it is 6/10. You may win a lottery with a notice condition. That is, when the hold command received in step S3101 in FIG. 55 is a probability change support hold command, the probability of winning in the notice condition establishment lottery process is increased compared to the case of the normal support hold command (for example, 1.5 times), the execution probability of the notice effect or the second notice effect described later may be increased.

  In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3201 is a winning condition for the notice condition. If the notice condition is not established, the present setting process is terminated. If the notice condition is established, the jackpot winning winning process in step S3203 is performed, and then the jackpot correspondence setting process is terminated.

  In the jackpot winning winning process, as shown in FIG. 59, first, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a normal corresponding hold command. If the command is a normal hold command, in step S3212 the normal jackpot notice flag (normal jackpot notice information) is set in the normal jackpot notice flag storage area (normal jackpot notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. If the stored command is a probability change corresponding hold command, in step S3213, the probability change jackpot notice flag (probability change jackpot notice flag) is stored in the probability change jackpot notice storage area (probability change jackpot notice storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Information).

  Normally, the big jackpot flag indicates that the hold information that triggered the establishment of the condition in the situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is established (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). This is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that it usually corresponds to the jackpot result. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result, and is deleted when a condition for ending the hold notice is established for the hold information.

  In addition, the probabilistic jackpot notice flag is a hold that triggers the establishment of the condition in a situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). This is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the information corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a condition for terminating the hold notice is established for the hold information. .

  After executing the processing of step S3212 or step S3213, in step S3214, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time is transmitted based on winning in the upper working port 33. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 33, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3215. In the subsequent step S3216, information on the number of holdings included in the holding command that has been read this time is specified, and the information on the specified holding number is used as an upper operating port in the counter area 325 for holding notice provided in the work RAM 254. It is set for the counter area for first holding notice corresponding to 33. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  When the holding information acquired based on winning to the upper operating port 33 is set as a trigger for the execution of the holding notice, the first holding notice counter area holds the holding information in any game times. It is a measurement means for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not it corresponds to the above. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the first holding notice counter area every time when a new game is started with respect to the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit. The first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased when the information is updated to be decremented by 1 and the information stored in the first hold notice counter area after the update is the initial value “0”. Thus, the state set to perform the hold notice is canceled. As shown in parentheses in step S3216, in the second hold notice, the information on the number of pieces of hold information in the first hold notice counter area is used instead of the information on the number of pieces of hold information (hereinafter referred to as “object obtainable information”). The details of the “number of target acquired information” will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the lower operation port 34, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3217. In the subsequent step S3218, information on the number of holdings included in the holding command that has been read this time is specified, and the information on the specified number of holdings is associated with the lower operation port 34 in the holding notice counter area 325 of the work RAM 254. It is set for the counter area for the second pending notice. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  When the second hold notice counter area sets the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 as a trigger for executing the hold notice, the hold information related to the setting is the hold information in any game times. It is a measurement means for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not it corresponds to the above. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the second holding notice counter area every time when a new game is started with respect to the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. When the information stored in the second pending notice counter area is the initial value “0” after being updated, the second notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted. Thus, the state set to perform the hold notice is canceled. In step S3218, as shown in parentheses, in the second reservation notice, the “number of target acquired information” is set in the second reservation notice counter area instead of the information on the number of reservations (described later). ).

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 55), when it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is neither the probability change handling pending command nor the normal handling pending command (that is, the reach handling pending command or the non-reach command). If it is determined that the command is a corresponding hold command), it is determined in step S3111 whether the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If any jackpot hold flag is stored, the hold command handling process is terminated as it is.

  If the first jackpot hold flag or the second jackpot hold flag is stored even when the reach correspondence hold command or the non-reach correspondence hold command is received, the hold command handling process is terminated as it is. I did it. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result has already been stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb of the main controller 81. Even if a new winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 occurs regardless of whether or not it is set to perform the holding notice, the holding notice is given. The above settings are not performed.

  For this reason, in step S3112 as well as step S3105, when the above-mentioned “acquired information” is acquired, either the notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored. No new setting is made for the production. Then, the “acquired information” is set to a pending notice (second notice effect) under a certain condition after the stored first notice condition establishment flag or second notice condition establishment flag is deleted (described later). To do).

  If it is determined in step S3111 that neither the first jackpot hold flag nor the second jackpot hold flag is stored, in step S3112, the work RAM 254 stores the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition. It is determined whether any of the establishment flags is stored. If any notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3112 and the pending command handling process is terminated.

  Here, as described above, even when the reach corresponding hold command or the non-reach corresponding hold command is received, if the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, The pending command handling process is now finished. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where a hold notice is made for either the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 or the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34, Even if a new winning is generated in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, various settings for performing the holding notice are not performed.

  If neither the first notice condition establishment flag nor the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, the reach corresponding hold command to be read this time is a prize to the upper operating port 33 in step S3113. It is judged whether it is what was transmitted based on. If it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, it is determined in step S3114 whether or not an opening / closing execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S3115, the work RAM 254 is read. It is determined whether a support flag is stored.

  As a result, when the opening / closing execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3114, and the processing for handling the pending command is terminated as it is. If the support flag is stored even if the opening / closing execution flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3114, an affirmative determination is made in step S3115, and the pending command handling process is performed as it is. Exit.

  Here, as already described, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode, the probability change corresponding hold command based on the winning to the upper working port 33 out of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. Or, even when the normal correspondence hold command is received, various settings for performing the hold notice are not performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, even when the opening / closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode is selected, even if a new winning is made to the upper working port 33 among the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. Various settings are not made for the advance notice.

  On the other hand, if the reach-ready hold command or the non-reach-ready hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the lower operation port 34, the process proceeds to step S3116. In addition, the reach-reserved hold command or the non-reach-ready hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the upper operation port 33, and both the opening / closing execution flag and the support flag are stored in the work RAM 254. If not, the process proceeds to step S3116.

  In the process of step S3116, it is determined whether or not the hold command that is the current read target is a reach-compatible hold command. If the command is a reach corresponding hold command, the reach corresponding setting process is executed in step S3117, and then the hold command corresponding process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command is not a reach correspondence pending command (if it is a non-reach correspondence pending command), after executing the non-reach correspondence setting processing in step S3118, the pending command correspondence processing is terminated.

  Here, the reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56B and 60, and the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 57A and 61.

  In the reach handling setting process, as shown in FIG. 56B, first, in step S3301, a lottery process for establishing a notice condition is executed. The processing content of the lottery processing for establishing the notice condition is the same as the processing content described in step S3201. However, the establishment lottery table stored in the establishment lottery table storage area 311 indicates that the probability of winning the announcement condition establishment is the case of the jackpot correspondence setting process (FIG. 56 (a)) in the case of the reach correspondence setting process. In addition, the probability of winning the notice condition is different depending on the type of reach specified by the reach hold information (reach support hold command). In this pachinko machine 10, if the reach type is super reach as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the probability of winning the notice condition is 2/10. In the case of normal reach, the establishment lottery table is set so that the notice condition establishment winning is achieved with a probability of 1/10, as shown in FIG. As shown in the third example, in the pachinko machine 10 having two or more types of super reach, the probability of winning the notice condition may be different depending on the type of super reach. The super reach (super reach 2) is selected in the aspect including the super reach (super reach 1) executed along with the super reach (super reach 2) executed along with the fluctuation display of the long variable display time. In this case, the probability of winning the notice condition may be made higher than when Super Reach (Super Reach 1) is selected.

  In a succeeding step S3302, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S3301 is a winning of a notice condition satisfaction. If the notice condition is not established, the present setting process is terminated. If the notice condition is established, the reach establishment process in step S3303 is performed, and then the reach correspondence setting process is terminated.

  In the reach establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, in step S3311, the mode in the case of actually performing the hold notice relating to the current setting is selected from any of a plurality of predetermined modes. A distribution lottery process is performed for distributing the mode. This mode includes a normal jackpot inference mode that can be selected when the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as the trigger for execution of the hold notice, and the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variable jackpot result is the execution of the hold notice. A probability variation jackpot estimation mode and a reach notification mode that can be selected when set as an opportunity are set.

  For details of the contents of the distribution lottery process, first, a counter value (numerical value information) for distribution lottery is read from the distribution lottery counter area 326 of the work RAM 254. The distribution lottery counter area 326 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 54) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition, after reaching the maximum value, it is initialized to “0”. In the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table (distribution lottery information group) stored in the distribution lottery table storage area (distribution lottery information group storage means) 312 of the program ROM 253 is referred to. Thus, it is determined whether the read counter value for distribution lottery corresponds to the normal jackpot estimation mode, the probability variation jackpot estimation mode, or the reach notice mode. The probability of becoming a normal jackpot estimation mode, the probability variation jackpot estimation mode, or the probability of reaching reach notification mode is arbitrary, but in this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. The distribution lottery table is distributed so that the probability of becoming the probability variation jackpot estimation mode is “1/4” and the probability of reaching the reach notice mode is “1/2”. Is set.

  In subsequent step S3312, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311 is a reach notice mode. If it is the reach notice mode, in step S3316, the reach notice flag (reach notice information) is stored in the reach notice flag storage area (reach notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.

  The reach notice flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the state in the case where the hold notice is actually performed should be the reach form in a situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is established. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice related to the reach notice mode is established, and when the condition for ending the hold notice is established for the hold information that triggers the establishment of the condition. Erased.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3312, the process proceeds to step S3313. In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311 is a normal jackpot estimation mode. In the case of the normal jackpot guessing mode, in step S3314, the normal jackpot guess notice flag (normal guess forecast notice) is stored in the normal jackpot guess notice flag storage area (ordinary jackpot guess notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Information). If it is not the normal jackpot estimation mode, in step S3315, the probability variation jackpot estimation notice flag (probability variation jackpot estimation flag) is stored in the probability variation prediction prediction prediction flag storage area (probability variation prediction notification information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Preliminary information) is stored.

  The normal jackpot guess notice flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the mode in the case of actually performing the hold notice should be the normal jackpot guess form in a situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is established. It is. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice according to the normal jackpot estimation mode is established, and when the condition for terminating the hold notice is established for the hold information that triggers the establishment of the condition. Will be erased.

  In addition, the probability variation jackpot estimation notice flag is used to specify in the MPU 252 that the mode in the case where the reservation notice is actually performed should be the probability variation jackpot estimation mode in a situation where the condition for executing the reservation notice is established. Information. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice relating to the probability variation jackpot estimation mode is satisfied, and is deleted when a condition for ending the hold notice is established for the hold information triggered by the condition. Is done.

  After executing the processing of step S3314, step S3315, or step S3316, in step S3317, it is determined whether or not the pending command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper operating port 33. judge. If it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3318. In the subsequent step S3119, information on the number of holdings included in the holding command that has been read this time is specified, and the information on the specified holding number is stored in the counter information for first holding notice in the holding notice counter area 325. Set. Thereafter, the setting process ends. In step S3319, as shown in parentheses, in the second reservation notice, “target number of acquired information” is set in the first reservation notice counter area instead of information on the number of reservations (described later). ).

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the lower operation port 34, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3320. In the subsequent step S3321, information on the number of holds included in the hold command that has been read this time is specified, and the specified information on the number of holds is stored in the second hold notice counter area 325 in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. Thereafter, the setting process ends. In step S3321, in the second reservation notice, not the information on the number of reservations but the “number of pieces of information already acquired” is set in the second reservation notice counter area (described later). ).

  Next, the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the non-reach correspondence setting process, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), first, in step S3401, a notice condition satisfaction lottery process is executed. The processing content of the lottery processing for establishing the notice condition is the same as the processing content described in step S3201. However, the establishment lottery table stored in the establishment lottery table storage area 311 has a probability corresponding to the non-reach correspondence setting process in the case of the non-reach correspondence setting process (FIG. 56B). It is set to be lower than the case. In the non-reach correspondence setting process, the established lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the notice condition is 1/30 as shown in FIG. When the lottery process for establishing the notice condition is performed in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402, and it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3401 is a winner for establishing the notice condition. If the notice condition is not established, the present setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the notice condition is established, the non-reach establishment winning process in step S3403 is performed, and then the non-reach correspondence setting process is terminated.

  In the non-reach establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, in step S3411, the reach estimation notice flag (reach estimation notice information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is set in the reach estimation notice flag (reach estimation notice information storage means). Non-reach guess notice information) is stored.

  The reach estimation notice flag is information for the MPU 252 to specify that the aspect in the case where the reservation notice is actually performed should be the reach estimation form in the situation where the condition for executing the reservation notice is established. . The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice according to the reach estimation mode is established, and when the condition for terminating the hold notice is established for the hold information that triggers the establishment of the condition. Erased.

  After executing the process of step S3411, in step S3412, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper working port 33. If it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3413. In subsequent step S3414, information on the number of holds included in the hold command to be read this time is specified, and the specified information on the number of holds is stored in the first hold notice counter area 325 in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. Thereafter, the setting process ends. In step S3414, as shown in parentheses, in the second hold notice, not the information on the number of holds but the “number of target acquired information” is set in the first hold notice counter area (described later). ).

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the lower operation port 34, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3415. In the subsequent step S3416, information on the number of holds included in the hold command that has been read this time is specified, and the specified information on the number of holds is stored in the second hold notice counter area 325 in the hold notice counter area 325. Set. Thereafter, the setting process ends. In step S3416, as indicated by parentheses, in the second reservation notice, the “number of target acquired information” is set in the second reservation notice counter area instead of the information on the number of reservations (described later). ).

  Here, when the hold command handling process is executed as described above, the conditions under which the hold information can be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice are the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the following conditions: This is different from the hold information acquired based on the winning to the operation port 34. In other words, in order for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 to be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, the hold information is not in the open / close execution mode and is not in the high frequency support mode. Such conditions are not set for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, while the hold information needs to be acquired. Furthermore, when the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 corresponds to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result, it is a jackpot winning in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Only when it corresponds to the common winning information that becomes, it is set as an opportunity for execution of the hold notice, whereas for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34, such conditions are Not set. With the above configuration, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is set as a trigger for execution of the holding notice, and the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the hold notice. It is possible to make the situation different from that set as the trigger of execution.

<Variable display control processing>
Next, the variable display control process in step S3013 will be described below. In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the variation display of the symbols for one game is started on the symbol display device 41 and transmitted from the main control device 81. When the change end command is received, a process for displaying the change display of the symbol at the final stop is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process for displaying an image for hold notice during the variable display of the symbol is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the hold notice.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the symbol display for one game time is displayed on the symbol display device 41. If the change display of symbols for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the change command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S3503.

  On the other hand, if the symbol variation display for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not a variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S3505. If the change end command has been received, the change end control process is terminated in step S3506, and then the change display control process ends.

  Hereinafter, the variation start process in step S3503 and the mid-variation process in step S3505 will be described in detail. In the variation end process in step S3506, the final stop display command is output to the VDP 255 to display the stop result symbol in the current game round as the final stop display.

<Variation start processing>
First, the variation start process in step S3503 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63, in step S3601, information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time are specified from the change command to be read this time. Further, as described above, main controller 81 also transmits a type command when transmitting a variation command. Therefore, in step S3601, the type command received together with the variation command to be read this time is read out, and information on the 15R probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is read from the command. , Game result information such as explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information or missed result information is specified. In step S3601, from the above identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time Is stored in the register of the MPU 252.

  In a succeeding step S3602, the setting process of the variable display pattern is executed. In the variable display pattern setting process, the variable display pattern table (variable display pattern information group storage means) 313 in the program ROM 253 grasps the variable display pattern table (variable display pattern information group) in step S3601. The variable display pattern corresponding to the selected information is selected, and the address information of the selected variable display pattern is stored in the pattern information address storage area 327 provided in the work RAM 254.

  By storing the variable display pattern address information in the pattern information address storage area 327, the MPU 252 generates an internal command for the VDP 255 in an internal command output process (not shown) different from the process for starting the fluctuation. Then, the symbol display device 41 is driven so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation display pattern set this time is performed. In this case, the output process of the internal command is started repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and in the output process of the internal command, the internal command corresponding to the information of the set variation display pattern is displayed as a symbol. Generated according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and outputs the generated internal command to the VDP 255. The VDP 255 reads image data from the character ROM 256 according to the internal command, and writes the read image data to the video RAM 257. Thereby, the symbol display corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time is performed on the symbol display device 41.

  Note that the information on the variation display pattern stored in the variation display pattern table includes not only the contents of the variation display of the symbol, but also the background image information displayed together with the variation display of the symbol and the reach effect. Information on the image of reach production is also included. Therefore, when an internal command corresponding to the set variation display pattern is output to the VDP 255, a background image is displayed together with a symbol variation display, and further, when various effects such as reach effects are performed, An effect image is displayed.

  After the variable display pattern setting process is executed in step S3602, a notice effect setting process is executed in step S3603. Here, the notice effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

  In the setting process of the notice effect, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If both (both) the first notice condition establishment flag and the second notice condition establishment flag are not stored, this setting process is terminated as it is.

  If the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, it is determined in step S3702 whether the normal jackpot notice flag or the probability change jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When either the normal jackpot notice flag or the probable change jackpot notice flag is stored, the big hit correspondence occurrence lottery process is executed in step S3703, and the process proceeds to step S3706.

  If it is determined in step S3702 that neither the normal jackpot notice flag nor the probability variation jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, the process proceeds to step S3704. In the process of step S3704, it is determined whether or not the jackpot guess notice flag (normal jackpot guess notice flag or probability variable jackpot guess notice flag) is stored in the work RAM 254. If either the normal jackpot guess notice flag or the probable change jackpot guess notice flag is stored, the off corresponding occurrence lottery process is executed in step S3705, and the process proceeds to step S3706.

  Here, in the big hit corresponding lottery process and the outlier corresponding lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for the generated lottery is read from the generated lottery counter area 328 of the work RAM 254. Here, the generation lottery counter area 328 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 54) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition to the configuration, the configuration is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In each generation lottery process, the generation lottery table stored in the generation lottery table storage area (generation lottery information group storage means) 314 of the program ROM 253 is referred to and read out. It is determined whether or not the generated lottery counter value corresponds to the generation win.

  In this case, as the occurrence lottery table, a table referred to in the jackpot corresponding occurrence lottery process and a table referred to in the outlier corresponding occurrence lottery process are set. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the occurrence lottery table referred to in the jackpot corresponding occurrence lottery process has a counter value that is a winning winning counter set to “0 to 89” and a counter that results in a loss. The value is set to “90 to 99”. In other words, the winning is set with a probability of 9/10. In addition, among the counter values that are generated and won, “0 to 44” corresponds to a confirmed winning, and “45 to 89” corresponds to a non-determined winning. Although details will be described later, the content of the presentation of the hold notice differs between the case where the winning is confirmed and the case where the winning is not confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the generation lottery table referred to in the outage-corresponding generation lottery process has the counter value for occurrence win set to “0-49” and Is set to “50 to 99”. In other words, it is set to be a winning winning with a probability of 1/2. In the generation lottery table referenced in the jackpot corresponding lottery process, two patterns of a confirmed winning and a non-determined winning are set as the generated winnings. In the lottery table, only one pattern of unconfirmed winning is set as the occurrence winning.

  After the process of step S3703 or step S3705 is executed, it is determined in step S3706 whether or not the result of the generated lottery process is a generation win. If the winning is not generated, the present setting process is terminated. If it is a winning winning, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not the winning winning is a final winning among a final winning and a non-final winning. If it is a decisive win, the “effect setting processing corresponding to the decisive win of the big hit notice” is executed in steps S3708 to S3710, and if it is a non-determined win, the “no big hit notice is not set” in steps S3711 to S3713. The effect setting process “confirmed winning correspondence” is executed.

  In the “effect setting processing corresponding to final winning decision for jackpot notice”, first, in step S3708, it is determined whether or not the probability changing jackpot notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254 among the probability changing jackpot notice flag and the normal jackpot notice flag. If the probable change jackpot notice flag is stored, in step S3709, the probable change jackpot decision effect flag (probable change jackpot decision effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is stored in the probability change jackpot decision effect flag storage area (probability change jackpot decision effect information storage means). After the probability variation jackpot finalizing information) is stored, this setting process is terminated. If the probable jackpot notice flag is not stored, that is, if the normal jackpot notice flag is stored, the normal confirmed effect flag storage area (normally confirmed effect storage area 322 in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is determined in step S3710. After the normal jackpot confirmed effect flag (normal jackpot confirmed effect information) is stored in the effect information storage means), the present setting process is terminated.

  The probability variation jackpot finalizing effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the probability variation jackpot finalizing effect is to be performed based on the hold notice when the hold notice is given in a predetermined game round. The probability variation jackpot finalizing effect is an effect for notifying the player that the 15R probability variation jackpot result will surely occur in the game times related to the holding information set as the trigger for executing the holding notice. The probability variation jackpot finalizing effect flag is erased when an effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times that are targeted for the effect execution.

  In addition, the normal jackpot finalizing effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the normal jackpot finalizing effect is to be performed based on the hold notice when the hold notice is given in a predetermined game. The normal jackpot finalizing effect is an effect for notifying the player that the normal jackpot result will surely occur in the game times related to the holding information set as the trigger for executing the holding notice. The normal jackpot finalizing effect flag is erased when an effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times that are to be performed.

  On the other hand, in the production setting process corresponding to the non-confirmed winning, first, in step S3711, among the probable change jackpot notice flag, the normal jackpot notice flag, the probability change jackpot guess notice flag, and the normal jackpot guess notice flag or the normal jackpot guess notice flag or the It is determined whether or not any of the probable big hit guess notice flags is stored.

  If either the probability variation jackpot notice flag or the probability variation jackpot guess notice flag is stored, in step S3712, the probability variation jackpot guess effect flag storage area (probability variant jackpot guess effect information storage in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254) is stored. After the probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag (probability variation jackpot guessing effect information) is stored in the means), the present setting process is terminated. Further, when neither the probable jackpot notice flag nor the probable jackpot guess notice flag is stored, that is, when either the normal jackpot notice flag or the usual jackpot guess notice flag is stored, in step S2413, After the normal jackpot guess effect flag (normal jackpot guess effect information) is stored in the normal jackpot guess effect flag storage area (normal jackpot guess effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254, this setting process ends.

  The probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the probability variation jackpot guessing effect is to be performed based on the hold notice when the hold notice is given in a predetermined game time. The probability variation jackpot guessing effect is an effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that a 15R probability variation jackpot result will occur in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for execution of the hold notice. The probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag is deleted when the setting of the effect corresponding to the flag is performed in the game times targeted for the effect execution.

  The normal jackpot guessing effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the normal jackpot guessing effect is to be performed in the hold notice when the hold notice is given in a predetermined game time. The normal jackpot guessing effect is an effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that a normal jackpot result may occur in the game times related to the holding information set as an opportunity for executing the holding notice. The normal jackpot guessing effect flag is deleted when an effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times that are the object of effect execution.

  If the work RAM 254 does not store the jackpot guess notice flag (normal jackpot guess notice flag or probability variable jackpot guess notice flag), the process proceeds to step S3714 (see FIG. 65). In the process of step S3714, it is determined whether or not a reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If it is determined that the reach notice flag is stored, the reach notice corresponding lottery process is executed in step S3715, and the process proceeds to step S3717.

  When it is determined in step S3714 that the reach notice flag is not stored in the work RAM 254 (when the reach guess notice flag is stored), the occurrence corresponding lottery process for gusset reach is executed in step S3716. The processing shifts to S3717.

  Here, also in the reach lottery process corresponding to reach and the occurrence lottery process corresponding to gas reach, the counter value (numerical information) for the lottery is read from the counter lot counter 328 for the lottery in the work RAM 254. Here, the generation lottery counter area 328 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 54) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition to the configuration, the configuration is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In each generation lottery process, the generation lottery table stored in the generation lottery table storage area (generation lottery information group storage means) 314 of the program ROM 253 is referred to and read out. It is determined whether or not the generated lottery counter value corresponds to the generation win.

  In this case, as the generation lottery table, a table referred to in the reach correspondence generation lottery process and a table referred to in the gusset reach generation lottery process are set. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), the generation lottery table referred to in the reach determination corresponding generation lottery process has a counter value for generation winning of “0 to 49” and results in a loss. The counter value is set to “50 to 99”. In other words, it is set to be a winning winning with a probability of 1/2. In addition, among the counter values to be generated and won, “0 to 24” corresponds to a confirmed winning, and “25 to 49” corresponds to a non-determined winning. As will be described in detail later, the content of the presentation of the hold notice differs depending on whether the winning win is determined or not determined.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the generation lottery table referred to in the generation lottery process corresponding to gas leaches has the counter value for generation winning set to “0 to 1” and the result of losing Is set to “2 to 99”. In other words, it is set to be a winning winning with a probability of 1/50. In the case of a winning winning, it will be a non-determined winning uniformly.

  After the process of step S3715 or step S3716 is executed, it is determined in step S3717 whether or not the result of the generated lottery process is a generation win. If the winning is not generated, the present setting process is terminated. If it is a winning winning, it is determined whether or not it is a confirmed winning in step S3718, and if it is a confirmed winning, storage of reach reach effect flags in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is stored in step S3719. After the reach confirmation effect flag (reach determination effect information) is stored in the area (reach determination effect information storage means), this setting process is terminated. If the winning is not confirmed, in step S3720, the reach estimation effect flag (gaselification effect information) is stored in the reach estimation effect flag storage area (reach estimation effect information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Later, this setting process ends.

  The reach confirmation effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that a certain change confirmation effect is to be performed in the hold notice when the hold notice is given in a predetermined game number. The reach confirmation effect is an effect for notifying the player that the reach will surely occur in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. The reach confirmation effect flag is deleted when the effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times that are the object of effect execution.

  In addition, the reach estimation effect flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the normal confirmation effect is to be performed in the hold notice when the hold notice is given in a predetermined game number. The ghasse reach effect is an effect for notifying the player that a reach effect may occur in the game times related to the hold information set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. The reach estimation effect flag is erased when an effect corresponding to the flag is set in the game times that are to be effected.

  Returning to the description of the variation start processing (FIG. 63), after the notice effect setting processing is executed in step S3603, in step S3604, the variation command to be read this time is the first variation command. And it is determined whether it is a 1st fluctuation command among the 2nd fluctuation commands.

  That is, the change command to be read this time is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra out of the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Ra. It is determined whether or not the hold information is a game turn start target, that is, the hold information acquired based on a winning to the upper working port 33 is a game turn start target and transmitted.

  If it is the first variation command, the first flag erasure process is executed in step S3605, and then the variation start processing is terminated. If it is the second variation command, the first variation command is executed in step S3606. After executing the two-flag erasing process, the fluctuation starting process is terminated.

  Here, the first flag erasing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the first flag erasing process, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the first big hit hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the first jackpot hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3805 without executing the processes in steps S3802 to S3804. If the first big hit hold flag is stored, in step S3802, the first erasure is performed so that the value stored in the first erasure counter area in the erasure counter area 323 is decremented by one. The counter area information is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S3803, it is determined whether or not the value of the first erasing counter area is “0”. If it is “0”, after the first jackpot hold flag is deleted in step S3804, the process proceeds to step S2505. If it is not “0”, the process of step S3804 is not executed. The process proceeds to step S3505.

  As already described, the first jackpot holding flag includes the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81. Is stored in the first erasure counter area, and when the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored in the first result display section hold area Ra, the hold information of the game times Information for specifying the order of the start target is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command response process (FIG. 55), the process of step S3102 is executed at the timing before the process of step S3103 is executed, so that the hold is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. If the holding information includes a plurality of holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning, the information on the order of the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning that becomes the starting order is the first erasure counter. It will be stored in the area. Therefore, the case where the information in the first erasure counter area is “0” as an initial value corresponds to the jackpot winning in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section. This means that no hold information is included. In this case, the first jackpot hold flag is deleted.

  In the first flag erasing process, in step S3805, it is determined whether or not the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the first notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the erasing process is terminated as it is. If the first advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the value stored in the first advance notice counter area in the advance notice counter area 325 is decremented by 1 in step S3806. Update information in the first pending notice counter area.

  Thereafter, in step S3807, it is determined whether or not the value of the first pending notice counter area is “0”. If it is “0”, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted in step S3808, and the notice initialization process is executed in step S3809. In the notice initialization process, when any of the normal jackpot notice flag, the probable change jackpot notice flag, the normal guess notice flag, the probability change guess notice flag, or the reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, the stored flag is displayed. It is a process to erase.

  Here, as described above, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored when the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. When the hold information set as the trigger for the execution of the hold notice is stored in the first result display section hold area Ra in the first hold notice counter area, the hold information indicates the game number Information for specifying the order of the start target is stored. Therefore, when the information in the first hold notice counter area is “0” as an initial value, the hold information set as the trigger for the hold notice in the first result display section hold area Ra is already a game. In this case, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased.

  When the process of step S3809 is executed, the process proceeds to the process of step S3810, and the game times started with the value of the first hold notice counter area set to “0” is game times based on jackpot hold information (probability change corresponding hold command or normal It is determined whether or not the game is executed based on the corresponding pending command. That is, in step S3810, the game times targeted for the notice effect (game results and game effects targeted for the notice effect) are the jackpot holding information (the 15R probability variable jackpot result and the normal jackpot result as the game result). It is determined whether or not the game is started based on (holding information to be displayed).

  If the determination in step S3810 is affirmative, the first flag removal process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S3810 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3811. That is, when the game times that are the targets of the notice effect are not started based on the jackpot holding information, the process proceeds to step S3811, and it is determined whether or not the acquired information exists. That is, in the case of performing a notice effect on the predetermined hold information, is the hold information acquired after the predetermined hold information already stored at the time of starting the game round that is the target of the notice effect? Determine whether or not.

  If the determination in step S3811 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3812, in which a second warning effect execution determination flag storage area (second warning effect execution determination information storage provided in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254) is stored. Means) stores a second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information). Then, the first flag erasing process is terminated. Here, as described later, the MPU 252 indicates that the second notice effect execution determination flag is a situation for searching for hold information (target acquired information) that is a target of the second notice effect from the already obtained information. This is information for identification. The second notice effect execution determination flag determines that the second notice effect can be executed based on any of the already obtained information, or can execute the second notice effect based on the already obtained information. If it is not, the information is deleted.

  If the determination in step S3810 is affirmative and the determination in step S3811 is negative, the first flag erasing process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3807 that the value of the first pending notice counter area is not “0”, the first flag erasing process is terminated without executing step S3810.

  In the second flag erasing process in step S3606 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 63), the same process as the first flag erasing process is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 68, in the process of step S3851 (process corresponding to the above-described step S3801), it is determined whether or not the second big hit hold flag is stored, and the process of step S3852 (previously described step S3802). In the process corresponding to step S3803 (the process corresponding to step S3803 described above), the second erase counter area is updated. It is determined whether or not it is “0”. Further, in the process of step S3854 (process corresponding to the above-described step S2804), a process of deleting the second jackpot hold flag is executed.

  Further, in the process of step S3855 (process corresponding to the above-described step S3805), it is determined whether or not the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, and in the process of step S3856 (process corresponding to the above-described step S3806). Then, a process of updating the second pending notice counter area in the pending notice counter area 325 is executed, and in the process of step S3857 (the process corresponding to step S3807 described above), the second pending notice counter area is “0”. It is determined whether or not. In the process of step S3858 (process corresponding to the above-described step S3508), a process for deleting the second notice condition satisfaction flag is executed, and in the process of step S3859 (process corresponding to the above-described step S3509), the initial notice The same process as the process is executed.

  Then, when the process of step S3859 is executed, the process shifts to the process of step S3860, and the game number started with the value of the second hold notice counter area set to “0” is the game number (process number) based on the jackpot hold information. It is determined whether or not there is. That is, in step S3860, it is determined whether or not the game times (processing times) targeted for the notice effect are jackpot holding information. If the determination in step S3860 is affirmative, the second flag erasing process is terminated. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in the process of step S3860, the process proceeds to step S3861 to determine whether or not the acquired information exists.

  If the determination in step S3861 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3862, and the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second notice effect execution determination information storage provided in the various flag storage area 322 of the work RAM 254 is stored. Means) stores a second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information). Then, the second flag erasing process is terminated. If the determination in step S3860 is affirmative and the determination in step S3861 is negative, the second flag erasing process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3857 that the value of the second pending notice counter area is not “0”, the second flag erasing process is terminated without executing step S3860.

  Next, the second notice effect execution determination process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69 and 70 is a part of a plurality of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  When the second notice effect execution determination process is activated, the second notice in the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second notice effect execution determination information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 in step S3901. It is determined whether or not an effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information) is stored. If it is determined in step S3901 that the second notice effect execution determination flag is not stored, the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3902, and the second search flag is stored in the second search flag storage area (second search flag) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether it is stored in the search information storage means). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, the process proceeds to step S3920. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, the process proceeds to step S3903. In the process of step S3903, it is determined whether or not the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area (first search information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.

  Here, the first search flag is information for identifying in the MPU 252 that it is in a state of searching whether or not jackpot holding information exists in the acquired information. Then, it is deleted when it is found that jackpot holding information exists in the acquired information or when it is confirmed that jackpot holding information does not exist.

  Further, as described later, the second search flag indicates to the MPU 252 that the lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed in the order of storage based on acquired information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information) other than jackpot hold information. Information for identification. This second search flag is deleted when the result of the notice condition establishment lottery based on any of the already obtained information is won, or when the result of the notice condition establishment lottery for the target acquired information is all lost.

  If it is determined in step S3903 that the first search flag is not stored in the first search flag storage area, the process advances to step S3904 to store the first search flag in the first search flag storage area, and the first search counter A process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit (Cmax) of (Ci) is performed. Then, when the process of step S3904 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3905. If it is determined in step S3903 that the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area, the process advances to step S3905 without passing through step S3904.

  Here, the first search counter is provided in the first search counter area in the search counter area 329, and when the first search flag is stored, measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the first search flag. It is. In the first search counter, the number of acquired information is set to an upper limit value (Cmax), and the count value of the first search counter is updated to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. The When the information stored in the first search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Cmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the first search flag is deleted.

  In the process of step S3905, a process for searching whether or not jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information is performed. This step S3905 is performed based on the count value of the first search counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the acquired information acquired first (however, when the number of acquired information is one) is jackpot holding information. Here, the acquired information acquired first is referred to as “acquired information 1”, and when the number of acquired information is two or more, the acquired information stored next is referred to as “acquired information 2”, and the acquired information number is In the case of 3 or more, the acquired information stored next is referred to as “acquired information 3”, and when the number of acquired information is 4, the acquired information stored next is referred to as “acquired information 4”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a search (first search) as to whether or not jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information is searched based on the count value of the first search counter, and when the jackpot hold information is found, In step S3906, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold information is valid jackpot hold information (described later), and if valid, a valid jackpot hold information flag (described later) is stored in the valid jackpot hold information flag storage area. The flag is stored. If invalid, the invalid big hit hold information flag is stored in the invalid information flag storage area (described later). If it is determined in step S3907 that a valid information flag is stored, the effective big hit hold information flag (described later) is erased in step S3908, and then the process proceeds to step S3910, where an invalid big hit hold information flag is stored. If it is determined that the invalid big hit hold information flag (described later) is deleted in step S3909, the process advances to step S3913.

  Here, the effective jackpot hold information determination process in step S3906 determines whether or not to perform “various settings for performing rehold notice” by the same process as in steps S3106 to S3109 of FIG. 55 described above. It is processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), first, in step S3941, jackpot hold information (probability change corresponding hold command or normal correspondence hold command) is transmitted based on winning to the upper operating port 33. It is determined whether or not. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 33, it is determined in step S3942 whether or not an opening / closing execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S3943, the work RAM 254 is checked. It is determined whether or not the support flag is stored, and further, in step S3944, it is determined whether or not common information is included in the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal support hold command that is the current read target.

  As a result, when the opening / closing execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3942, and the flow proceeds to step S3946. In step S3946, processing for storing the jackpot invalid information flag in the jackpot invalid information flag storage area is performed. If the support flag is stored even if the opening / closing execution flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3942 and an affirmative determination is made in step S3943, and the process directly proceeds to step S3946. . Further, even when both the opening / closing execution flag and the support flag are not stored, if common information is not included, a negative determination is made in both step S3942 and step S3943, and a negative determination is made in step S3944. The process proceeds to step S3946, where a process for storing the invalid big hit hold information flag in the invalid big hit hold information flag storage area is performed, and the valid big hit hold information determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot hold information (probability change corresponding hold command or normal correspondence hold command) is transmitted based on the winning to the lower operating port 34, the process proceeds to step S3945. Further, when the jackpot hold information is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, it is a case where both the opening / closing execution flag and the support flag are not stored in the work RAM 254, and the hold command concerned If the common information is included, the process proceeds to step S3945, where the effective big hit hold information flag is stored in the effective big hit hold information flag storage area, and the effective big hit hold information determination process ends.

  When the processing of step S3908 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3910, and a lottery for establishing a notice condition for jackpot is performed. This lottery for establishing the notice condition is the same process as S3201 in FIG. Then, when the process of step S3910 is executed, it is determined in step S3911 whether or not the lottery for establishing a big hit notice condition is a win. If it is determined that the game is won, in step S3912, a big success winning process is executed. This jackpot winning winning process is the same process as in FIG. However, in the step S3216 of the “big success winning process” executed in the step S3912, as shown in parentheses in FIG. "The number of acquired information") is set in the first pending notice counter. Similarly, in step S3218, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 59, a number indicating the occurrence order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set. Specifically, when the acquired information (big hit hold information) won in the notice condition establishment lottery is the acquired information 3, “3” is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). . For example, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “3”, if the previously acquired information (big hit hold information) acquired in the second (acquisition order) is won in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition, the first hold notice counter “2” is set in (second pending notice counter). Note that, as described above, the lottery for establishing the notice condition for jackpot in step S3910 may be performed based on FIG. That is, the probability of winning is different between the case where the jackpot hold information is a probability change hold command and the case of a normal support hold command. For example, when the jackpot hold information is a probability change-response hold command, the probability of winning in the notice condition establishment lottery process is higher (for example, 1.5 times) than in the case of a normal-response hold command, and the second notice The execution probability of the production may be increased. With regard to this point, a “lottery for establishing a notice condition in step S3906a in FIG. 79 (modified example 4)” described later, a lottery for establishing a notice condition in step S3908b in FIG. 89 (second embodiment), which will be described later, The same applies to the notice condition fulfillment lottery (third embodiment) in step S3906c of 110 ".

  When the big hit success winning process in step S3912 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3914, and after the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag are deleted, the second notice effect execution determination process ends. In the first embodiment, since the jackpot holding information is the target of the priority notice condition establishment process in the acquired information, the second notice effect can be executed with higher probability than the normal notice effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the lottery for achieving the big hit notice condition is a loss, the process proceeds to step S3913. Also, the process advances to step S3913 when invalid jackpot hold information is not stored in the process of S3907 (the jackpot hold information to be processed in S3906 is not valid jackpot hold information). In the process of step S3913, it is determined whether or not the number of existing information is “1”. That is, when the number of acquired information is one and the acquired information is jackpot holding information, whether the jackpot holding information is valid holding information (holding information not subject to holding notice) or the jackpot holding If the lottery for establishing the notice condition of information is a loss, the purpose is to end the second notice effect execution determination process. For this reason, if the number of existing information is “1”, the process proceeds to step S 3914, and after performing the process of deleting the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag, the second notice effect execution determination process. Exit.

  When it is determined in the process of step S3913 that the number of acquired information is greater than one (when a negative determination is made in step S3913), the process proceeds to step S3915, and whether or not “Ci ≧ 2” is determined. judge. In other words, whether or not the jackpot hold information corresponding to the value of the first search counter (the jackpot hold information determined to be invalid in S3907, the jackpot hold information that was lost in the lottery for establishing the notice condition) is in the second or higher order of acquisition. It is determined whether or not there is acquisition information acquired before the jackpot holding information that is the target of the processing of S3906 and the like this time. If the determination in step S3915 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3916. In step S3916, the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, the process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area, and the upper limit value of the second search counter (Di) ( Dmax) is set as “Ci−1”, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily ended. In this case, the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di) is set with the number of pieces of acquired information acquired before the jackpot holding information that is the target of the process of S3906 this time. For example, if the acquired information 3 is the jackpot holding information that is the target of the processing of S3906 this time, the acquired information 1 to 2 is set as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di). Then, after finishing the process of step S3915, once ending the second notice effect execution determination process, and starting the second notice effect execution determination process again, the affirmative determinations of steps S3901 and S3902 are made, and FIG. The process proceeds to step S3920. If a negative determination is made in step S3915 (if the jackpot hold information of acquisition information 1 is invalid or if the second notice lottery is a loss), the process proceeds to step S3914, and the second notice effect execution determination process ends. .

  If the determination in step S3905 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3917 to determine whether the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax). That is, if the jackpot holding information cannot be found by repeating the process of step S3905 for the number of pieces of acquired information, it is determined in step S3917 whether the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value. More specifically, when the number of acquired information is “3”, the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1), the acquired information 2 (Ci = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) are stored in the order of storage. If the jackpot holding information cannot be found even after the processing of step S3905, the determination in step S3917 is affirmative. If the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) has not yet been processed in step S3905, In step S3917, the determination is negative. If the number of acquired information is “1” and the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) is determined to be negative in step S3905, the determination is positive in step S3917.

  If it is determined in step S3917 that the value is not the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3918, the count value of the first search counter (Ci) is incremented by 1, and the second notice effect execution determination process is once ended. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3905 through an affirmative determination in step S3901, a negative determination in step S3902, and an affirmative determination in step S3903. In this case, the acquired information that has been acquired following the previously acquired information (the acquired information that is the determination target of whether or not the jackpot hold information) is the target of the processing of S3905.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3917 that the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3919, and the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, After executing the process of storing the two search flags in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect is executed. The determination process ends.

  In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3920 in FIG. 70 through an affirmative determination in step S3901 and an affirmative determination in step S3902.

  In the processing after step S3920 in FIG. 70, regarding the acquired information other than the jackpot holding information (reach holding information or non-reach holding information), the determination as to whether or not the information is valid acquired information and the lottery for establishing the notice condition are performed. (Reach hold information or non-reach hold information). Specifically, in step S3920, it is determined whether or not the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter is valid acquired information. Here, the second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and when the second search flag is stored, measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the second search flag. It is. In the second search counter, an upper limit value is set in step S3919 or step S3916, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 every time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. When the information stored in the second search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the second search flag is deleted.

  As described above, the process of step S3920 is performed based on the count value of the second search counter. The valid acquired information determination process in step S3920 is a process for determining whether or not to perform “various settings for performing the hold notice” by the same process as in steps S3113 to S3115 of FIG. 55 described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), first, in step S 3951, is acquisition information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time point transmitted based on the winning to the upper operating port 33? Determine whether or not. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 33, it is determined in step S3952 whether or not an opening / closing execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and in step S3953, the work RAM 254 is checked. It is determined whether a support flag is stored.

  As a result, when the opening / closing execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3952, the process proceeds to S3955, the process of storing the invalid information flag in the invalid information flag storage area is performed, and the valid information determination process is terminated. To do. If the support flag is stored even if the opening / closing execution flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3953, and the flow proceeds to step S3955, where the invalid information flag is stored in the invalid information flag storage area. Is stored, and the valid information determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is transmitted based on the winning to the lower operating port 34, the process proceeds to step S3954. In addition, the acquisition information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, and both the opening / closing execution flag and the support flag are stored in the work RAM 254. Even if not, the process proceeds to step S3954. In step S3954, a process for storing the valid information flag in the valid information flag storage area is performed, and the valid information determination process is terminated.

When the valid information determination process in step S3920 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3921. In step S3921, it is determined whether a valid information flag is stored in the valid information flag storage area. If the valid information flag is stored, that is, if the obtained information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is valid obtained information, the process proceeds to step S3922, and the valid information flag is erased. Then, the process proceeds to step S3923. In step S3923, a lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed on the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time. This notice condition satisfaction lottery is the same process as the process of S3301 in FIG. 56B or the process of S3401 in FIG. For this reason, the lottery for establishment of the notice condition is won in step S3923 depending on whether the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is “reach hold information” or “non-reach hold information”. Probabilities are different.

  If the notice condition establishment lottery of step S3923 is performed, it will progress to step S3924 and will determine whether the result of a notice condition establishment lottery is winning. If it is determined that the game is won, a notice condition establishment process is executed in step S3925. Specifically, when the acquisition information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is “reach hold information”, the “reaching establishment winning process” similar to FIG. 60 described above is executed, If the acquired information is “non-reach hold information”, the “non-reach successful winning process” similar to FIG. 61 is executed. However, in step S3319 of the “reaching establishment winning process” executed in step S3925, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information acquired (the number of target acquired information) is set in the first pending notice counter, and in step S3321 The number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishment of the advance notice condition (the number of target acquired information) is set in the second hold advance notice counter. Also in step S3414 of the “non-reach establishment winning process” executed in step S3925, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is stored in the first pending notice counter. In step S3416, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the advance notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) is set in the second pending advance notice counter. Specifically, when the number of pieces of acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery is “2”, “2” is set to the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). For example, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “4”, if the previously acquired information acquired in the second (in order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition, the first reserved notice counter (second reserved notice) "2" is set in the counter).

  When the establishment winning process is executed in step S3925, the process proceeds to step S3926, and after the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are erased, the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

  In step S3921, the acquired information indicated by the count value of the second search counter (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) is not valid hold information (the effective information flag is not stored in the effective information flag storage area). In other words, if the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is not valid acquired information, the process proceeds to step S3927, the invalid information flag is erased, and the process proceeds to step S3928. To do. If it is determined in step S3924 that the result of the advance notice condition lottery for the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is a loss, the process also proceeds to step S3928.

  In step S3928, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Here, in the process of step S3928, even if the process of shifting to step S3920 is repeated for the upper limit number of times (Dmax) set in the process of S3916 or S3919, valid pending information cannot be found, or the notice condition is satisfied. This is a process for ending the second notice effect execution determination process when the winning is not achieved. Specifically, when the number of acquired information is “3”, the acquired information 1 (Di = 1), the acquired information 2 (Di = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) are stepped in the storage order. If an affirmative determination is not made in the process of step S3924 even after performing S3920 and subsequent steps, it is determined in the process of step S3928 that the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). On the other hand, if the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) has not been subjected to the processing after step S3920, the determination is negative in step S3928.

  If the upper limit value (Dmax) has not been reached, the process moves to step S3929, and after the count value of the second search counter (Di) is incremented by 1, the second notice effect execution determination process is once ended. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to the processes after step S3920 through the affirmative determination in step S3901 and the affirmative determination in step S3902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3928 that the count value of the second search counter has reached the upper limit (Dmax), the process proceeds to step S3926, and the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted. Thereafter, the notice effect execution determination process ends. In addition, you may perform the process after S3920 separately with reach hold information and non-reach hold information. That is, until the count value of the second search counter reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), the lottery for establishing the notice condition for the reach hold information is performed, and if all are lost, the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value ( Until reaching Dmax), a notice condition establishment lottery for non-reach hold information may be performed.

  Here, in the variation starting process shown in FIG. 63, as described above, the first flag erasing process or the second flag erasing process is executed after the notice effect setting process is executed. Thereby, when the hold information memorize | stored in the reservation area Ra for 1st result display parts or the hold area Rb for 2nd result display parts is set as a trigger of execution of a hold notice, it becomes the trigger of the said execution. In addition to being able to give a hold notice at the game times that were subject to start before the game times related to the hold information, the above-mentioned hold notice and continuity are also found at the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution. An effect having can be executed. In this case, the effect in the game times related to the hold information that has been triggered by the execution corresponds to a game time correspondence notice for predicting a game result in the game times. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 can execute the game times compatible notice using the configuration for executing the hold notice, and the game times compatible notice has continuity with respect to the hold notice. can do.

  Further, in the first embodiment, even when the notice initialization process of step S3809 in FIG. 67 (step S3859 in FIG. 68) is performed, the acquired information (holding information acquired after determining the execution of the finished notice effect) 69, the process of step S3912 of FIG. 69 or the process of step S3925 of FIG. 70 is performed, and the first notice condition establishment flag (second notice condition establishment flag) may be stored in the work RAM 254 again. In this case, in the first flag erasing process of FIG. 67 (second flag erasing process of FIG. 68), an affirmative determination is obtained in the process of S3805 (S3855), and the process proceeds to S3806 (S3856) and subsequent processes. At this time, the target number of acquired information (the total number of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishment of the notification condition and the number of acquired information stored before the acquired information) is the first notification counter (second notification). Therefore, S3806 (S3856), S3807 (S3857), and the like are performed, and the second notice effect is executed based on FIGS. 72 and 73 described later. In the first embodiment, when the second announcement effect is ended, if an affirmative determination is made in the process of S3811 (S3861), the second announcement effect may be executed again.

<Variation processing>
Next, the variable processing in step S3505 in the variable display control process (FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIGS. The during-change process is a process for displaying an image for holding notice during the change display of the symbol. 72 and 73 are flowcharts showing the mid-variation process, and FIGS. 74 and 74 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the notice effect.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the notice effect. The MPU 252 measures the time from the start of the symbol variable display on the symbol display device 41 using an elapsed time counter area 329 as an elapsed time measuring means (or elapsed period measuring means) provided in the work RAM 254. Specifically, when the variable display is started, an addition process of the elapsed time counter area 329 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). At the end of the game round, the information in the elapsed time counter area 329 is initialized to “0” as an initial value. In the elapsed time table of the elapsed time table storage area 315 provided in the program ROM 253, a counter value corresponding to the execution timing of the notice effect is set. Note that the counter value is set as a timing during the game round. In step S4001, whether or not the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 329 exceeds the value stored in the elapsed time table storage area 315 is greater than or equal to the value stored in the elapsed time table storage area 315. judge.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that it is not the execution timing of the notice effect, the processing for mid-variation is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the execution timing of the notice effect, the processing after step S4002 is executed.

  In this step S4002, it is determined whether or not the big hit notification flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If it is stored, the process proceeds to the process after step S4003, and if it is not stored, the process after step S4010 is performed. Move to (FIG. 73).

  In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot finalization flag is stored. If the probability variation jackpot finalization flag is stored, in step S4004, after the probability variation jackpot finalization character is set, the actual variation is in progress. The process is terminated. By setting the probability variation jackpot confirmed character in step S4004, in the internal command output processing in the MPU 252, an internal command is generated for the VDP 255 so that the image of the probability variation confirmed character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character with the word “accurate!” Is displayed as the probability variation confirmed character. It should be noted that when executing step S4004, the probability variation effect flag erasure process is executed.

  If the probability variation jackpot finalizing flag is not stored, it is determined in step S4005 whether or not the normal jackpot finalizing flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and if the normal jackpot finalizing flag is stored. In step 4006, after setting a normal jackpot fixed character, the mid-variation processing is terminated. By setting the normal jackpot confirmed character in step S4006, in the internal command output processing in the MPU 252, the internal command is issued to the VDP 255 so that the image of the normal jackpot confirmed character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Generate and output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character with the letter “communication!” Is displayed as the normal confirmed character. It should be noted that, in the execution of step S4006, the normal jackpot determination effect flag erasing process is executed.

  When the normal jackpot finalizing effect flag is not stored, it is determined in step S4007 whether or not the probable variation jackpot guessing effect flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In step S4008, after setting the probability variation jackpot guess character, the mid-variation processing is terminated. By setting the probability variation jackpot guess character in step S4008, the MPU 252 outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that an image of the probability variation jackpot guess character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Generate and output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character to which the character “probably?” Is attached is displayed as the probability variation big hit guess character. It should be noted that when executing step S4008, the probability variation big hit guess effect flag erasing process is executed.

  If it is determined in step S4007 that the probability variation jackpot guessing effect flag is not stored, the normal jackpot guessing effect flag is stored. Exit. Here, by setting the normal jackpot guess character in step S4009, in the output process of the internal command in the MPU 252, with respect to the VDP 255 so that the image of the normal jackpot guess character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Generate and output internal commands. As a result, as shown in FIG. 74 (d), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character with the letter “communication?” Is displayed as the normal jackpot guessing character. It should be noted that when executing step S4009, a normal jackpot guess effect flag erasing process is executed.

  If it is determined in step S4002 that the jackpot notice flag is not stored in the work RAM 254, the process proceeds to step S4010 (FIG. 73), and it is determined whether or not the reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the reach notice flag is stored, the reach determination character is set in step S4011, and then the mid-change process is terminated. When the reach confirmation character is set in step S4011, the internal command output processing in the MPU 252 generates an internal command for the VDP 255 so that the image of the reach confirmation character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the character with the character “reach certain” is displayed as the reach confirmation character. It should be noted that when executing step S4010, the reach notice flag erasing process is executed.

  If the reach notice flag is not stored, it is determined in step S4012 whether or not the reach estimation effect flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the reach estimation effect flag is stored, step S4013 is determined. Then, after setting the reach estimation effect flag, the mid-variation process is terminated. When the reach estimation effect flag is set in step S4013, in the internal command output process in the MPU 252, an internal command is generated for the VDP 255 so that the image of the reach estimation character is displayed on the symbol display device 41. And output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a character with the letter “reach?” Is displayed as the reach estimation character. In this case, the reach display may or may not appear during the variable display based on the hold information that is the target of the notice effect. It should be noted that when executing step S4012, the reach estimation effect flag erasure process is executed.

  If it is determined in step S4012 that the reach estimation effect flag is not stored in the work RAM 254, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) shows the relationship between the contents of the hold information and its rank. The rank indicates the order of the advantage for the player. The higher the rank, the higher the hold information (the lower the hold information, the higher the hold information). The probability of being determined (that is, the lottery for establishing the notice condition) is high. Specifically, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is “first rank”, the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is “second rank”, the hold information for displaying the result of disapproval through super reach, and the result of disengagement via normal reach The hold information for displaying “H” and the hold information for displaying the result of disengagement without reaching reach are “third rank”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, ranking is performed on the hold information, and the second notice effect execution determination process is performed. That is, in the second notice effect execution determination process, whether or not jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information (acquired information related to execution of the open / close mode, that is, acquired information of the first rank or the second rank exists. Or not) is searched in the storage order. Then, if found, the search for the presence or absence of jackpot hold information is completed at that time, and for the discovered jackpot hold information, a lottery for establishing a notice condition for jackpot (a lottery similar to the jackpot setting process) is performed, If it is a win, the second notice effect execution determination process is completed. In addition, in the case of a lottery for the jackpot notice condition lottery, the lottery information for the reach or non-reach for the reach information that has been acquired prior to the jackpot hold information (acquired information) in the order of storage The establishment lottery similar to the correspondence setting process is performed. That is, in the second notice effect execution determination process, the presence / absence of specific hold information (big hit hold information) is searched, and if there is specific hold information, the second notice is first given to the hold information. Perform production execution. Then, if the lottery for winning the notice condition for jackpot is won, the second notice effect execution determination process is completed, and if it is a loss, the hold information before the specific hold information (specific hold) The second notice effect execution determination process is performed until the hold information acquired immediately before the information).

  In this case, the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery performed based on the first rank or second rank hold information is higher than the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery performed based on the other rank hold information. For this reason, when the result of the game round based on the hold information subject to the hold notice is lost, there is a possibility that the pre-read zone may be entered if there is already acquired information (the lottery that establishes the notice condition may be won) ) Can be improved, and game characteristics in games can be improved, such as making it easier to win a specific pre-read zone. In other words, in the notice condition establishment lottery of the second notice effect execution determination process, it is possible to preferentially hold specific hold information (first rank or second rank hold information), thereby giving priority to hold information. It is possible to increase the possibility of entry into the pre-reading zone. In addition, by ranking the hold information, it is possible to improve game characteristics in the game, such as making it easier to win a specific pre-read zone.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a hold notice is made based on hold information (prefetch information) sent from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 (display control device 212) (when a prefetch effect is performed). In order to prevent problems due to complicated control, first, a lottery for establishing a notice condition (lottery relating to a pre-reading zone) is performed. Then, when the lottery for establishment of the advance notice condition (the lottery regarding the pre-reading zone) is won, a process for not performing the lottery for establishing the advance notice condition is executed for the hold information acquired thereafter. That is, in the state where the lottery for fulfilling the notice condition is won (during the pre-read zone), the lottery for fulfilling the notice condition is not performed even if the hold information is acquired (even if the previously obtained information is generated). For this reason, there is a possibility that a non-lottery period related to the notice condition establishment lottery will be created by the number of acquired information items.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the result of the game based on the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice is lost, there is no lottery period related to the notice condition fulfillment lottery when there is already acquired information. The possibility of occurrence can be reduced. In addition to increasing the possibility of entering a pre-read zone (the possibility that a lottery for establishing a notice condition will be won), it is possible to improve game characteristics in games such as making it easier to win a specific pre-read zone.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the game ball launched from the launch position 74W of the launch rail 74 generates a return ball that runs backward on the launch rail 74, the lower end of the launch rail 74 is used. The return ball can be discharged. That is, the support member 77 can be retracted from behind the game ball on the launch rail 74 by exciting the solenoid 77a (built-in coil) based on the detection of the return ball by the passage detection sensor 74b. . Thereby, game balls existing on the launch rail 74 (all game balls including the return ball on the launch rail 74) can be discharged out of the launch rail 74 from the lower end portion of the launch rail 74. Here, in a conventional gaming machine that does not include a discharge means for discharging the return ball from the launch rail 74, if a return ball is generated or a large number of return balls are generated, the progress of the game may be hindered. Alternatively, a pachinko hall clerk or the like must once unlock the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1), open the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13, and remove the return ball from the firing rail 74. It is. In this case, the player needs to stop the game for a while.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the discharge means (the process of step S1702 performed by the main control device 81 based on the detection result of the passage detection sensor 74b, the solenoid 77a that moves up the support member 77, etc.) Since the operation of automatically eliminating the return ball is performed, the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. In other words, the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) is locked, and the operation of eliminating the return ball is automatically executed while the front door frame 14 remains closed with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, since the return ball is eliminated while the player is still turning the firing handle 8A, smooth progress of the game can be ensured. For example, even if the player performs a turning operation on the launch handle 8A and the stop switch 89 is not operated, the return ball is automatically discharged before the player notices, so the first implementation According to the form, the progress of the game is not impaired by the processing of the return ball.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is the first result corresponding to the upper operation port 33. The winning / losing lottery is performed in preference to the holding information stored in the display holding area Ra (hereinafter referred to as “priority variation function of the second special symbol”). As a result, an expectation for a launch operation such as performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the upper working port 33 or performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the lower working port 34 depending on the game situation or the like. Diversification is achieved and the level of attention of the game can be increased. However, unlike the first embodiment, the “priority variation function of the second special symbol” is not provided. For example, the winning lottery based on the upper working port 33 and the winning lottery based on the lower working port 34 are used to obtain the hold information. It may be performed in order. For example, in this case, the hold information acquired based on winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information acquired based on winning in the lower working port 34 are alternately processed (the target of the lottery or variation display). (See the third embodiment to be described later).

  In addition, according to the first embodiment, the information is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb that is not the target of the determination. A hold notice according to hold information that is not the target of the determination may be executed in the game times before the game times related to the hold information. As a result, for the player, the game for generating a prize to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 and the determination result of the hold information acquired based on the win are confirmed in the game times related to the hold information. In addition to the game, if a plurality of hold information is stored on hold, the result of the decision on the success / failure for the later hold information in accordance with the content of the hold notice A game of prediction is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the attention degree of the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, according to the first embodiment, when the result of the game times executed based on the hold information subject to the hold notice becomes a disapproval result and the player is discouraged once, the second notice effect is started, and the game A person's intention can be attached. For this reason, the attention once disappeared by the player can be directed to the pachinko machine 10 again. In particular, in the first embodiment, since the lottery for establishing the notice condition is performed with priority from the higher rank holding information (the first rank and the second rank), the execution fluctuation of the second notice effect is increased, and the game entertainment is further enhanced. be able to. And since the game times used as the object of the 2nd notice production may become a jackpot result when the 2nd notice production starts, the game interest can be raised also from this point.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 77, in the high-frequency support mode in which winning to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is put on hold. The notice is not executed. A configuration in which a hold notice about hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section is performed at a predetermined frequency in a situation where a winning to the lower operating port 34 which is a priority in the lottery lottery is likely to occur. Assuming that, the following problems 1 and 2 are concerned.

(Problem 1) Although the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section, the hold information is activated at a timing before the hold information becomes a target of the lottery. It is assumed that the winning in the mouth 34 continues and the timing at which the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice becomes the target of the lottery is delayed with respect to the execution timing of the hold notice. Then, for example, there is a risk that it will be difficult to understand what hold information the hold notice was made for, and on the other hand, in order to clarify it, the form of the hold notice may be restricted. Furthermore, when the winning at the lower operating port 34 continues for a predetermined number of times, the suspension notice is temporarily stopped, and then the winning at the lower operating port 34 does not occur for a predetermined period. Is configured to restart, or when the winning to the lower operating port 34 continues for a predetermined number of times, a configuration of changing the mode of the hold notice may be considered, but in this case, the winning frequency to the lower operating port 34, etc. Need to be monitored, and the mode of the hold notice needs to be changed accordingly, which may increase the processing load.

(Problem 2) In the high-frequency support mode, when a hold notice is made that the hold information stored in the first result display hold area Ra corresponds to the 15R probability change jackpot result, for the player, It is advantageous to immediately generate the 15R probability variation jackpot result by stopping the operation of the firing handle 8A so that the winning to the lower operation port 34 does not occur. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, when a holding notice is made that the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the normal jackpot result, For a player, winning is repeatedly entered into the lower operating port 34, and the holding information that triggered the execution of the holding notice is not subject to the lottery, and is acquired based on the winning at the lower operating port 34. It is advantageous to generate a 15R probability variation jackpot result with the held information. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, when the hold notice about the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is performed at a predetermined frequency, the launch handle 8A is set so that an advantageous result is obtained for the player. It becomes possible to change the operation mode. However, the ease of occurrence of winning in the lower operating port 34 in the high-frequency support mode can be changed depending on the adjustment of the nail 38 in the game area, and as a result, the operation mode of the launch handle 8A for each game hole Since the effect of changing is different, it is not preferable.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned problem 1 and problem 2 are prevented by preventing the hold notice from being executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. While suppressing the occurrence, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the hold notice.

  As shown in FIG. 77, even in the high frequency support mode, the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb. As a result, the hold notice can be executed even in the high frequency support mode, and the improvement of the degree of attention of the game through the hold notice is suppressed while suppressing the occurrence of the above problems 1 and 2. This can be achieved even during the mode.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the hold notice is not executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section. In the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the chance that the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit while suppressing the occurrence of the problem 1 and the problem 2.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the open / close execution mode, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. Thus, for example, when the mode is changed to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode can be performed without executing the erasure processing of the first notice condition satisfaction flag stored in the work RAM 254 at that time. In FIG. 6, the hold notice for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section can be prevented from being executed during the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit can be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. Thus, for example, when the mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 at that time, the second result display unit It is possible to make a hold notice for hold information stored in the hold area Rb immediately after the start of the high frequency support mode.

  When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, if the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254, it is deleted. As a result, in the low frequency support mode, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 in that state becomes the object of the lottery determination, and the 15R probability change big hit When a result or a normal jackpot result occurs, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased and stored in the first result display area holding area Ra in the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to prevent the hold notice from being executed for the hold information.

  If the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section corresponds to winning information different from the common winning information, a hold notice indicating that the held information corresponds to the winning information (I.e., the hold notice using the probability change confirmed character or the normal confirmed character) is not executed, and the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra corresponds to the common winning information Is not subject to the above restrictions. Thereby, for example, in the situation where the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result as the hold notice. Even if a normal jackpot result is generated by the hold information acquired by winning the lower operating port 34 after notifying the content of the effect, the hold information related to the hold notice corresponds to the common winning information, In addition, when the hold information related to the hold notice is subject to a lottery determination, a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated. Therefore, when a hold notice is made for hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section, the occurrence of inconvenience that the content of the hold notice contradicts the subsequent game result is suppressed.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is prioritized in the lottery determination, the hold information about the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is given after the hold notice. When a winning at the operating port 34 occurs, the holding information acquired based on the winning at the lower operating port 34 before the holding information related to the holding notice becomes the target of the lottery. In this case, it is likely that the success / failure lottery mode is switched after the reservation advance notice is performed and before the hold information related to the reservation advance notice becomes the target of the success / failure lottery. On the other hand, as described above, the holding information corresponds to the winning information only when the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the common winning information. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience that the content of the hold notice contradicts with the subsequent game result is suppressed.

  The multiple types of winning information that wins a big win in the high probability mode includes all of the multiple types of winning information that wins a big win in the low probability mode, and all the winning information related to the low probability mode is the common winning information It corresponds to. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chance that the hold notice is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit while achieving the above effect.

  Regarding the hold information stored in the second result display hold area Rb, even if the hold information corresponds to winning information different from the common winning information, the hold information corresponds to the winning information. The holding notice (that is, the holding notice using the probability change fixed character or the normal fixed character) indicating that the character is present can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chance that the reservation notice is executed while achieving the above effect.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is prioritized in the lottery determination, the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is newly given after the holding notice is made. The hold information acquired in the above is not subject to the lottery prior to the hold information related to the hold notice. Accordingly, it is unlikely that the success / failure lottery mode is switched after the suspension advance notice is performed and before the hold information related to the advance notice becomes the target of the success / failure lottery. Under such circumstances, even if the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section corresponds to winning information different from the common winning information as described above, the hold information is won. By making it possible to execute the hold notice indicating that the information corresponds to the information, it is possible to suitably increase the chance that the hold notice is executed.

  In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the winning information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, even if the hold information is newly acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 34, the hold information is notified about the hold information. Is not set to do. Assuming a configuration that can be set so that a new hold notice is made even in such a situation, for example, the hold information stored in the second result display hold area Rb as the hold notice in the high probability mode is the winning information. After informing the content of the fact that it corresponds, it switches to the low probability mode based on the game result of the hold information subject to the lottery prior to the hold information, and the hold information related to the hold notice is the win information There is a risk that it will not support. On the other hand, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the winning information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, even if the hold information is newly acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, Since the hold information is not set so as to make a hold notice, the above situation can be prevented from occurring.

  In a configuration in which the hold command transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 includes information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the main control device 81 and the sound The signal line that electrically connects the lamp control device 82 (specifically, a connector unit in which a common connector is provided at both ends of the plurality of signal lines) is illegally removed, and the current jackpot random number in the main control device 81 It is assumed that an illegal act of acquiring the value of the counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. In addition to such illegal acts, an illegal board is connected to the signal line that electrically connects the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82, and the current jackpot random number counter C1 of the main control device 81 is connected. It is assumed that an illegal act of acquiring the value or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. As described above, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired, it is erroneously assumed that an illegal act or a start prize that causes an illegal start winning at the timing that results in the jackpot winning or the 15R probability variation jackpot result has occurred. There is a concern that fraudulent acts to be detected will cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. On the other hand, instead of transmitting the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as they are, it is configured to transmit the information of the result specified in the main control device 81, so that the occurrence of the fraud Can be prevented.

  In this case, the main controller 81 determines whether or not the hold information corresponds to the common winning information. For example, in the configuration in which the determination is performed by the display control device 212, it is necessary to previously store the common winning information in the display control device 212 that does not have a function for performing the lottery determination. On the other hand, it is necessary to store in advance the common winning information in the display control device 212 by determining whether or not the hold information corresponds to the common winning information in the main control device 81 as described above. Does not occur. Therefore, in the configuration in which the hold notice is performed in cooperation with the main control device 81 and the display control device 212, the amount of information stored in advance in the display control device 212 can be reduced.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) In the first embodiment, the “first rank (when the jackpot hold information is a probability change support command)” and the “second rank (when the jackpot hold information is a normal support command)” If the “probability determined to produce” is made equal and the hold information of “first rank” and the hold information of “second rank” are stored as acquired information, the hold information of “first rank” The selection means selects the hold information acquired earlier from the hold information of “second rank”. However, based on the aforementioned FIG. 58 (b), in the case of performing the lottery for the establishment of the notice condition for jackpot, the winning probability in the case of performing the lottery for establishing the notice condition based on the “first rank” hold information was performed. This is higher than the winning probability in the case where the notice condition establishment lottery is performed based on the hold information of “second rank”, and the possibility that the second notice effect will be executed is increased.

(2) In the first embodiment, an example in which a lottery of whether or not to execute a notice effect is performed when the hold information is valid information is illustrated. However, the criterion for determining whether or not the hold information is valid information is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, it is effective depending on whether the hold information is acquired based on a winning to the upper operating port 33 or acquired based on a winning to the lower operating port 34. The criteria for determining whether or not the information is different are different, but even if the information is acquired based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the criteria may not be different. In other words, whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, the notice effect is executed under the same conditions. Whether to permit or not may be determined (see Modification 4 and Third Embodiment described later).

(3) In the first embodiment, in the second notice effect execution determination process, whether or not jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information is searched in the order of storage, and if it is found, whether or not the jackpot hold information exists Complete the search at that time. Then, for the jackpot holding information that has been discovered, a lottery for the preliminary announcement condition establishment lottery (the establishment lottery similar to the jackpot correspondence setting process) is performed. An example of performing a lottery for reaching a notice condition for reaching or non-reach for the acquired information acquired before the jackpot holding information (the acquired information) (same lottery similar to the jackpot correspondence setting process) in the order of storage However, Modification 4 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 can also be exemplified as the second notice effect execution determination process.

  Here, FIG. 78 (a) shows the relationship between the contents of the hold information and its rank. Similarly to the first embodiment, in the modified example 4, the rank indicates the order of the advantage for the player, and the higher the on-hold information (the smaller the on-hold information is, the higher the on-hold information), The advantage is high (the game result is highly likely to be a jackpot result), and the probability that the notice effect will be decided (that is, the notice condition establishment lottery) will be won. However, in the modified example 4, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is “first rank”, the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is “second rank”, and the hold information that displays the result of losing through the super reach is “third rank”. ”, The hold information for displaying the result of losing through normal reach is“ fourth rank ”, and the hold information for displaying the result of losing without going through reach is“ fifth rank ”. “First rank”, “second rank”, and “third rank” are “specific ranks”, and “fourth rank” and “fifth rank” are “non-specific ranks”.

  In Modification 4, in the second notice effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 79, whether or not “holding information of a specific rank” exists in the acquired information is searched in the order of storage, and if it is found, “specification” The search for the presence / absence of “holding information of rank” is completed at that time. For the discovered “specific rank hold information”, a lottery for establishing a notice condition (if the hold information for a specific rank is jackpot hold information, the lottery for establishing a notice condition for jackpot, the hold information for a specific rank is super reach hold information If it is, a preliminary reach notice condition lottery for super reach is performed, and if it is a win, the second notice effect execution determination process is completed through the processes of S3908a and S3909a. Also, in the case of a loss, if there is already acquired information acquired before the hold information of the specific rank, the acquired information acquired before the hold information of the specific rank (hold information of the non-specific rank) In the order of storage, a lottery for the advance notice condition is established (if the hold information for the non-specific rank is the normal reach hold information, the lottery for the prevailing condition for the normal reach, and the non-reach advance notice if the hold information for the non-specific rank is the non-reach hold information) (Condition fulfillment lottery).

  Also in the second notice effect execution determination process of Modification 4, the contents of the processes in steps S3901 to S3904 are the same as those in the first embodiment. However, the first search flag of the modified example 4 is used to specify in the MPU 252 that there is a situation in which it is searched whether or not “holding information of a specific rank (specific rank information)” exists in the acquired information. Information. Then, it is deleted when the reserved information of the specific rank is found in the acquired information or when it is confirmed that the reserved information of the specific rank does not exist in the acquired information. In addition, as described later, the second search flag is information for identifying in the MPU 252 that it is a situation in which the notice condition establishment lottery is performed in the storage order of “non-specific rank hold information (non-specific information)”. It is. This second search flag is “when the notice condition fulfillment lottery result for specific hold information is a loss but there is already acquired information stored prior to the hold information of the specific rank” and “acquired information Is stored in the second search flag storage area when it is confirmed that no hold information of a specific rank exists in the list. Further, it is erased when the result of the lottery for establishment of the notice condition based on the non-specific information is a win or the lottery for establishment of the notice condition based on all the non-specific hold information is a loss.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903 or if the process of step S3904 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3905a. In the process of step S3905a, a process is performed to search whether there is pending information of a specific rank in the acquired information. This step S3905a is performed based on the count value of the first search counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the acquired information that is acquired first among the acquired information (however, when the number of acquired information is one, the acquired information) is pending information of a specific rank. In the modified example 4 as well, a search (first search) as to whether or not the hold information of the specific rank exists in the acquired information is searched based on the count value of the first search counter, and the hold information of the specific rank If found, the process proceeds to step S3906a.

  In step S3906a, a lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3907a. Here, the notice condition establishment lottery of step S3906a is the same processing as S3201 of FIG. 56A when the hold information of a specific rank is jackpot hold information, and the hold information of a specific rank is super reach hold information. If there is, the process is the same as S3301 in FIG. If it is determined in step S3907a that the lottery for establishing a notice condition is a win, a win-winning process is executed in step S3908a. Here, the establishment winning process of step S3908a is the same process as FIG. 59 when the hold information of the specific rank is the jackpot hold information, and the hold information of the specific rank is the reach hold information for specifying the super reach. Is the reach winning process for reach in FIG. Note that also in the fourth modification, the valid information determination process may be performed prior to the establishment lottery process in step S3906a. In this case, when the hold information of a specific rank is jackpot hold information, the effective jackpot hold information determination process shown in FIG. 71 (a) is performed. When the specific rank information is super reach hold information, FIG. 71 (b) The effective information determination process shown may be performed. Note that in the fourth modification, the processing from step S3106 to S3109 and the processing from step S3104 to S3105 are excluded from the pending command handling processing of FIG. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3110. If a negative determination is made in step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3116. However, as in the first embodiment, the process from step S3106 to S3109 Processing from S3104 to S3105 may be performed.

  When the notice condition winning process of step S3908a is executed, the process proceeds to step S3909a, the second notice effect execution determination flag and the process of deleting the first search flag are performed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process ends. However, if the hold information of a specific rank is jackpot hold information, and the same processing as S3216 of FIG. 59 is performed as the processing of step S3908a, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition (target) When the number of acquired information) is set in the first pending notice counter and the same processing as S3218 in FIG. 59 is performed as the processing in step S3908a, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition ( The number of target acquired information) is set in the second pending notice counter. Further, when the hold information of the specific rank is the reach hold information for specifying the super reach, and the same processing as S3319 of FIG. 60 is performed as the processing of step S3908a, the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition Is acquired in the first pending notice counter, and when the same process as S3321 in FIG. 60 is performed as the process of step S3908a, the acquired information acquired in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition is acquired. A number indicating the rank (number of target acquired information) is set in the second pending notice counter. Specifically, if the acquired information that has been won in the lottery for establishment of the advance notice condition is the acquired information that has been acquired second, “2” is set in the first hold advance notice counter (second hold advance notice counter). In other words, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “3”, if the previously acquired information acquired in the second (in the order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition, the first reserved notice counter (second reserved notice) "2" is set in the counter).

  If it is determined in step S3907a that the lottery for establishing the notice condition is a loss, the process proceeds to step S3910a. In the process of step S3910a, it is determined whether or not the number of existing information is “1”. If the number of existing information is “1”, the process proceeds to step S3909a, the second notice effect execution determination flag, After performing the process of deleting the first search flag, the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3910a that the number of pieces of acquired information is greater than one (when a negative determination is made in step S3910a), the process proceeds to step S3911a, and “Ci ≧ 2”. It is determined whether or not there is. That is, whether or not the acquisition rank of the acquisition information of the specific rank that was lost in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition is the second or later (acquired before the jackpot holding information that is the target of the processing of S3906a this time) Whether or not there is acquired information). If the determination in step S3911a is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3912a. In this step S3912a, the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, the process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area, and the upper limit value of the second search counter (Di) ( Dmax) is set as “Ci−1”, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily ended. In this case, the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di) is set with the number of pieces of acquired information acquired before the specific hold information that is the target of the processing of S3906a this time. For example, if the acquired information 3 is the specific pending information that is the target of the processing of S3906a this time, the acquired information 1 to 3 is set as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di). Then, after finishing the process of step S3912a, once ending the second notice effect execution determination process, and starting the second notice effect execution determination process again, the affirmative determinations of steps S3901 and S3902 are made, and FIG. The process proceeds to S3916a of a). If a negative determination is made in step S3911a (when the jackpot hold information of acquisition information 1 is invalid), the process proceeds to step S3909e, and the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

  If the determination in step S3905a is negative, the process proceeds to step S3913a to determine whether the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax). That is, if the specific pending information cannot be found by repeating the process of step S3905a for the number of pieces of acquired information, it is determined in step S3913a whether the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value. More specifically, when the number of acquired information is “3”, the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1), the acquired information 2 (Ci = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) are stored in the order of storage. If the pending information of a specific rank cannot be found even after performing the process of step S3905, the determination is affirmative in step S3913a, and the process of step S3905 is not yet performed for the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3). Is negatively determined in step S3913a. If the number of acquired information is “1” and the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) is determined to be negative in the process of step S3905a, the determination is positive in step S3913a.

  If it is determined in step S3913a that it is not the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3914a, the count value of the first search counter (Ci) is incremented by 1, and the second notice effect execution determination process is once ended. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3905a through an affirmative determination in step S3901, a negative determination in step S3902, and an affirmative determination in step S3903. In this case, the acquired information that has been acquired following the previously acquired information (acquired information that is the target of determination as to whether or not the information is specific pending information) that is the target of the process of S3905a is the target of the process of S3905a.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913a that the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3915a, and the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, After performing the process of storing the two search flags in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect execution determination The process ends. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3916a in FIG. 80A through an affirmative determination in step S3901 and an affirmative determination in step S3902.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3913a, the process proceeds to step S3914a, and the count value of the first search counter (Ci) is incremented by one. Thereafter, the second notice effect execution determination process is once ended. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3904 through an affirmative determination in step S3901, a negative determination in step S3902, and an affirmative determination in step S3903.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913a that the count value of the first search counter has reached the upper limit (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3915a, and the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area; After performing the process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second advance notice is temporarily performed. The effect execution determination process ends. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3916a in FIG. 80A through an affirmative determination in step S3901 and an affirmative determination in step S3902.

  In the processing after step S3916a in FIG. 80 (a), a lottery for establishing a precondition is performed in the storage order of the acquired information for reach holding information or non-reach holding information that specifies normal reach as the acquired information (non-specific holding information). . Specifically, in step S3916a, a lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed for the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter. Here, the second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and when the second search flag is stored, measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the second search flag. It is. In the second search counter, an upper limit value is set in step S3912a or step S3915a, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. When the information stored in the second search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the second search flag is deleted.

  As described above, the process of step S3916a is performed based on the count value of the second search counter. The notice condition satisfaction lottery in step S3916a is the same process as the process in S3301 in FIG. 56B or the process in S3401 in FIG. For this reason, the lottery that establishes the notice condition in step S3916a depends on whether the acquired information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is “reach hold information specifying normal reach” or “non-reach hold information”. Probability of winning is different.

  When the notice condition satisfaction lottery of step S3916a is performed, the process proceeds to step S3917a, and it is determined whether or not the result of the notice condition satisfaction lottery is winning. If it is determined that the winning is achieved, the winning winning process is executed in step S3918a. Specifically, when the acquisition information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is “reach hold information for specifying normal reach”, the “reaching success winning process” similar to FIG. 60 described above. When the acquired information is “non-reach hold information”, the “non-reach successful winning process” similar to FIG. 61 is executed. However, in any case, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery is set in the first hold notice counter or the second hold notice counter. That is, the non-specific rank hold information is the reach hold information for specifying the normal reach, and when the same processing as S3319 in FIG. 60 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition (target) When the number of acquired information) is set in the first pending notice counter and the same processing as S3321 in FIG. 60 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (number of target acquired information) Is set in the second pending notice counter. In addition, when the non-specific rank hold information is non-reach hold information, and the same processing as S3414 in FIG. 61 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition (the number of target acquired information) ) Is set in the first pending notice counter and when the same processing as S3416 in FIG. 61 is performed, the number indicating the acquisition order of the obtained information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target obtained information) is 2 Set to the hold notice counter. Specifically, when the number of pieces of acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery is “2”, “2” is set to the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). For example, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “3”, if the previously acquired information acquired in the second order (acquisition order) is won in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition, the first reserved notice counter (second reserved notice) "2" is set in the counter).

  When the notice condition establishment process is executed in step S3918a, the process proceeds to step S3921a, and after the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted, the notice effect execution determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3917a that the result of the lottery for establishing the notice condition is a loss, the process proceeds to step S3919a. In this step S3919a, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Here, if the process of step S3919a is not successful in the lottery for establishing the notice condition even if the process of step S3916a is repeated by the upper limit number (Dmax) set in the process of step S3912a or step S3915a, etc. This is a process for ending the second notice effect execution determination process. Specifically, when the number of acquired information is “3”, the acquired information 1 (Di = 1), the acquired information 2 (Di = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) are stepped in the storage order. If an affirmative determination is not made in the process of step S3917a even after the process of S3916a and subsequent steps, it is determined in the process of step S3919a that the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Further, when the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) has not been subjected to the processing after step S3919a, the determination is negative in step S3919a.

  If the upper limit value (Dmax) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S3920a, the count value of the second search counter (Di) is incremented by 1, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily terminated. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to the processes after step S3916a through the affirmative determination in step S3901 and the affirmative determination in step S3902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3919a that the count value of the second search counter has reached the upper limit value (Dmax), the process proceeds to step S3921a, and the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted. Thereafter, the notice effect execution determination process ends. Note that the processing after S3916a may be performed separately for reach hold information for specifying normal reach and non-reach hold information. In other words, until the count value of the second search counter reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), the lottery for establishment of the notice condition for the reach hold information for specifying the normal reach is performed, and if all are lost, the count value of the second search counter Until the value reaches the upper limit (Dmax), a lottery for establishing a notice condition for the non-reach hold information may be performed.

  In Example 1 of FIG. 78 (b) showing a specific example of Modification 4, fifth-order hold information (non-specific rank hold information) is stored as acquired information 1 to acquired information 3, and second information is acquired as acquired information 4. The case where rank hold information (hold information of a specific tank) is stored is illustrated. In this case, a lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed on the second rank hold information (hold information of a specific rank). In this case, since the pre-read zone winning is performed by lottery for establishing the notice condition based on the jackpot holding information, the execution probability of the notice effect (second notice effect) can be increased, and the notice effect (second notice effect) can be easily performed.

  In example 2 of FIG. 78 (b) showing a specific example of modification 4, the fifth rank of hold information (non-specific hold information) is stored as acquired information 1 to already acquired information 3, and the first rank as acquired information 4 The case where the hold information (specific hold information) is stored is illustrated. In this case, the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery based on the second rank holding information (specific holding information) is higher than the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery based on the second rank holding information (specific holding information). May be. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to win by the look-ahead zone with high ranking, so the range of games is expanded. Also, the effect of the notice effect based on the first rank hold information (specific hold information) is made to appear more flashy than the effect of the notice effect based on the second rank hold information (specific hold information) (for example, rarer) It is also possible to cause a notice character to appear). In that case, since it can be made easy to win by a special look-ahead zone with higher ranking than the first rank hold information (specific hold information) of Example 1, the range of games is widened.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 78 (b) showing a specific example of Modification 4, fifth-order hold information (non-specific rank hold information) is stored as acquired information 1 and acquired information 2, and second information is acquired as acquired information 3. The rank hold information (hold information of a specific rank) is stored, and the hold information of the first rank (hold information of a specific rank) is stored as the acquired information 4. Here, in the modification 4, it is examined (checked) whether or not the information is the reserved information of a specific rank from the previously acquired information. If the notice condition establishment lottery for the acquired information 3 is a loss, the notice condition establishment lottery is performed in the order of the acquired information (acquired information 1, acquired information 2) before the acquired information 3. In this case, the acquired information 4 is the second-ranked hold information (specific hold information), which is higher-ranked acquisition hold information than the acquired information 3, but the previously acquired income hold information 3 is subject to hold ( Therefore, the lottery for establishment of the notice condition is not performed for the acquired information 4.

  In the modified example 4, since the search for the hold information of the specific rank is easily performed, the second notice effect execution determination can be performed efficiently. In addition, the game times based on the hold information that is the target of the second notice effect are likely to cause a case where a jackpot result is displayed via a super reach effect and a case where a miss result is displayed via a super reach effect. Interest can be further enhanced.

(4) In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the modification 4, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), a plurality of types of super reach are provided, and a lottery for establishing a notice condition is selected according to the type of super reach. Probability may be different. For example, super reach A (reach hold information) for a first predetermined time longer than the case where the fluctuation time is accompanied by normal reach and super reach B (reach hold information) for a first predetermined time whose change time is longer than the first predetermined time. If the super reach B is selected, the probability that the notice condition establishment lottery is won may be made higher than when the super reach A is selected. In this case, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is “first rank”, the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is “second rank”, the hold information for displaying the result of dismissal via the super reach B is “third rank”, the super The hold information that displays the outage result through reach A is “fourth rank”, the hold information that displays the outage result through normal reach is “fifth rank”, and the hold information that displays the outage result without passing through reach is “the fourth rank”. It is good also as "6 ranks". Then, “specific rank” and “non-specific rank” can be appropriately classified. For example, “first rank” to “fourth rank” are set as “hold information of specific rank”, and “fifth rank” ”And“ sixth rank ”are“ non-specific rank hold information ”, and FIG. 79 and FIG. 80A may be applied. Alternatively, “first rank” to “third rank” are set as “hold information of specific rank”, “fourth rank” to “sixth rank” are set as “hold information of non-specific rank”, and FIG. FIG. 80A may be applied. In other words, even in the case of super reach, the “specific rank hold information” and the “non-specific rank hold information” may be classified according to the length of the variation time of the game times that accompany execution.

(5) In the first embodiment, the existence of the acquired information is confirmed when starting the game times that are the targets of the notice effect, and the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored when the game times are displayed as a result of losing. The embodiment to illustrate was illustrated. However, as shown in Modification 5 of FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the presence / absence of the acquired information is determined when the game round that is the target of the notice effect is over (when a negative determination is made in S3810a or S3860a). It is good also as confirming. In addition, while the game times that are the subject of the notice effect are in progress (variable display), the existence of the acquired information is confirmed, or the game times that are the subject of the notice effect are finished (for example, one second before). In addition, the presence or absence of acquired information may be confirmed. In these cases, the time for confirming the existence of the acquired information is delayed (because the game time related to the hold notice starts), so there is a possibility that the number of acquired information can be increased (in the information acquisition means) May be memorized up to the upper limit). Therefore, it is possible to obtain high-ranked acquired information or increase the chances for lottery for establishing a notice condition.

(6) In 1st Embodiment and the modifications 3-5, with the display result and target game times in the variable display (target game times) performed based on the hold information which is the target of the notice effect as described above. An example in which the content of the effect to be executed is notified in advance during the execution of a game time started before the target game time (hereinafter, “pre-game time”) is illustrated. In other words, the example in which the notice effect is not performed with the target game time (the change) but is performed with the pre-game time is illustrated, but the notice effect may be performed with the pre-game time and the target game time (the change). It may be performed only with the target game times (the change). For example, a character that suggests the occurrence of a 15R probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot appears in the middle of the previous game round, and a jackpot is generated at the start of the target game round (the fluctuation) or during the execution of the target game round (the fluctuation). A suggesting character may appear, or a movable object attached to the surface of the game board 24 may be operated.

(7) In the first embodiment, the second notice effect can be executed when the display result of the game times targeted by the notice effect constituting the first suggestion effect is off (including 2R probability variation jackpot). Even if the display result in the game times is “15R probability variation big hit or normal big hit”, the second notice effect may be executable. For example, after the game times with the first suggestion effect are ended, the game times that are targets of the first suggestion effect are started, and the display result of the target game times becomes “15R probability variation big hit or normal jackpot”, Assume that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, it is assumed that a plurality of pieces of acquired information are stored in the acquisition suspension information storage unit when the target game round is started. In this case, it is assumed that the second notice effect can be executed on the acquired information other than the acquired information acquired first (for example, the probability variation big hit guess character). This may increase the number of consecutive chunks that can be executed by the player. (It is highly possible that the opening / closing execution mode can be repeatedly executed), and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(8) Further, in the first embodiment, when there is a difference in the winning probability of the notice condition establishment process between the hold information indicating the occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot and the hold information indicating the occurrence of the normal jackpot, the 15R probability change The hold information indicating the occurrence of the jackpot may be set higher than the hold information indicating the occurrence of the normal jackpot. In other words, the execution probability (decision probability) of the notice effect or the second notice effect may be increased for the hold information indicating the occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot that gives a greater profit to the player.

(9) In the first embodiment, if there is already acquired information when the display result of the game times targeted by the notice effect is out (including 2R probability variation jackpot), what is the second notice effect execution determination process? The embodiment performed even once is illustrated. For this reason, in the case where the acquired information exists when the display result of the game times targeted by the second notice effect is out (including the 2R probability variation jackpot), the second notice effect execution determination process is performed again. . That is, when the notice effect is ended, if the determination in step S3811 (S3861) in FIG. 67 (FIG. 68) is affirmative, the second notice effect may be executed again. However, the number of executions of the second notice effect may be limited. For example, when the display result of the game times targeted by the notice effect is out (including the 2R probability variation jackpot), the second notice effect execution determination process may be performed only once or only twice. It is good as well. For example, when it is performed only once, if the first second notice effect execution determination process is performed after the normal notice (first suggestion effect), it is prohibited to perform the second notice effect execution determination process again. Set the flag to be used. Then, the flag may be deleted when performing a normal notice (first suggestion effect) again.

(10) In the first embodiment, whether or not the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as the former) can be executed is determined based on the winning probability of the lottery for establishing the notice condition and the second notice effect (hereinafter referred to as the latter) that is executed after the notice effect ends. No difference is made between the winning probability of the notice condition establishment lottery as to whether or not execution is possible, but a difference may be provided between the two. For example, the latter winning probability may be set higher than the former winning probability. In particular, when jackpot holding information is included in the acquired information, the winning probability can be set to a particularly high probability (for example, any of 70 to 100%). In this case, if the game times that are the subject of the notice effect (the former) are those that are out of play through the super reach effect (game times that the player is very disappointing), this is indicated as the second notice. It can be relieved by the production (the latter), and the gaming interest can be enhanced at once. In other words, although the warning effect (the former) has increased to near the limit, the expectation that has fallen at a stretch in the display of the result of losing can be increased at a stroke by the start of the second warning effect (the latter), effectively improving the game entertainment be able to.

(11) In the first embodiment, even if the lottery for establishing the notice condition is won, if the winning lottery process (FIG. 64, FIG. 65) is not won (occurrence winning), the notice effect and the second notice effect are not executed. Was illustrated. However, the generation lottery process may be omitted, and if the lottery for establishing the notice condition is won, the notice effect or the second notice effect may be executed. Further, the generation lottery process may be omitted in one of the notice effect and the second notice effect.

(12) In the first embodiment, when the first notice effect is finished and the target hold stored in the first area of the result display portion hold area (Ra, Rb) moves (shifts) to the execution area RE. In addition, an example in which the second notice effect is performed based on the hold information (that is, the acquired information) stored in the result display unit hold areas (Ra, Rb) is illustrated. In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in S3003 of FIG. 54, when the opening command is received, the stored first notice condition establishment flag is deleted, so In the situation where the hold information is set to perform the hold advance notice, the state is canceled upon the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and in the situation where the hold information related to the winning information to the lower operating port 34 is set to be held. The second notice condition satisfaction flag is not erased. In this case, even in the situation where the hold information regarding the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is set to be held, the second notice condition establishment flag is erased and stored based on the winning in the lower operating port 34. Also, the hold notice for the hold information may not be executed across the open / close execution mode (hereinafter referred to as modified example 6). Alternatively, when the opening command is received, the stored first notice condition establishment flag and second notice condition establishment flag are not erased, and a reservation notice is given for the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33. In the situation set as described above, it may be executed across the open / close execution mode (hereinafter referred to as Modification 7).

(13) In the first embodiment, when the first notice effect is finished and the target hold stored in the first area of the result display portion hold area (Ra, Rb) moves (shifts) to the execution area RE. In addition, an example in which the second notice effect is performed based on the hold information (that is, the acquired information) stored in the result display unit hold areas (Ra, Rb) is illustrated. However, as shown in the modified example 8 of FIG. 82A, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the hold information (hereinafter, “stored hold information” stored in the result display portion hold areas (Ra, Rb) is displayed. ”)), A notice effect (hereinafter referred to as“ third notice effect ”) may be executable based on the“ stored hold information ”. Here, FIG. 82A shows the “third notice effect execution determination flag setting process”. When the “third notice effect execution determination flag setting process” is activated, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs steps. In 3881, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. If it is determined that the ending command has been received, it is determined in step 3882 whether or not “stored pending information” exists.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step 3882, the process proceeds to step 3883, and the third notice effect execution determination flag storage area (third notice effect execution determination information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 322 of the work RAM 254 is third. The notice effect execution determination flag (third notice determination execution information) is stored, and the “third notice effect execution determination flag setting process” is completed. Then, when the third notice effect execution determination flag is stored, a third notice effect execution determination process (not shown) is executed. In the third notice effect execution determination process, the notice lottery may be performed by giving priority to “stored hold information” having a high probability of winning the notice lottery such as jackpot information. In this case, whether the lottery is performed or not is not questioned when the notice lottery is won.

  Note that if a negative determination is made in step 3881 or step 3882, the third advance notice execution determination flag setting process is completed without storing the third advance notice execution determination flag in the third advance notice effect execution determination flag storage area. In this case, the third notice effect is not executed. Further, the “stored hold information” may be limited to the hold information stored in the result display area (Ra, Rb) before the game state shifts to the open / close mode, or before the shift to the open / close mode. Also, the hold information stored during the transition to the open / close mode may be used.

  In the modified example 8, the second notice effect execution determination flag is replaced with the third notice effect execution determination flag, the “acquired information” is replaced with “stored hold information”, and the second notice effect execution determination (FIG. 69, FIG. 69). 70, 79, 80, 89, 110, and 111 can be applied, and the “target number of acquired information” is replaced with “the number of stored pending information”, and the winning game winning winning process (FIG. 59, FIG. 59) is applied. 105), reach reach winning process (FIGS. 60, 106), and non-reach successful win process (FIGS. 61, 107) can be applied, where “the number of stored pending information” is the lottery for establishing the notice condition Is a number indicating the order of occurrence of the stored hold information that has been won. In these establishment and win processes, the “number of stored hold information” is set in the first hold notice counter or the second hold notice counter.

(14) As described above, in the first embodiment, the already-acquired information whose generation order is later than the already-acquired information in which the notice condition satisfaction lottery is won, that is, the modified example 9 shown in FIGS. As described above, when there is already-acquired information stored in the result display area holding area (Ra, Rb) after the already-acquired information (target acquired information) for which the notice condition establishment lottery is won, 2 You may review the notice effect. That is, when there is already-acquired information stored after the target already-acquired information, for example, the already-acquired information stored after that may be used as the new object already-acquired information, and the performance period of the second notice effect may be reviewed. . Specifically, as shown in the specific example of FIG. 82 (b), the acquired information b stored in the second area at the time of digestion of the target holding information (the holding information won in the first notice effect lottery) is the target acquired. It is information (acquired information won in the second notice effect lottery), but the acquired information c is also stored in the third area. In this case, when the target holding information (holding information won in the first notice effect lottery) is digested, the acquired information a stored in the first area is digested, and a variable display based on the acquired information a is performed. When executing the notice effect, the target acquired information is replaced with the already obtained information c, the duration of the second notice effect is lengthened (the number of continuous times of the second notice effect is increased), or the contents of the effect are changed. Or more hot production content (that is, a compulsory notification regarding the occurrence of a jackpot result from “200% absolute jackpot result is generated” or the like).

  In particular, as shown in a third embodiment to be described later, in the gaming machine having a large number of acquired information that can be acquired, the change of the target acquired information is effective. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the acquired information g stored in the fourth area at the time of digestion of the target hold information (hold information won in the first notice effect lottery) is the target acquired information (second notice effect). It is assumed that the acquired information h is stored up to the seventh area. In this case, when any of the acquired information d to f stored before the target hold information is digested, a variable display based on the acquired information is performed, and the second notice effect is executed. In addition, the target acquired information is replaced with the acquired information h, and the duration of the second notice effect is lengthened (the number of continuous times of the second notice effect is increased), the contents of the effect are changed, or the contents of the effect are made hotter. May be.

  Next, the characteristics of the first flag erasing process (second flag erasing process) of Modification 9 will be described with reference to FIG. In the first flag erasing process (second flag erasing process) of Modification 9, if a negative determination is made in step S3807 (step S3857), the process proceeds to step S3807a to determine whether or not a review condition is satisfied. Here, as the review condition, in the first flag erasing process (second flag erasing process) executed by digesting the acquired information, for example, “undigested acquired information is stored after the target acquired information. There is a case where there is a thing and the undigested acquired information is a thing that triggers the execution of the higher performance (described later).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3807a, the review flag is stored in the review flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 322 of the work RAM 254, and the first flag erase process (second flag erase process) ends. Note that the negative determination in step S3807a and the positive determination in step S3807 (S3857) are the same as in the first embodiment. And although illustration is omitted, when the review flag is set (stored in the review flag storage area), the review process is started, the process of changing the contents of the effect of the second notice effect, and the unacquired acquired information After performing the process of changing the number of acquired information to a number that takes into account the number of occurrences that have become the target acquired information, the review flag is released (deleted from the review flag storage area), and then the review process Exit.

  Next, the above-described “acquired information that becomes the trigger for executing the higher-order effect” will be described with reference to a specific example of FIG. In other words, the notice effect (first notice effect, second notice effect) executed when the first notice lottery or the second notice lottery is won, the higher the notice effect rank is, the more flashy aspect (for example, the notice effect rank). The higher the is, the more the number of appearing notice characters increases or the appearance of a notice character with a lower appearance frequency). The lower the notice effect rank is, the lower the notice effect rank is (for example, the lower the notice effect rank is, the more appearance appears) The number of notice characters to be reduced or a notice character having a high appearance frequency appears). In this specific example, when the target acquired information (target hold information) is “the target acquired information (target hold information) is a probability change support hold command”, the highest notice performance rank 1 is set, and “target acquired information (target When the “holding information” is a “normally-held hold command”, the next higher notice announcement rank is set to the notice effect rank 2. In the modification 9, when “target acquired information (target hold information) is super reach information”, a plurality of types of super reach (the number of appearance characters and appearance frequencies differ depending on the type of super reach information). One of the super-reach) is executed. When the target acquired information (target hold information) won in the second notice lottery (first notice lottery) is “super reach information”, the second notice announcement rank varies depending on the type of the super reach information. It is assumed that a notice effect (first notice effect) appears.

  Then, for example, when the target acquired information is executing the second notice effect of the notice effect rank 5, the acquired information stored after the target acquired information can execute the second notice effect of the notice effect rank 3. In some cases, the acquired information stored after that may be replaced with new target acquired information. Note that the notice effect rank 3 is higher than the notice effect rank 5.

(15) Further, when setting the second advance notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 described above, it is necessary to set the “number of target acquired information” in the first hold advance notice counter or the second hold advance notice counter. However, the display control device 212 can specify the setting of the “number of target acquired information” by using the number of holds specified by the hold command when each acquired information is received, or by other methods. For example, predetermined storage areas provided in storage means (such as RAM) of the display control device 212, such as the holding areas Ra and Rb of the main control device 81, are divided into four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area. It shall be divided. When the display control device 212 receives the hold command, the hold information specified by the hold command can be stored in the order of the first area to the fourth area. Each of the first area to the fourth area can store individual hold information, and empty areas are stored in order from the lower first area to the upper fourth area. Then, every time the variable display starts, the hold information stored in the first area is deleted in order. If the hold information is stored in the second area or later (higher than the second area), the higher-order hold information is changed as the hold information in the first area is digested (shifted from the first area to the execution area). The area is shifted to the next lower area (for example, the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area). That is, it is assumed that the procedure for storing the hold command in the first area to the fourth area is a first-in first-out method.

  In this case, when the target hold information is deleted from the first area (when the target hold information of the first area is digested), the hold information of the first area to the fourth area is shifted to the first area to the third area. To do. When the display control device 212 receives new hold information (acquired information), if the hold information (acquired information) previously received from the first area to the second area is stored, the newly received hold information is stored. (Acquired information) is stored in the third area. For this reason, “previous target acquired information” and “target acquired information” can be found by searching for any of the areas of the acquired information won in the second notice lottery from the first area to the fourth area. it can. Note that a gaming machine having two types of hold information (first hold information and second hold information) may include a storage area for first hold information and a storage area for second hold information.

  In addition, when the result of the first notice lottery is won and the first notice effect is started, the number of the hold information (hold command) acquired after that is counted, and the acquisition order of the acquired information sequentially obtained is indicated. Information may be added to a hold command (hold information). For example, as shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, the measurement flag is set in steps S3216, S3218, S3319, S3321, S3414, or S3416 of FIGS. That is, when the result of the first notice lottery is won, the measurement flag is set. In the command corresponding process of FIG. 54, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), if it is determined in step S3011 that a pending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3011c, where it is determined whether or not a measurement flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S3011c, the process proceeds to step S3211d. In step S3011d, the count counter CR is incremented. Then, the hold command handling process of step S3012 is executed, and at this time, data specifying the count value of the count counter CR is added to the hold command to be saved. For this reason, it is possible to specify the “number of target acquired information” by specifying the “count value of the count counter CR” when the pending command related to the target acquired information is acquired. In steps S3808 and S3858 in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted, the measurement flag is deleted and the count counter CR is initialized to “0”.

(16) Moreover, as a condition for setting the hold notice, the hold information (previous target acquired information) acquired before the hold information (acquired information) to be the target hold information (target acquired information) is present. Also good. For example, in variable display executed based on previous target hold information (previous target acquired information) stored before target hold information (target acquired information), “variable display based on target hold information (target acquired information)” In an aspect in which the effect of inferring (predicting) the display result is performed but the effect of inferring (predicting) is not performed in the target hold information (target acquired information), the target hold information (target acquired information) is also preceded. It may be a condition that there is the acquired hold information (previous target acquired information). In this case, for example, the following method can be exemplified. That is, in the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) of FIG. 56 (a), (b) or FIG. 57 (a), first, the hold information to be targeted for the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) ( It is determined whether there is pending information (acquired information) acquired before (acquired information). If a positive determination is made, the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) is executed with a general winning probability (a winning probability that the winning probability is not “0”). On the other hand, when a negative determination is made, the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) is performed with a special winning probability with a winning probability of “zero”. That is, when the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) is performed, the target hold information (acquired information) is stored in the corresponding result display area hold area (Ra or Rb). There is a possibility that the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) based on the hold information (acquired information) will be won, but when it is not stored in the corresponding result display area hold area (Ra or Rb) The possibility of winning the first notice lottery (second notice lottery) may be set to “zero”.

(17) In the first embodiment, the execution time of the canceling operation (the time during which the solenoid 77a is excited) is 1.8 seconds (three times the above-described firing cycle). Select from various times such as .6 seconds (previously firing cycle), 1.2 seconds (twice the aforementioned firing cycle), or 0.9 seconds (1.5 times the aforementioned firing cycle). Can do. If the execution time of the canceling operation is set to a sufficient time (for example, if it is set to be three times or more of the above-mentioned firing cycle), the canceling operation (the operation of discharging the return ball, etc.) can be performed reliably. If the execution time is excessively long (for example, if the execution period is set to be six times or more of the above-described launch cycle), the time during which the game does not proceed becomes long, which may give a redundant feeling to the player.

  Here, in an aspect in which the execution time of the canceling operation is selected from a plurality of times (for example, as described above, an aspect in which selection is made from 1, 1.5, 2 or 3 times the firing period), the selection is An execution time of the canceling operation may be set to one time when the pachinko machine 10 is designed or manufactured and the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall. Alternatively, at the stage where the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer, a plurality of candidates for execution time of the resolution operation are determined, and after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall, by operating a predetermined selection means, One time may be selected from a plurality of “solving operation execution times”. This selection means may be one that can be operated by the player, or one that the player cannot operate (selection that can be operated by the manager of the pachinko machine 10 or a pachinko hall clerk and cannot be operated by the player) Means).

  Moreover, it is good also as changing the execution time of cancellation | release operation | movement based on the elapsed period (henceforth an installation period) after the said pachinko machine 10 was installed in the pachinko hall (it lengthens or shortens). . For example, the pachinko machine 10 may include an installation period measuring unit that measures the installation period, and an execution time setting unit that sets the execution time of the canceling operation based on the measurement result of the installation period measuring unit. For example, when the installation period of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be less than “June” by the installation period measuring means, a time that is 1.5 times the firing cycle is set as the execution time of the canceling operation, and the installation period is “6”. If it is determined that the period is from “Month to December”, a time twice as long as the firing period is set as the execution time of the canceling operation. And when it determines with the said installation period exceeding "December," it is good also as setting the time of 3 times the discharge period as execution time of cancellation | release operation | movement. In this case, the longer the installation period (use period) of the pachinko machine 10, the longer the execution time of the canceling operation. That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 becomes old and is likely to generate a return ball, the canceling operation can be performed reliably. In the fourth embodiment to be described later, an example in which the execution time of the canceling operation is changed according to the degree of achievement of the returning ball canceling operation is illustrated.

(Second Embodiment)
Also in the second embodiment, an example of a “pachinko machine” will be described in detail based on the drawings. In the pachinko machine 10, the content of the second notice effect execution determination process is simplified as compared with the second notice effect execution determination process of the first embodiment. 1 to 4 can be used as they are in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment includes an outer frame 11, a gaming machine main body 12, and a game board 24 similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Further, the “configuration of the front door frame 14” and the “configuration of the back side” of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are the “configuration of the front door frame 14” and the “configuration of the back side” of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is the same. And about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  In the second embodiment, “Electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)”, “Display contents of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 17)”, “Various counters (FIG. 18)”, “Attack table (FIG. 19)” ”,“ Destination of game results for jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 20) ”,“ Matters related to reach display (reach state) ”,“ Reserved ball storage area 232 (FIG. 21) ”,“ Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22) To FIG. 25) ”is the same as in the first embodiment.

  However, the contents of the process related to the notice effect executed by the display control device 212 are different as follows. That is, “command handling process”, “hold command handling process”, “reach notice condition establishment process”, “non-reach notice condition establishment process”, “first flag erasure process”, “second flag erasure process” and The content of the “second notice effect execution determination process” is different from the corresponding process of the first embodiment as follows. Hereinafter, these points will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the “command handling process” is different from the first embodiment in that steps S3011a and S3011b are provided between steps S3011 and S3012. That is, in the “command handling process”, if it is determined in step S3011 that the command to be read this time is a pending command, the process proceeds to step S3011a. In this step S3011a, it is determined whether or not the second notice effect preparation flag is stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3011a (when the second notice effect preparation flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S3012 as it is, and after executing the hold command response process, the command response process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3011a (when the second notice effect preparation flag is stored), the second notice effect preparation counter Cp is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S3012 to hold the hold command. After executing the handling process, the command handling process is terminated. Here, the second notice effect preparation flag is holding information for specifying in MPU 252 that “execution of notice effect” has been determined. In this second embodiment, when it is determined to “execute a notice effect”, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment stores the second notice effect preparation flag in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area. The MPU 252 recognizes that the preparation state for the “second notice effect” has been entered.

  Further, the second notice effect preparation counter Cp is a counter used for specifying the number of acquired information that is the target jackpot hold information when performing the second notice effect execution determination process. It is. The second notice effect preparation counter Cp is incremented by 1 each time the MPU 252 receives a hold command when the second notice effect preparation flag is stored.

  Furthermore, in the “hold command handling process” of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the process of step S3102a and the process of step S3102b are provided between the process of step S3102 and the process of step S3103. This is different from the “hold command handling process” of the first embodiment. The process of step S3102b is performed when the display control device 212 receives a probability change response command or a normal response command in a state where the second notification effect preparation flag is stored (hereinafter referred to as a second notification effect preparation state). This is a process for identifying the number of the pending command of the received “pending change command or normal handling command” among the “pending commands received by the MPU 252 after entering the second notice effect preparation state”.

  In other words, in the “pending command handling process” of the second embodiment, when the process of step S3102 is completed, the process proceeds to step S3102a, and the second notice effect preparation flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is second. It is determined whether or not a notice effect preparation flag is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S3102a, the process directly proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3102a, the process proceeds to step S3102b, and after acquiring the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp at that time (when step S3101 is executed) (stored in a predetermined storage area) After), the process proceeds to step S3103. The process of step S3102b is performed when the second notice effect command or normal correspondence command is received in a predetermined storage area provided in the work RAM 252 in a situation where the second notice effect preparation flag is stored. This is a process for storing the value of the preparation counter Cp.

  For example, if the “value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp” acquired in step S3102b is “3”, the probability-change-response hold command or the normal-response hold command received in the process of step S3101 is the acquisition hold information 3 (3 Acquisition hold information acquired in the second). This is because, in this example, “the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp” is “3” in step S3011b of the “command response process” in FIG.

  In the “reaching notice condition establishment winning process” of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87A, after executing step S3319 or step S3321, the process proceeds to step S3322. In step S3322, the second notice effect preparation flag storage area stores the second notice effect preparation flag storage area and the second notice effect preparation counter Cp is set to “0” (initialization). Thereafter, the “reaching notice condition establishment process for reach” is terminated.

  In the “non-reach notice condition establishment winning process” of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87B, after executing step S3414 or step S3416, the process proceeds to step S3417. In step S3417, a process of storing the second notice effect preparation flag in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area and a process of setting the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp to “0” (initialization) are performed. Thereafter, the “reach notice condition establishment process” is terminated.

  Note that, in the “big success establishment winning process (see FIG. 59)” of the second embodiment, after executing step S3216 or step S3218, the “big success announcement condition establishment process” is terminated. That is, when the game times to be notified are displayed with a “big hit result” and ended, the second notification effect is not executed, so that the second notification effect preparation flag storage area has the second notification effect preparation. There is no need to store a flag or perform a process of setting (initializing) the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp to “0”. However, when the second notice effect is executed when the game time to be noticed ends with the “big hit result” being displayed, the second notice effect preparation flag is stored after executing step S3216 or step S3218. The second notice effect preparation preparation flag is stored in the area, or the value of the second notice effect preparation counter Cp is set to “0” (initialization).

  Further, the characteristics of the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), and the characteristics of the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b).

  Also in the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, the contents of steps S3801 to S3809 are the same as those of the first flag erasing process of the first embodiment. However, in the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, the contents of the process after executing step S3809 are different. That is, in the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment, when the process of step S3809 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3810b, and is the second notice effect preparation flag stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area? Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S3810b that it is not stored, the first flag erasing process of the second embodiment is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S3810b (when it is determined that the second notice effect preparation flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S3811b. In step S3811b, it is determined whether or not the value of the second notice effect preparation counter is a positive value. If a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S3811c. Furthermore, if the process which erase | eliminates a 2nd notice effect preparation flag is performed by step S3811c, the 1st flag deletion process of 2nd Embodiment will be complete | finished. That is, when the display control device 212 has not received the hold command after entering the second notice effect preparation state, a negative determination is made in step S3811b, and the first flag of the second embodiment is obtained through the process of step S3811c. The erasing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3811b that the value of the second notice effect preparation counter is a positive value, the process proceeds to step S3812b. In step S3812b, after performing the process of deleting the second notice effect preparation flag and the process of storing the second notice effect execution determination flag in the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area, the second embodiment is performed. The first flag erasing process is terminated.

  Also in the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment, the contents of steps S3851 to S3859 are the same as those of the second flag erasing process of the first embodiment. However, in the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment, the contents of the process after executing step S3859 are different. That is, in the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment, when the process of step S3859 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3860b, and is the second notice effect preparation flag stored in the second notice effect preparation flag storage area? Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S3860b that it is not stored, the second flag erasing process of the second embodiment is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in the process of step S3860b (when it is determined that the second notice effect preparation flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S3861b. In step S3861b, it is determined whether or not the value of the second notice effect preparation counter is a positive value. If the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step S3861c. Furthermore, if the process which erase | eliminates a 2nd notice effect preparation flag is performed by step S3861c, the 2nd flag deletion process of 2nd Embodiment will be complete | finished. That is, if the display control device 212 has not received a hold command after entering the second notice effect preparation state, a negative determination is made in step S3861b, and the first flag of the second embodiment is obtained through the process of step S3861c. The erasing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3861b that the value of the second notice effect preparation counter is a positive value, the process proceeds to step S3862b. In step S3862b, after performing the process of deleting the second notice effect preparation flag and the process of storing the second notice effect execution determination flag in the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area, the second embodiment is performed. The second flag erasing process is terminated.

  Next, the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. When the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is activated, it is determined in step S3901b whether or not the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored in the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area. If it is determined in step S3901b that the second notice effect execution determination flag is not stored, the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3902b, where the secondary search flag is stored in the secondary search flag storage area (two search) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether it is stored in the next hold information storage means). If the determination in step S3902b is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3920 in FIG. 70. If the determination in step S3902b is negative, the process proceeds to step S3903b.

  Here, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot holding information (jackpot holding information) exists in the acquired information, it is determined whether the jackpot holding information is the acquired information that has been acquired. It is specified based on the value (Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86). The MPU 252 specifies that the secondary search flag is in a situation in which a lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed in the order of storage based on valid information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information). Information. This secondary search flag is, when there is no jackpot holding information in the acquired information, is not a jackpot holding information valid for the jackpot holding information, or is lost in the notice condition establishment lottery based on the jackpot holding information, Stored in the secondary search flag storage area. In addition, the result of the lottery for the advance notice condition based on the acquired information (reach hold information or the non-reach hold information) is won, or the result of the lottery for the advance notice condition based on all the acquired information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information) If is lost, it will be erased.

  If the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored and there is no secondary search flag, the process proceeds to step S3903b. In the process of step S3903b, it is determined whether or not the Cp value is specified (the acquisition order of jackpot holding information is specified based on the Cp value). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903b, the process proceeds to step S3904b to determine whether or not the jackpot holding information (acquisition rank specified based on the Cp value, but jackpot holding information) is valid jackpot holding information. . It is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot holding information is valid using the flowchart shown in FIG. And if the process of step S3904b is performed, it will progress to step S3905b. In the second embodiment, the determination regarding validity may be omitted from the information in FIGS. 71 (a) and (b). In this case, the processing up to steps S3106 to S3109 and the processing up to steps S3104 to S3105 may be excluded from the pending command handling processing shown in FIGS. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3110. If a negative determination is made in step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3116. However, as in the first embodiment, the process from step S3106 to S3109 and the step Processing from S3104 to S3105 may be performed.

  If it is determined in step S3905b that a valid jackpot hold information flag is stored (valid jackpot hold information), the process proceeds to step S3906b, after the valid information flag is erased, the process proceeds to step S3908b. In this step S3908b, the lottery for meeting the notice condition for jackpot is the same as the process of S3201 in FIG. If this step S3908b is performed, it will progress to step S3909b. If it is determined in step S3909b that the big hit notice condition fulfillment lottery is a win, then in step S3910b, a big hit success winning process is executed. This jackpot winning winning process is the same process as in FIG. 59 described above. However, in the process of step S3216 executed in the process of step S3910b, the acquired Cp value (the Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86) is set in the first pending notice counter. In the process of step S3218, The acquired Cp value (the Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86) is set in the second pending notice counter. Specifically, when the Cp value of the acquired information (big hit hold information) won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition is “3”, “3” is set in the first hold notice counter (second hold notice counter). . In other words, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “3”, the first reserved advance notice counter is obtained when the pre-existing information acquired in the second order (acquisition order) is won in the lottery for establishment of the advance notice condition. “2” is set in (second pending notice counter).

  When the process of step S3910b is executed, the process proceeds to step S3912b, the process of erasing the second notice effect execution determination flag is executed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3905b that a valid jackpot hold information flag is not stored (not valid jackpot hold information), the process proceeds to step S3907b, the invalid information flag is erased, and the process proceeds to step S3911b. Also, if it is determined in step S3909b that the lottery for achieving the big hit notice condition is a loss, the process proceeds to step S3911b. In the process of step S3911b, it is determined whether or not the number of existing information is “1”. If the number of existing information is “1”, the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911b that the number of existing information is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S3913b to determine whether the “Cp value” is 2 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S3913b, step S3915b is executed, and the second notice effect execution determination process of the second embodiment is once ended. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3913b, the process proceeds to step S3914b, the process of storing the secondary search flag in the secondary search flag storage area, and the upper limit of the second search counter (Di). After executing the process of setting “Cp−1” as the value (Dmax), the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3920 in FIG. 70 through an affirmative determination in S3901b in FIG. 89 and an affirmative determination in S3902b. 70 is the same as that of the first embodiment. If a negative determination is made in step S3913b (when the jackpot hold information of the acquired information 1 is invalid or the second notice lottery is lost), the process proceeds to step S3909e, where the second notice effect execution determination is made. The process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in the process of step S3903b, that is, if it is determined that the Cp value is not specified (no jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information), the process proceeds to step S3915b. After performing the process of storing the secondary search flag in the secondary search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect is executed. The determination process ends. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3920 in FIG. 70 through an affirmative determination in step S3901b and an affirmative determination in step S3902b.

  In the processing after step S3920 in FIG. 70, regarding the acquired information other than the jackpot holding information (reach holding information or non-reach holding information), a determination as to whether or not the information is valid acquired information and a lottery for establishing a notice condition are performed. This is performed in the storage order of the acquired information (reach hold information or non-reach hold information). Specifically, in step S3920, it is determined whether or not the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter is valid acquired information. Here, the second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and when the second search flag is stored, measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the second search flag. It is. In the second search counter, an upper limit value is set in step S3914b or step S3915b of FIG. 89, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 every time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. Is done. When the information stored in the second search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the second search flag is deleted.

  According to the second embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, it is possible to easily determine whether the second notice effect can be executed. And when the pachinko 10 performs the 2nd notice production, it can control that a control burden increases.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 90 (a), the acquired information 1 is the holding information (fourth rank holding information) that displays the result of removal through normal reach, and the acquired information 2 displays the result of removal through the super reach. In the case where the hold information (holding information of the third rank) and the acquired information 3 are holding information (holding information of the first rank) indicating 15R probability variation jackpot, according to the second embodiment, the acquired information is sequentially Even without searching, it is possible to find the hold information for preferentially performing the lottery for establishing the notice condition. In other words, whether or not the second notice effect can be executed can be efficiently determined by preferentially performing the pre-existing information 3 in which the Cp value is specified in the notice condition establishment lottery.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) The aspect of 2nd Embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko machine 10 (the pachinko machine 10 in which eight reservation information is easy to memorize | store) in 3rd Embodiment mentioned later. This point will be described later with reference to Example 3 in FIG.

(2) Further, in the second embodiment, priority is given to the lottery for establishing the notice condition, with the holding information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot (holding information of the first rank) and the holding information indicating the normal jackpot (holding information of the second rank). As the hold information (holding information of a specific rank) to be performed automatically, the Cp value is specified, but the hold information (priority hold information of a specific rank) and the hold information not preferentially performed (non-specification) Classification of rank hold information) may be determined by other criteria. For example, as shown in the example of FIG. 90 (b), the hold information (third rank hold information) for displaying the result of losing via the super reach B is also the hold information (specific rank) that preferentially performs the lottery for establishing the notice condition. Hold information).

(3) In the second embodiment, the Cp value (Cp value acquired in the process of step S3102b in FIG. 86) acquired when the acquired information is jackpot holding information (acquired information with a high rank) is acquired, and the jackpot A lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed for the hold information. And when this notice condition establishment lottery is a loss, the aspect which performs the notice condition establishment lottery in the acquisition order regarding the acquired information acquired before the said jackpot holding information was illustrated.

  However, as in the above-described modified example 4, “Cp value” may be specified for the hold information of “specific rank” for the acquired information. For example, although not shown, the hold information indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot is “first rank”, the hold information indicating the normal jackpot is “second rank”, and the hold information that displays the result of losing via the super reach B is “third rank”. ”, The hold information that displays the result of losing through Super Reach A” is “4th rank”, the hold information that displays the result of losing through normal reach is “5th rank”, the hold information that displays the result of losing without reaching reach May be “sixth rank”. In this case, the “specific rank” and the “non-specific rank” can be appropriately classified. For example, “first rank” to “fourth rank” are “specific rank” and “fifth rank”. In addition, the “sixth rank” may be set as the “non-specific rank”, and FIGS. 79 and 80A may be applied. That is, the lottery for establishing the notice condition may be performed with priority given to the “specific rank” holding information that is first acquired based on the “Cp value”.

(4) Unlike the second embodiment, the Cp value is acquired (acquisition order is specified) even if the acquired information has a lower rank than the jackpot holding information. And even if the result of the notice condition establishment lottery for the jackpot hold information is a loss or the jackpot hold information does not exist in the acquired information, the hold information having a lower rank than the jackpot hold information is more You may select holding information with a high rank, and perform lottery for establishment of notice conditions.

(5) In 1st Embodiment, when the hold information was effective hold information, the aspect which performs the lottery of the execution possibility of a notice effect was illustrated, but the judgment reference | standard of whether hold information is effective hold information Is not limited to that shown in the second embodiment. Further, in the second embodiment, the effective hold is determined depending on whether the hold information is acquired based on a winning to the upper working port 33 or acquired based on a winning to the lower working port 34. The criteria for determining whether or not the information is different are different, but even if the information is acquired based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the criteria may not be different. In other words, whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, the notice effect is executed under the same conditions. You may decide whether it is possible.

(Third embodiment)
Also in the third embodiment, an example of a “pachinko machine” will be described in detail based on the drawings. In the third embodiment, FIGS. 1 to 4 can be used as they are.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an outer frame 11, a gaming machine main body 12, and a game board 24 similar to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Further, the “configuration of the front door frame 14” and the “configuration of the back side” of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are the “configuration of the front door frame 14” and the “configuration of the back side” of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is the same. And about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally. The pachinko machine 10 is different from the game board 24 of the first embodiment in the board surface configuration of the game board 24 in the following points.

  First, the features of the game board 24 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 92, and 93 (a). In the game board 24 of the third embodiment, the first operation winning opening 33a is provided at the position of the upper operation opening 33 of the first embodiment, and the second operation winning opening 33b is provided at the position of the lower operation opening 34 of the first embodiment. I have. Further, the game ball that has won the first operation winning opening 33a enters the collection passage 61 on the back side of the game board 24. And then. In the middle of the collection passage 61, the collection passage 61 is divided into a first branch passage (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “first ball entry portion”) 62 a and a second branch passage (hereinafter referred to as “second ball entry portion”). Branched to 62b.

  In the collection passage 61, a sorting means 63 is provided at a position (hereinafter referred to as a branch position 66) immediately before branching to the first and second ball entering portions 62a and 62b. Accordingly, the destination of the game ball that has entered the collection passage 61 through the first operation winning opening 33a is alternately distributed to the first entry portion (first branch passage) 62a and the second entry portion (second branch passage) 62b. It is done. Further, the second operation winning port 33b is opened upward at substantially the same position as the upper operation port 33 of the first embodiment, and the both operation winning ports 33a are arranged such that the first operation winning port 33a is upward. , 33b are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction.

  A first detection sensor 65a is provided in the middle of the passage of the first incoming ball portion 62a, and a second detection sensor 65b is provided in the middle of the passage of the second incoming ball portion 62b. In addition, in the second ball entry portion 62b, the second action winning opening 33b is communicated at a position closer to the branch position 66 than the position where the second detection sensor 65b is provided. Then, the game balls that have won the first operation winning opening 33a and whose destinations are distributed to the first ball receiving section (first branch passage) 62a by the distribution means 63 are detected by the first detection sensor 65a. In addition, a game ball won in the first action winning opening 33a, and a game ball distributed to the second ball entering portion (second branch passage) 62b by the distribution means 63 and a game won in the second action winning opening 33b. The sphere is detected by the second detection sensor 65b.

  Here, a specific example of the distribution means 63 will be briefly described. The distribution means 63 according to this specific example includes a base member 63a and a distribution member 63b attached to the base member 63a so as to be swingable. Among these members, the base member 63a includes a back plate portion 63c provided on the back side, a back plate portion 63c, and a protruding wall 63d protruding forward, and has an inverted Y-shape (the letter Y of the alphabet is reversed). (Similar shape) is formed. That is, the back plate portion 63c is a bottom portion, and a bowl-shaped passage 64a provided at the top and bottom is formed.

  The saddle-shaped passage 64a has an introduction passage 64b disposed above, a first passage 64c that curves downward from the end of the introduction passage 64b, and a curve that descends right from the end of the introduction passage 64b. A second passage 64d. And the 1st operation winning opening 33a ahead of the upper end side of introduction passage 64b is provided, the 1st entrance part 62a is constituted by the 1st passage 64c, and the 2nd entrance part 62b is constituted by the 2nd passage 64d. .

  The distribution member 63b is configured in a substantially inverted T shape when viewed from the front, and the shaft center position 63e is swingable to a portion (branch position 66) positioned substantially vertically below the introduction passage 64b in the back plate portion 63c. It is installed. The distributing member 63b includes a boundary 63f protruding upward from the axial position 63e, a first bottom 63g protruding leftward from the axial position 63e, and a second bottom 63h protruding rightward from the axial position 63e. With. Further, projections 63i and 63j are provided forward on a portion of the back plate portion 63c located below the left end of the first bottom portion 63g and a portion located below the right end of the second bottom portion 63h.

  The distribution means 63 receives the game ball received in the collection passage 61 through the first winning port 33a at the first bottom portion 63g or the second bottom portion 63f. As shown in FIG. 92, when the boundary portion 63f is in the right-up posture, the first bottom portion 63g in the left-up slope posture is positioned substantially immediately below the introduction passage 64b. At this time, the lower part of the second bottom 63f abuts against the protrusion 63j, and the amount of rotation of the sorting member 63b in the right direction is prevented from further increasing. In addition, the attitude | position of this distribution member 63b is called 1st attitude | position.

  As described above, when the distribution member 63b is in the first posture, the game ball passing through the introduction passage 64b can be received by the first bottom portion 63g. When the first bottom 63g receives the game ball, the first base 63g rotates to the left with the load of the game ball on the basis of the axial center position 63e of the distribution member 63b, as shown in FIG. 93 (a). 63f is an attitude that is inclined upward to the left (hereinafter referred to as “second attitude”). As described above, when the boundary portion 63f is in a posture (second posture) in which the boundary portion 63f is inclined upward to the left, the second bottom portion 63h in the upwardly inclined posture is positioned substantially immediately below the introduction passage 64b. At this time, the lower part of the first bottom 63g abuts against the protrusion 63i, and the amount of rotation of the sorting member 63b in the left direction is prevented from further increasing. And if the boundary part 63f becomes the attitude | position which makes a left-up inclination, the 2nd bottom part 63h can receive a game ball. When the game ball is received, the load is rotated to the right in the front view with respect to the axial center position 63e of the distribution member 63b, and the first posture is obtained.

  As described above, since the distribution member 63b can alternately repeat the first posture and the second posture according to the load of the game ball that has passed through the introduction passage 64b, the destination of the game ball that has passed through the introduction passage 64b is The first incoming ball portion (first branch passage) 62a or the second incoming ball portion (second branch passage) 62b is distributed.

  A weight is embedded in the first bottom portion 63g and the second bottom portion 63h, and the left rotation of the first bottom portion 63g and the right rotation of the second bottom portion 63h can be facilitated. In this case, it is desirable to make the weights of the weights of the first bottom 63g and the second bottom 63h equal. Further, in the back plate portion 63c, magnets (see 63m and the like) may be provided at the rear of the position substantially below the center of the introduction passage 64b and through which the front end side of the boundary portion 63f passes, and the boundary portion 63f. In this case, both magnets may be configured so as to have repulsive polarities, and may be repelled when both magnets face each other. For example, the magnets are composed of rod-shaped magnets whose axial centers are directed back and forth so that the rear end portion of the magnet embedded in the boundary portion 63f and the front end portion of the magnet embedded in the back plate portion 63 face each other in the front-rear direction. To do. If the polarity of the rear end portion of the magnet embedded in the boundary portion 63f is the same as the polarity of the front end portion of the magnet embedded in the back plate portion 63, both repel each other, so the boundary portion 63f is directly above. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from stopping at the facing position and to maintain the position rotated to the left or right. In this case, the protrusions 63i and 63j can be omitted.

  The second operation winning opening 33b has the same configuration as the lower operation opening 34 of the first embodiment. In other words, the second operation winning opening 33b is opened upward. In addition, the second act winning opening 33b is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In addition, this electric accessory 34a also performs a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (support state or guide state) similarly to the electric agent 34a of the first embodiment.

  Further, the game board 24 of the third embodiment also has a general winning opening 31, a variable prize winning device 32, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, and an accessory display unit, similarly to the game board 24 of the first embodiment. 44 etc. are provided respectively. A through gate 35 is provided in each of the left portion (left-handed region L) of the center frame 42 and the right portion (right-handed region R) of the center frame 42. Furthermore, detection sensors (not shown) are provided on the back side of the game board 24 so as to correspond to the general winning port 31 and the variable winning device 32, respectively. However, when the game ball that has won the first prize moving port 33a is guided to the first ball entering portion (branch passage) 62a, it is detected by the first detection sensor 65a, and the second ball entering portion (second branch passage). When guided to 62b, it is detected by the second detection sensor 65b. That is, it is detected by different detection sensors when guided to the first incoming ball portion 62a and when guided to the second incoming ball portion 62b.

  As described above, the game ball won in the second operation winning opening 33b is detected by the second detection sensor 65b. For this reason, the game ball that has won the first action winning opening 33a and the destination is distributed to the second passage 64d and the game ball that has won the second action winning opening 33b are the same detection sensor (second detection sensor). 65b).

  Based on the fact that the first detection sensor 65a detects the game ball (the game ball enters the first ball entering part 62a), the first result display unit AS displays the fluctuation of the pattern, and the fluctuation display thereof. As a result of the stop, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection sensor 65a is clearly shown on the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection sensor 65a is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the first result display unit AS performs a predetermined stop. After the result is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Note that the pattern variation display executed in the first result display section AS is hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol variation display”, and the pattern variation display execution result executed in the second result display section BS is stopped. May be referred to as “second special symbol stop result”.

  Based on the fact that the second detection sensor 65b detects the game ball (the game ball enters the second ball entry portion 62b), the variation display of the pattern is performed in the second result display portion BS, and the variation display is performed. As a result of the stop, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection sensor 65b is clearly shown on the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection sensor 65b is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the second result display unit BS performs a predetermined stop. After the result is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, on the basis of a prize (detecting a game ball by the first detection sensor 65a or detecting a game ball by the second detection sensor 65b) to any of the operation winning ports 33a, 33b, corresponding result display sections AS, BS The variation display is started, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game time. However, the number of times of game play is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and any one of the winning winning openings 33a and 34a is generated. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in one result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the game until the above variable display is stopped in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  In the game board 24 of the third embodiment, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. The The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  In the third embodiment, “Electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)”, “Display contents of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 17)”, “Various counters (FIG. 18)”, “Attack table (FIG. 19)” ”,“ Destination of game results for jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 20) ”,“ Matters related to reach display (reach state) ”,“ Reserved ball storage area 232 (FIG. 21) ”,“ Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22) To FIG. 25) ”is the same as in the first embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, as part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, in addition to the detection sensor for detecting the winning to the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the through gate 35, the operation winning port. Detection sensors for detecting winnings in 33a and 33b (the first detection sensor 65a for detecting that the game ball has entered the first ball entry portion 62a and the game ball having passed through the second ball entry portion 62b) A second detection sensor 65b) is provided.

  Next, the display screen G1 of the symbol display device 41 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This display screen G1 also has an upper symbol row variation display region, a middle symbol variation display region, and a lower symbol variation display region ME. A hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME. In the hold display area NE, the same number as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the operation winning opening 33a, 33b (when the game ball enters the first ball portion 62a or the second ball portion 62b). The number of unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 is arranged so that the number of hold display areas Da is partitioned in the left-right direction.

  Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion 62a is four, and the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion 62b is four. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight pieces of hold information are stored in the order of winning in the first and second ball entering parts 62a and 62b. Correspondingly, in the hold number display area Da, the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, the third unit hold display area Da3, the fourth unit hold display area Da4, the fifth unit hold display. An area Da5, a sixth unit hold display area Da6, a seventh unit hold display area Da7, and an eighth unit hold display area Da8 are set.

  For example, in the case where the number of holds (total number of holds) when the game ball wins the operation winning opening 33a, 33b is 1, a predetermined hold display image MP is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Da1. In the case where the number of holds when the game ball wins the operation winning opening 33a, 33b is 4, the predetermined hold display image MP in the first unit hold display area Da1 to the fourth unit hold display area Da4. Is displayed. Note that FIG. 93B illustrates a case where the number of reservations is three.

  Further, in the hold display area NE, a hold display image corresponding to the game time being executed (running) so as to be side by side with the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Db in which MP is displayed is provided.

  When the game round is finished and the next game round is started, the hold display image MP displayed in the hold count display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db. The hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

  Next, the features of the counter used in the game by the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The MPU 202 of the third embodiment also uses various counter holding information during the game, and the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 43, the outline setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the display of the display part 44 for the accessory Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 94, as with the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, The random number initial value counter CINI, the variation type counter CS, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is displayed when a winning occurs at the winning openings 33a and 33b (specifically, the first detection sensor 65a or the first detection sensor 65a). 2 when the detection sensor 65b detects the passage of a game ball), it is stored in the holding ball storage area 232 as an acquisition holding information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE for action winning and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. The jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 and the jackpot are matched to the winning histories to the mouths 33a and 33b (specifically, the histories of the first pitching section 62a and the second pitching section 62b). Each numerical value hold information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra8. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when winnings to the winning openings 33a and 33b (specifically, entering the first and second entering parts 62a and 62b) are continuously generated a plurality of times. In addition, each numerical value hold information is time-sequentially in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, the fourth area Ra4, the fifth area Ra5, the sixth area Ra6, the seventh area Ra7, and the eighth area Ra8. Will be stored. By providing the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, four game balls have a history of entering the first ball entry portion 62a and the second ball entry portion 62b, that is, to the winning holes 33a and 33b. Up to a total of 8 winning histories are reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area is obtained and acquired based on the entry into the first incoming ball portion 62a or the second incoming ball portion 62b. Hold information for specifying the stored number of stored hold information is stored.

  For example, when only one of the first and second balls 62a and 62b has a ball and the number is four or more, the maximum memory for winning in the operation winning holes 33a and 33b is stored. Although the number is limited to four, as long as the game balls alternately enter the first and second balls 62a and 62b by the distribution means 63 described above, the operation winning holes 33a and 33b are entered. The maximum number of memories related to winning a prize will be raised to eight. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the number of stored pieces of stored information from reaching a peak at 4 even under circumstances where winning to the second operation winning opening 33b is difficult to occur. ing.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area RE when the variable display on the main display unit 43 is started. Based on the various numerical value hold information stored in the AE, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 of the third embodiment is configured such that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 299, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299), the counter returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the operation winning holes 33a and 33b, the game ball that has flowed into the ball entering portions 62a and 62be is detected by the detection sensors 65a and 65b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing.

  Also in the third embodiment, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (a success / failure hold information group) in the success / failure table storage area 221 as the success / failure hold information group storage means in the ROM 203. In this success / failure table, address hold information made up of binary hold information and jackpot value hold information made up of binary hold information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address hold information is represented by decimal numbers in 10 types “1” to “10”, and the jackpot value hold information is represented by decimal numbers “7”, “36”, “ Ten types of “67”, “100”, “131”, “164”, “195”, “223”, “241”, “272” are set, and these address hold information and jackpot numerical value hold information are There is a one-to-one correspondence. The numerical value of each jackpot value hold information is included in “0” to “299”, which is the numerical range of the random number hold information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Also in the third embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. And the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30 while the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/30, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is larger than that in the low probability mode. The probability that If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 of the third embodiment is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 29 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is also periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the operation winning opening 33a, 33b, the game ball flowing into the ball entering portions 62a, 62b is detected by the detection sensors 65a, 65b in detail. Stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the same timing.

  Also in the third embodiment, the game result distribution destination for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation hold information group) in the allocation table storage area as the allocation hold information group storage means in the ROM 203. Yes. Then, a normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a probability variable jackpot result (high probability special game result) are set as the distribution destinations. In the allocation table, “0-9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10-29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical allocation is arbitrary.

  Also in the third embodiment, the normal jackpot result is that after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the number of games after the support mode shifts is the reference end number (specifically, 100 times). It is a jackpot result that becomes the high frequency support mode until it becomes. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  Also in the third embodiment, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state winning and the operation shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Also in the third embodiment, a difference is provided so that the allocation based on the entrance to the second entrance 62b is more advantageous to the player than the allocation based on the entrance to the 1st entrance 62a. . Specifically, the probability variation jackpot results are roughly divided into two results with different advantages, specifically, the first probability variation jackpot result with a round number of “15” and the second probability variation jackpot result with a round number of “4”. In the case where the probability change jackpot result is obtained by the allocation based on the entrance to the second entrance portion 62b, the probability change jackpot result is obtained in comparison with the case where the outcome is based on the entrance to the first entrance portion 62a. By adopting a configuration that is likely to result in a one-probability big hit result, the above-described advantages are achieved in the distribution mode based on the entrance to the first entrance portion 62a and the distribution mode based on the entrance to the second entrance portion 62b. The difference is caused.

  The reach random number counter C3 according to the third embodiment is configured such that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the operation winning holes 33a and 33b, the game ball that has flowed into the ball entering portions 62a and 62b is detected by the detection sensors 65a and 65b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  The variation type counter CS of the third embodiment is also configured to be incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the symbol display apparatus 41 determines the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation.

  When determining the variable display time in the symbol display device 41 and the main display unit 43, the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 are referred to. The MPU 202 determines the stop result in the main display unit 43 using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stopped result determination table is used.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 of the third embodiment is also configured such that, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to be in an open state.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, in the third embodiment, the timer interrupt process and the normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 advances the game at each game time will be described with a focus on differences from the first embodiment. To do. In the third embodiment, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the main process that is started when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are also provided. Although executed, description of these various processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The third embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment, except that the contents of the “operating port winning process” are different. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 95 and FIG. 96 (a), the winning process for the operation port of the third embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for working port>
Here, the winning process for the operation port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 95 and 96A.

  In step S201b, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the first entrance part 62a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion 62a, the process proceeds to step S202b, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set.

  In the subsequent step S203b, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a holding information indicating that a game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 62a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a ball has entered the first ball entry section 62a. Thereafter, in step S204b, a hold information acquisition process for storing values such as the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201b that the game ball has not won the first pitching unit 62a, the process proceeds to step S205b. In step S205b, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the second entrance 66a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entry portion 62b, the process proceeds to step S206b, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. The prize ball command set in steps S202b and S206b is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the normal output external output process S401 (see FIG. 26) described later.

  In the subsequent step S207b, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a holding information indicating that a game ball has entered the second ball entry portion 62b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the entry to the second entry portion 33e has occurred. Thereafter, a hold information acquisition process is performed in step S204b, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in both steps S201b and S205b, that is, if there is no entry in either the first entry section 62a or the second entry section 62b, the main winning process is terminated. To do.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 96A, the hold information acquisition processing in step S204b will be described.

<Holding information acquisition process>
In the holding information acquisition process, first, in step S301b, the starting holding ball number N stored in the holding number storage area FE of the holding ball storage area 232, specifically, the first and second balls 62a and 62b. It is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls related to the pitching part that has triggered the hold information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold memory number N is the upper limit value, the present hold information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold memory number N of the corresponding entering part is incremented by 1 in step S302b. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as the common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area FE in step S303b is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304b, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the above step S103 (see FIG. 22) are used as the vacant area for the working port reservation area RE. The first storage area among the storage area areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common reserved number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S302b.

  In the subsequent steps S305b and S306b, a sound / lamp control device which is a sub-side (sub-side) control device that a winning in the winning winning openings 33a and 33b (a ball entering the ball-entry portions 62a and 62b) has occurred. 82 and the display control device 212 are executed, and a hold notice confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing a hold notice to be described later, are executed, and the hold information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes hold information indicating which one of the first ball entering portion 62a and the second ball entering portion 62b is based on winning.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S306b is transmitted to the voice / lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 in the normal output external output process (see step S501 in FIG. 26) described later. It will be. The display control device 212 receives the hold command and executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

  Specifically, when the display control device 212 receives the same command via the voice / lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 displays the hold display image MP in the hold number display area Da. A process for (for example) adding is executed. In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8 that is the eighth from the left. A detailed description of each process of steps S305b and S306b will be described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing of the third embodiment is the same as the normal processing of the first embodiment except for the following points. That is, in the normal process of the third embodiment, the data setting process constituting the game turn control process is executed based on FIG. 98, and the variation start process constituting the game turn control process is executed based on FIG. 97 and FIG. To do. Also, the game state transition process is different from the first embodiment in that it is used by modifying FIG. Hereinafter, differences between the normal processing of the third embodiment and the normal processing of the first embodiment will be described.

<Data setting process>
FIG. 96B is a flowchart showing data setting processing according to the third embodiment. In the data setting process of the third embodiment, first, in step S601b, the number of starting reserved balls N stored in the reserved number storage area FE and the target of the current setting process and the common reserved number CRN Is decremented by 1. In subsequent step S602b, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S603b, a process of shifting data stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra8 (that is, the hold information) of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → The data in each area is shifted such as the sixth area Ra6, the eighth area Ra8, and the seventh area Ra7.

  In the subsequent step S604b, a shift time command that is hold information for causing the notification / production control device 82 to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the voice / lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (see FIG. 26). The display control device 212 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da corresponding to the decrease in the hold number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the variation start process constituting the game turn control process of the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the variation start process of the third embodiment, first, in step S801b, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to a big win. Specifically, the hold information for jackpot determination among the hold information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the hold information acquired from the hold information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the holding information obtained by referring to the winning table for the low probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 corresponds to the jackpot winning. When it is determined that the information is included in the information and the winning / not-to-lot lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the above-mentioned hold is obtained by referring to the high-probability mode success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. Specify whether the information is included in the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  In the subsequent step S802b, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S801b is a result corresponding to the big win. If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S803b.

  In the type determination process, the hold information for type determination among the hold information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the hold information acquired from the hold information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the hold information for type determination thus grasped is included in the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to the entry to the first entry portion 62a, the distribution table for the first entry portion 62a is referred to, and the hold information is the second entry portion 62b. If it corresponds to the entry into the ball, the type determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second entry unit 62b.

  In a succeeding step S804b, it is determined whether or not the type of the big win is a probable big hit result based on the hold information specified in the type determination process in the step S803b. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S805b, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S806b. If it is determined in step S802b that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S807b.

  In each stop result setting process in step S805b to step S807b, refer to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203 for the hold information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. The specified hold information is stored in the RAM 204. Further, in step S805b and step S806b, the hold information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the current game times determination result is the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. . Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S805b, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S806b.

  After executing any one of steps S805b to S807b, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S808b.

<Variable display time setting process>
In the variable display time setting process of the third embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, first, in step S901b, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probable big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901b, that is, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery determination is a losing result, the process proceeds to step S902b. In step S902b, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902b as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901b or step S902b, the process proceeds to step S903b, and this time with reference to the reach generation variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time holding information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the like is acquired, and in the subsequent step S904b, the fluctuation display time holding information is stored in the variable display time counter area (variation display time) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Set to measuring means). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  That is, in the third embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery win is a jackpot winning result, or when the result of the same lottery is a missed result and the lottery for generating the reach is won. ing.

  Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display which have different display modes. The variable display time hold information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation. By referring to the table, the variable display time hold corresponding to each reach display is set. Information is acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS. By referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  More specifically, the reach generation variation display time table corresponds to the jackpot type. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped in the case of a probable jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped in the case of a normal jackpot result. In addition, the variable display time is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S902b, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S905b. In step S906b, the variable display time hold information is set in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The variable display time hold information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of common hold numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the common pending number CRN may be used, and the variable display time may be set shorter as the number of the common pending number CRN is smaller. . Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined using parameters such as the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, the value of the variation type counter, and the like. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, the hold information for jackpot determination, the hold information for type determination and the hold information for reach determination included in the other hold information Is determined without using as a parameter.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 97), after the variation display time setting process is executed in step S808b, a variation command and a type command are set in step S809b. The change command includes hold information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and hold information indicating a change display time. The type command includes game result hold information. In other words, the type command includes, as game information hold information, hold information of probability variation jackpot results, hold information of normal jackpot results, hold information of loss results, and the like.

  The change command and type command set in step S809b are transmitted to the notification / production control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (see FIG. 26). The notification / production control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the determined production of the production. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. In addition, the notification / production control device 82 transmits the change command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the hold information form. Based on the received variation command and type command, the display control device 212 determines the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game time, and the symbol display device is executed so that the determined variation display pattern is executed. 41 is displayed. Thereafter, in step S810b, the variation display of the pattern is started on the working port display section of the main display section 43, and then the present variation start process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
In the gaming state transition processing of the third embodiment, the processing of steps S1105 to S1107 is not performed, and the processing of step S1105b (not shown) is performed instead of steps S1105 to S1107. Different from processing. That is, in step S1105b, a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically “15” or “4” is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened. And if step S1105b is performed, it will transfer to S1108. Other processes are the same as the game state transition process of the first embodiment.

<About reservation notice>
Here, also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the reservation notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is before the game times related to the hold information are started. It is configured to be performed with a predetermined probability at the timing. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81.

<About summary of hold notice>
First, an outline of the notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. Here, FIG. 99 and FIG. 100 schematically show the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  In the third embodiment, on the basis of the fact that the game ball flowing down the game area PE wins any of the ball entering portions 62a and 62b, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display portions AS and BS, The stop result (a jackpot result or a disapproval result) is displayed, and the above fluctuation display is stopped. In the result display portions AS and BS, “from when the variable display is started until this variable display stops” corresponds to one game time. In the pachinko machine 10, various effect devices, that is, an effect display device (symbol display device 41), a light emitting means for lighting (window portion 61), in accordance with the change display in the result display portions AS and BS. Various lamp units around the display unit, a display lamp unit 63 above the window unit 61, and sound means (speaker unit 64) for generating sound effects and the like execute a game effect.

  The hold notice is performed using the above-described effect device as part of this game effect. 99 to 100, an effect display device (symbol display device 41) is illustrated as an effect device that makes a reservation notice. However, in this pachinko machine 10, all the effect devices (effect display devices, light emitting means) are provided. And voice means). However, the hold notice may be executed by using one kind of effect device or two kinds of effect devices selected from all the effect devices (effect display device, light emitting means, and sound means). Also in the third embodiment, as the “holding notice”, as in the case of the first embodiment, in addition to the normal type of holding notice (first notice effect) that is executed when the normal execution condition is satisfied, a special execution is performed. A special type of hold notice (second notice effect) executed when the condition is satisfied will be described.

  “D1” in FIG. 99 is a situation in which the stored number of the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part 62a or the first ball entering part 62b is “3”. In the display device 41, the case where the fluctuation display (previous fluctuation display) is being executed is shown. At this time, a display indicating that the storage number of the hold information is “3” is displayed in the hold number display area Da.

  In this situation of “D1”, it is assumed that the game ball enters the first incoming ball portion 62a or the first incoming ball portion 62b, acquires new holding information, and is stored (“D2”). In addition, based on this winning, it is assumed that it is determined (preliminary decision) to execute the hold advance notice. Then, based on the hold information acquired based on the winning, a condition fulfillment lottery (first notice lottery) is performed, and if the condition fulfillment lottery is won, whether or not a hold notice (first notice effect) is generated Perform a lottery of occurrence. Then, when the generation lottery is won, it is determined to generate the first notice effect. However, if the first notice lottery is won, a hold notice (first notice effect) may be generated without performing the generation lottery. The same applies to the second notice lottery described later.

  The hold information won in the first notice lottery becomes the above-mentioned “target hold information”. The number of hold information acquired before the “target hold information” and stored in the result display section hold area Ra. Is three ("D1", "D2"). In this case, using the three times of fluctuation display (fluctuation display based on each of the three pieces of hold information) that is started after the change display illustrated by “D1” and “D2” is ended, It is assumed that a hold notice (first notice effect) indicating “possibility of giving corresponding result” is executed. It should be noted that, with the acquisition of new hold information (acquisition of target hold information), the number of stored hold information becomes “4”, and the number of hold information stored in the hold display area Da is “4”. Is displayed (“D2”), the target hold information is displayed as “double square mark” in “D2”, and the other hold information (previously acquired hold information) is displayed as “hatched mark surrounded by a square” doing.

  “D3” in FIG. 99 indicates a case where the fluctuation display illustrated by “D1” and “D2” is terminated after displaying the result of detachment. Then, when the display time (eg, 0.6 seconds) of the detachment result elapses, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the variable display (first display) based on the hold information with the oldest storage order in the action winning slot hold area RE. 1 variable display) is started, and the number of stored hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is reduced to “3” (not shown). Then, the first variation display is started, and when a predetermined timing arrives, a “character picture for notice effect” appears (“D4”).

  After this, when the first variation display is finished and the display time of the off result has elapsed, the variation display (second variation display) based on the retention information that is the next oldest in the storage order is started in the reserve area RE for operating prize opening ( (Not shown). At this time, the number of stored hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is reduced to “2”, and the number of hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is reduced to “2” (not shown). Then, the second variation display is started, and when a predetermined timing arrives, a “character picture for notice effect” appears (“D5”). In addition, during the second variation display, it is assumed that a first ball entry 62a or a first ball entry 62b is entered, and two pieces of new hold information are acquired and stored (“D6 "). For this reason, the number of stored hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is increased to “4”. 99 to 100, the hold information acquired after the hold information that is the target of the hold notice (first notice effect), and the hold information that is the target of the hold notice (target) When the variation display (target variation display) based on the “hold information” starts, the hold information that has been acquired (that is, the acquired information) is displayed as “cross marks enclosed by squares”.

  Thereafter, when the second variation display is finished and the display time of the result of losing has elapsed, the variation display (third variation display) based on the retention information having the second oldest storage order is started in the reserve area RE for operating prize opening. (Illustration omitted). At this time, the number of stored hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is reduced to “3”, and the number of hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is reduced to “3”. Then, the third variation display is started, and when a predetermined timing arrives, a “character picture for notice effect” appears (“D7”). Then, during the third variation display, the entry to the first entry part 62a or the first entry part 62b is generated "five times", and five pieces of new hold information are acquired and stored. ("D8"). For this reason, the storage number of the hold information indicated by the hold display area Da is increased to “8” (“D8”).

  Subsequently, the third variation display is terminated, and the outlier result is displayed (“D9” in FIG. 100). Then, the hold information (target hold information) that is the target of the hold notice (first notice effect) moves (digested) from the first area of the result display section hold area RE to the execution area RE, and starts the target variation display. If the result of the target variation display is scheduled to be an “out-of-result” before the target variation display is started (D11), “acquired information” There is a possibility that a pending notice (second notice effect) is executed based on (D10). That is, a lottery (second notice lottery) that satisfies whether or not to execute the second notice effect on the selected already obtained information is preferentially selected from all the already obtained information.

  Here, in the third embodiment, the following method is exemplified as a process for preferentially selecting the one having a high winning probability, but the following method of this process is not limited. Also in the third embodiment, the jackpot information with the highest winning probability is selected with priority, but the validity of the acquired information is not determined. However, also in the third embodiment, the validity may be determined. Also in this embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot information is stored as acquired information, the previously stored jackpot information is selected, and the jackpot information stored later is selected as the target of the “second notice lottery”. It is outside. If the result of the “second notice lottery” for the jackpot information is a win, the “second notice lottery” is terminated at that time. In addition, if the result of the “second notice lottery” is a loss for the jackpot information, if there is already acquired information stored before the jackpot information, “2 notice lottery” is performed, but “second notice lottery” may not be performed.

  Also in the third embodiment, when the jackpot information is not stored as the acquired information, all of the acquired information stored in the result display area reservation area (Ra or Rb) is “second” in the storage order. A notice lottery is performed.

  In the third embodiment, “second notice lottery” is performed for predetermined acquired information, and in the case of winning, even if there is acquired information stored after the acquired information, Not eligible for “second notice lottery”. In addition, when the “second notice lottery” based on the jackpot information is lost, if there is already acquired information (other than the jackpot information) stored prior to the jackpot information, it is stored at the destination. The “second notice lottery” is performed in the order of storage for the acquired information, but the previously stored information stored in advance may be excluded from the second notice lottery.

  In the third embodiment, regarding “acquired information other than jackpot information”, the acquired information having a high winning probability of “second notice lottery” may be given priority and may be the target of “second notice lottery”. For example, when the acquired information is reach information (super reach information, normal reach information), the information may be subject to a preliminary lottery in preference to non-reach information. Furthermore, when the reach information (super reach information, normal reach information) is prioritized over the non-reach information, the “super reach information” for performing super reach in the variable display (game effect) when showing the result of the grant determination is The notice lottery may be prioritized over the “normal reach information” in which the normal reach is performed in the variable display (game effect) when the result of the grant determination is shown. Here, as will be described later, the winning probability of the first notice lottery and the second notice lottery is higher for the jackpot information than the reach information, the reach information is higher than the non-reach information, and the super reach information is higher than the normal reach information. Has been.

  Further explanation will be made with reference to FIG. 100. After the target variation display is performed for a predetermined time, “displacement result” is displayed (“D12”). Next, the variation display (pre-target acquired information variation display) based on the acquired information (pre-target acquired information) stored before the target acquired information is sequentially performed (“D13”, “D14”). Furthermore, a variation display based on the target acquired information (target acquired variation display) is started (“D15”). When this variation display is terminated, the variation display result (a jackpot result or a disapproval result) is displayed ("D16"). Here, “D12” and “D14” in FIG. 100 indicate that seven pieces of acquired information are stored when the target variation display is terminated. However, the acquired information that is processed fourth is the target acquired information, and the acquired information (holding information) that is processed first to third is the previous acquired information. That is, when a plurality of pieces of acquired information are provided, the “previous target acquired information variation display” and the “target image acquired information display” are not necessarily performed based on all the acquired information.

<Electrical configuration related to pending notice>
First, the electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 of the third embodiment are the same as the electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 of the third embodiment.

<Regarding the processing related to the hold notice executed by the main controller 81>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. As a process related to the hold notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a confirmation process for the hold notice and a setting process for the hold command are set.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described. This confirmation process for hold notice is executed in step S305b of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 96 (a)) set as part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). In this case, the hold information acquisition process is executed when a winning is made to the first operation winning opening 33a or the second operation winning opening 33b.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice. In the confirmation process for holding notice, in step S1801b, the start holding storage number N and the common holding number CRN stored in the holding number storage area FE of the holding ball storage area 232 are read, and the holding information of the holding number is obtained. Store in the register of the MPU 202. Thereafter, it is confirmed in steps S1802b to S1806b whether or not the hold information acquired by the current winning is included in the hold information for the big win.

  Specifically, first, in step S1802b, among the hold information acquired in step S304b (see FIG. 96 (a)) based on the current winnings to the operation winning ports 33a and 33b, hold information for jackpot determination, that is, The value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S1803b, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1804b, and the hold information for jackpot determination (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S302b with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode corresponds to the jackpot winning. Specify whether it is included in the hold information group. If the mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1805b, and the jackpot determination hold information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1802b is referred to the jackpot determination table for the high probability mode. It is specified whether it is included in the hold information set as.

  After step S1804b or step S1805b, in step S1806b, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination hold information grasped in step S1802b corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1807b, from the hold information for type determination out of the hold information acquired in step S304b based on the current winning, that is, from the hold information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 Know the acquired hold information.

  In subsequent step S1808b, with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit or the second result display unit, the hold information for determining the jackpot type determined in step S1807b is set as the normal jackpot result. Alternatively, it is specified whether it is included in any of the hold information set as the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering part 62a, the distribution table for the first result display part is displayed. Referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit when the processing of S1808b is performed and the game ball is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering unit 62b. Then, the process of S1808b is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S1809b, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type hold information grasped in step S1807b corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and in step S1810b, the jackpot type hold grasped in step S1807b. It is determined whether the information corresponds to a normal jackpot result.

  As a result, if it corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1810b. If the 15R probability variation jackpot result is not supported, that is, if it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1811b. And if the process of step S1810b or step S1811b is performed, this confirmation process will be complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1806b that the jackpot determination hold information grasped in step S1802b does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the process proceeds to step S1812b. In step S1812b, the hold information for determining outlier reach among the hold information acquired in step S304b based on the current winning, that is, the hold information acquired from the hold information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1813b, with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of ROM 203, the hold information for reach determination grasped in step S1814b is included in the hold information set as the reach win. To identify Thereafter, in step S1815b, it is determined whether or not the hold information for reach determination acquired in step S1812b corresponds to the occurrence of reach. In the case where it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S1815b the reach occurrence suspension information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then this confirmation process is terminated. This reach occurrence hold information also includes the type of reach (hold information regarding whether the reach occurrence hold information indicates normal reach occurrence or the reach occurrence hold information indicating super reach occurrence). Further, when the reach does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, this confirmation process is finished as it is.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the hold command setting process will be described. The hold command setting process is executed in step S306b of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 96A) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). In this case, the hold command setting process is executed even if the hold information acquisition process is a hold information acquisition process when a winning to the first operation winning opening 33a or the second operation winning opening 33b occurs.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the hold command setting process. First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not normal jackpot hold information or probability variable jackpot hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If either the normal jackpot hold information or the probable change jackpot hold information is stored, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is the probability change jackpot hold information. If it is probable jackpot hold information, in step S2003, a probability change corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area provided in the RAM 204, and if it is normal jackpot hold information, the RAM 204 in step S2004. In the hold command setting area, a normally corresponding hold command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that both the normal jackpot hold information and the probability variation jackpot hold information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S2005, and whether or not the reach occurrence hold information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Determine. If reach occurrence hold information is stored, a reach corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204 in step S2006, and if reach occurrence hold information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2007. Thus, a non-reach compatible hold command is set in the hold command setting area of the RAM 204.

  After executing any one of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007, in step S2008, the total number of reservations (holding information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance portion 62a, The total number of the holding information acquired based on the entering to the second entering portion 62b, that is, the total number of the holding information stored in the holding area RE for operation winning) is used as the holding command. The setting process is executed, and the hold command setting process of the third embodiment is terminated. Specifically, as the processing of step S2008, the hold information of the set hold command is configured as hold information of a plurality of bytes, and a part of bits of the hold information indicates that it is a hold command. The hold information and the hold information of the hold command type are included, and the hold information of the hold number can be set.

  In step S2008, first, the hold information of the total hold number stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1801 in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 101) is read. The read hold information for the number of hold information is stored in the hold information bit for the hold number by an arithmetic process such as logical sum. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S2003, step S2004, step S2006, or step S2007, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Hold information is included. After executing the processing in step S2008 detailed above, the pending command setting processing is terminated.

  The hold command including the hold information of the number of hold in step S2008 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 by the external output process of step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 26). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 adds hold information for hold notice to be described later to the hold command and transmits it to the display control device 212. Based on the received hold command, the display control device 212 executes hold display, hold notice processing, and the like.

  In addition, the setting method of the hold command is determined based on whether the display control device 212 holds the jackpot, whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot at that time, if the jackpot is not won, the presence or absence of reach, etc. Any design can be used as long as it can identify the variation display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding hold command, a reach support hold command, and a non-reach support hold command is individually set in correspondence with the number of each hold. It is also possible to select one pending command in accordance with the confirmation result in 101). At the end of the hold command setting process, the probability variation jackpot hold information, normal jackpot hold information, and reach occurrence hold information stored in the register of the MPU 202 are erased.

<Command handling process executed by display control device 212>
Next, command response processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command corresponding process of the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S3003a is first performed instead of the process of step S3003. That is, in step S3003a, the notice condition establishment flag (notification condition establishment hold information) is stored in the notice condition establishment flag storage area (notification condition establishment hold information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. If so, erase it.

  The advance notice condition establishment flag is hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the hold information is set to make a hold notice, and when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied. The hold information is stored when the condition for ending the hold notice is satisfied. In the command corresponding process of the third embodiment, the process of step S3003a or step S3003 of the first embodiment may not be performed. In other words, in the third embodiment, when the opening command is received as described above, the stored advance notice condition establishment flag is deleted, so that the game ball is inserted into the first entrance part 62a or the second entrance. The situation where the hold information is set to be held for the hold information acquired based on entering the ball part 62b is canceled when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the hold notice about the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part 62a or the second ball entering part 62b is not executed across the opening / closing execution mode. However, even if the opening command is received, the notice condition satisfaction flag may not be deleted. In this case, the situation where the game ball is set to perform the hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entering part 62a or the second ball entering part 62b is in the open / close execution mode. Since it is not resolved at the time of transition, the reservation notice can be executed across the open / close execution mode.

<Holding command response processing in display control device 212>
First, the pending command handling process in step S3012 of FIG. 103 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, in the pending command handling processing of the third embodiment, the processing corresponding to “processing of steps S3106 to S3109” in FIG. 55 and the processing corresponding to “processing of S3113 to S3115” in FIG. 55 are not performed. Is different from the pending command handling process of the first embodiment. In addition, the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part 62a and the hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball input part 62b are controlled. Not distinguished. Hereinafter, the pending command handling process of the third embodiment will be described.

  If it is determined in step S3101a that the pending command to be read at this time is either a probability change supported command or a normal supported command, the total number of pending commands included in the command received this time in step S3102a Identify pending information for. Then, the above specified total number of reserved information is set in the counter area for erasure in the counter area 323 provided in the work RAM 254. That is, in the third embodiment, the sum of the hold information acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 62a and the hold information acquired based on the entrance to the second entrance 62b is calculated. Identify.

  In the subsequent step S3103a, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold flag (big hit hold information) is stored in the big hit hold flag storage area (big hit hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. That is, in the third embodiment, there is no distinction between the first jackpot hold and the second jackpot hold, and only the jackpot hold flag (jackpot hold information) is stored in the flag storage area (jackpot hold information storage means). Yes.

  The erasure counter area 323 is also a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the jackpot hold flag when the jackpot hold flag is stored. The hold information of the hold number set in the erase counter area is updated so that it is decremented every time a new game is started, and is stored in the first erase counter area after the update. When the hold information is the initial value “0”, the big hit hold flag erasing process is executed.

  If the big hit hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3103a, and the hold command handling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the big hit hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3104a.

  When the jackpot hold flag is stored as described above, even if a probability change corresponding hold command or a normal response hold command is received, an affirmative determination is made in step S3103a, and various settings for performing a hold notice are performed. The big hit correspondence setting process (step S3106a) is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is already stored in the reserve area RE for operation winning award of the main control device 81 (see FIG. 94), the first pitching unit The hold information acquired based on the entry to 62a or the hold information acquired based on the entry to the second entry unit 62b corresponds to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result. However, various settings are not made for the advance notice.

  After the big hit hold flag is stored in step S3104a, it is determined in step S3105a whether the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, and the process for handling the pending command is terminated as it is. In other words, in a situation in which a hold notice is already set, even if a new probability change hold command or a normal support hold command is received, a new setting for making a hold notice is not performed.

  If the notice condition establishment flag is not stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3105a, the big deal handling setting process is executed in step S3106a, and then the pending command handling process is terminated. Here, the jackpot correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 56 (a) and FIG.

  The big hit correspondence setting process is performed based on FIG. Further, in the jackpot winning winning process, as shown in FIG. 105, first, in step S3211a, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time is a normal corresponding hold command. In the case of a normal correspondence hold command, in step S3212a, a normal jackpot notice flag (normal jackpot notice hold information) is stored in the normal jackpot notice flag storage area (normal jackpot notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. ) Is stored, and if it is a probability change corresponding hold command, in step S3213a, a probability change jackpot notice flag (probability jackpot notice hold information storage means) in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 is stored. (Probability jackpot notice hold information) is stored.

  Normally, the big jackpot flag indicates that the hold information that triggered the establishment of the condition in a situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is established (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). It is the hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 that it usually corresponds to the jackpot result. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result, and is deleted when a condition for ending the hold notice is established for the hold information.

  In addition, the probabilistic jackpot notice flag is a hold that triggers the establishment of the condition in a situation where the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied (that is, when the execution of the hold notice is permitted). This is the hold information for the MPU 252 to specify that the information corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result. The flag is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a condition for terminating the hold notice is established for the hold information. .

  After executing the process of step S3212a or step S3213a, the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3214a. In subsequent step S3215a, the hold information of the total hold number included in the hold command that is the current read target is specified, and the hold information of the specified total hold number is stored in the hold notice counter area 325 provided in the work RAM 254. Set for. After that, the big hit winning winning process is terminated and the big hit correspondence setting process is terminated.

  When the holding information acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 62a or the entrance to the second entrance 62b is set as a trigger for executing the advance notice, The MPU 252 is a measuring unit for specifying in which game times the on-hold information related to the setting corresponds to the on-hold information at which game time. The holding information stored in the operating prize holding area RE (see FIG. 94) is updated so as to be decremented every time a new game is started, and the holding notice counter area is updated after the update. When the hold information stored in is the initial value “0”, the notice condition establishment flag is deleted, and the state set to perform the hold notice is canceled. In addition, as shown in parentheses in step S3215a in FIG. 105, step S3218a in FIG. 106, and step S3413a in FIG. “Target number of acquired information” is set.

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 104), when it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is neither the probability change handling pending command nor the normal handling pending command (that is, the reach handling pending command or the non-reach command). When it is determined that the command is a corresponding hold command), in step S3107a, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the big hit hold flag is stored, the hold command handling process is terminated as it is.

  Here, even if a reach-reserved hold command or a non-reach-ready hold command is received, if the jackpot hold flag is stored, the hold command handling process is terminated as it is. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result has already been stored in the reserve area RE for operation winning award of the main control device 81 (see FIG. 94). Regardless of whether or not the situation is set so as to make a holding notice, the holding notice is made even if a new entry to the first entering part 62a or a second entering part 62b occurs. The above settings are not performed.

  If it is determined in step S3107a that the big hit hold flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3108a whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3108a, and the pending command handling process is terminated as it is.

  Here, as described above, even if a reach-reserved hold command or a non-reach-ready hold command is received, if the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold command handling process is terminated as it is. I made it. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the setting for performing the advance notice is made, the advance notice is given even if the first entrance 62 a or the second entrance 62 b is newly generated. Various settings are not performed.

  If the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3109a to determine whether or not the hold command that is the current read target is a reach-compatible hold command. If the command is a reach correspondence pending command, the reach correspondence setting processing is executed in step S3110a, and then the pending command correspondence processing is terminated. If the command is not a reach correspondence pending command (if it is a non-reach correspondence pending command), the non-reach correspondence setting processing is executed in step S3111a, and then the pending command correspondence processing is terminated.

  Here, the reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56B and 106, and the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 57A and 107.

  The reach correspondence setting process is executed based on FIG. Further, in the reach-winning process for reach, as shown in FIG. 106, first, in step S3311a, the mode in the case of actually performing the hold notice relating to the current setting is selected from a plurality of predetermined modes. A distribution lottery process for distributing which mode is to be performed is executed. This mode includes a normal jackpot inference mode that can be selected when the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as the trigger for execution of the hold notice, and the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variable jackpot result is the execution of the hold notice. A probability variation jackpot estimation mode and a reach notification mode that can be selected when set as an opportunity are set.

  When the process of step S3311a is executed, the process proceeds to step S3312a. In step S3312a, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311a is a reach notice mode. In the case of the reach notice mode, in step S3316a, the reach notice flag (reach notice hold information) is stored in the reach notice flag storage area (reach fixed notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S3312a, the process proceeds to step S3313a. In this step S3313a, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3311a is a normal jackpot estimation mode. In the case of the normal jackpot estimation mode, in step S3314a, the normal jackpot guess notice flag (normal guess guess) is stored in the normal jackpot guess notice flag storage area (ordinary jackpot guess notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Preliminary hold information) is stored. If it is not the normal jackpot estimation mode, in step S3315a, the probability change jackpot prediction notice flag (probability change jackpot) is stored in the probability change prediction prediction prediction flag storage area (the probability change prediction notice hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. Prediction notice hold information) is stored.

  When the process of step S3314a, step S3315a, or step S3316a is executed, the process proceeds to step S3317a. In the process of step S3317a, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In the subsequent step S3118a, the hold information of the total hold number included in the hold command that is the current read target is specified, and the hold information of the specified hold number is stored in the hold notice counter area 325 in the hold notice counter area 325. To set. Thereafter, the reach establishment process for reach is exited, the reach handling setting process is terminated, and the pending command handling process is terminated.

  Next, the non-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. The non-reach correspondence setting process is executed based on FIG. In the non-reach establishment winning process, as shown in FIG. 107, first, in step S3411a, reach estimation is performed in the reach estimation / prediction flag storage area (reach estimation / prediction hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. A notice flag (non-reach guess notice hold information) is stored.

  After executing the process of step S3411a, a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3412a. In the subsequent step S3413a, the hold information of the total hold number included in the hold command that has been read this time is specified, and the hold information of the specified total hold number is stored in the hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325. Set for Thereafter, the non-reach establishment winning process is exited, the non-reach handling setting process is terminated, and the pending command handling process is terminated.

<Variable display control processing>
In the variable display control process of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the content of the variable display start process is different from the variable display control process (FIG. 63) of the first embodiment. That is, in the variable display start process of the third embodiment, after the notice effect setting process is executed in step S3603, the flag start process is executed in step S3604a, and then the change start process is ended.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the hold information (hereinafter referred to as the first hold information) acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion 62a and the game ball in the second input. The hold information (hereinafter referred to as second hold information) acquired based on entering the ball portion 62b is not distinguished in terms of control. Then, there is no superiority or inferiority in the processing order of the processing of the first holding information and the processing of the second holding information (the order of processing on game control such as execution of lottery or execution of game times), and each holding information is processed in the storage order. . Therefore, even if the first hold information and the second hold information are stored, if the first hold information is stored earlier than the second hold information, the first hold information is processed first. The The flag erasure process does not include the “first flag erasure process related to the first hold information and the second flag erasure process related to the second hold information” as in the first embodiment. Information and the flag erasing process related to the second hold information ”. Hereinafter, the flag erasing process of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the flag erasing process of the third embodiment, first, in step S3801a, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the big hit hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3805a without executing the processes of steps S3802a to S3804a. If the big hit hold flag is stored, the hold information in the erase counter area is decremented by 1 so that the value stored in the erase counter area in the erase counter area 323 is decremented by 1 in step S3802a. Update.

  Thereafter, in step S3803a, it is determined whether or not the value of the erasing counter area is “0”. If it is “0”, the jackpot hold flag is erased in step S3804a, and then the process proceeds to step S3805a. Proceed to

  The jackpot hold flag is a flag that is stored when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold information stored in the hold area RE of the main control device 81 as described above. In the erasure counter area, when the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the holding area RE, the order for specifying the order in which the holding information is the start target of the game round is specified. Hold information is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command handling process (FIG. 104), the process of step S3102a is executed at the timing before the process of step S3103a is executed, so that the hold information stored in the hold area RE is stored. In addition, when a plurality of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included, the hold information in the order of the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning in which the start target is the later order is stored in the erasing counter area. Become. Therefore, when the suspending information in the erasing counter area is “0” as the initial value, the suspending information stored in the suspending area RE does not include the suspending information corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this case, the jackpot holding flag is deleted.

  In the flag erasing process of the third embodiment, in step S3805a, it is determined whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the erasing process is terminated as it is. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, in step S3806a, the hold notice counter is decremented so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area in the hold notice counter area 325 is decremented by one. Update area hold information.

  Thereafter, in step S3807a, it is determined whether or not the value of the holding notice counter area is “0”. If it is “0”, the notice condition establishment flag is deleted in step S3808a, and notice initialization processing is executed in step S3809a. In the notice initialization process, when any of the normal jackpot notice flag, the probable change jackpot notice flag, the normal guess notice flag, the probability change guess notice flag, or the reach notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, the stored flag is displayed. It is a process to erase.

  Here, the notice condition establishment flag is a flag that is stored when the hold information stored in the hold area RE is set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, as already described. In the counter area, when holding information set as a trigger for executing the holding notice is stored in the holding area RE, it is for identifying the order in which the holding information is the start target of the game round. Hold information is stored. Therefore, when the hold information in the hold advance notice counter area is “0” as an initial value, the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold advance notice in the hold area RE has already become the start of the game. In this case, the notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

  When the process of step S3809a is executed, the process proceeds to the process of step S3810a, and it is determined whether or not the game number started with the value of the counter area for holding advance notice “0” is a game number based on the jackpot holding information. That is, in step S3810a, the game times (game results and game times targeted for the notice effect of the game effect) subject to the notice effect are the jackpot holding information (the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result as the game result). It is determined whether or not the hold information is to be displayed.

  If the determination in step S3810a is affirmative, the flag removal process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S3810a is negative, the process proceeds to step S3811a. That is, when the game times that are the targets of the notice effect are not started based on the jackpot holding information, the process proceeds to step S3811a, and it is determined whether or not the acquired information exists. That is, in the case of performing a notice effect on the predetermined hold information, is the hold information acquired after the predetermined hold information already stored at the time of starting the game round that is the target of the notice effect? Determine whether or not.

  If the determination in step S3811a is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3812a, and the second notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second notice effect execution determination hold information provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254). The second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination information) is stored in the storage means), and the flag erasing process is terminated. Here, the second notice effect execution determination flag is the hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the reserved information that is the target of the second notice effect is to be searched from the acquired information. The second notice effect execution determination flag determines that the second notice effect can be executed based on any of the already obtained information, or can execute the second notice effect based on the already obtained information. It is pending information that is deleted when it is determined that it is not.

  If the determination in step S3810a is affirmative and the determination in step S3811a is negative, the flag erasure process ends. If it is determined in step S3807a that the value of the pending notice counter area is not “0”, the flag erasure process is terminated without executing step S3810a.

  Further, the second notice effect execution determination process of the third embodiment is executed based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 110 and 111. However, unlike the first embodiment, the process regarding the validity of the hold information is not performed. That is, “the process corresponding to step S3906, step S3907, step S3908, and step S3909 in FIG. 69” is excluded. Further, “processing corresponding to step S3920, step S3922, and step S3927 of FIG. 70” is excluded. Hereinafter, the second notice effect execution determination process of the third embodiment will be specifically described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 110 and 111.

  As shown in FIG. 110, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated, a second notice effect execution determination flag storage area (second notice effect execution determination pending) provided in various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254 in step S3901c. It is determined whether or not the second notice effect execution determination flag (second notice effect execution determination hold information) is stored in the information storage means). If it is determined in step S3901c that the second notice effect execution determination flag is not stored, the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3902c, and the second search flag is stored in the second search flag storage area (second search flag) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether it is stored in the search hold information storage means). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902c, the process proceeds to step S3916c in FIG. 111. If a negative determination is made in step S3902c, the process proceeds to step S3903c. In the process of step S3903c, it is determined whether or not the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area (first search hold information storage unit) provided in the various flag storage areas 322 of the work RAM 254. .

  Here, the first search flag is the hold information for specifying in the MPU 252 that it is in a state of searching whether the jackpot hold information exists in the acquired information. And if it is found that jackpot holding information (described later) exists in the acquired information and wins the notice condition establishment lottery, or it is confirmed that the jackpot holding information does not exist in the acquired information, it is deleted. The

  Further, the second search flag is used to specify in the MPU 252 that the lottery for establishing the notice condition is performed in the order of storage based on the acquired information (reach hold information, non-reach hold information) other than the jackpot hold information. Hold information. The second search flag indicates that “when there is no valid jackpot acquisition hold information even if search is performed in the storage order of all the acquired information” and “the lottery result of the advance notice condition regarding one jackpot hold information included in the acquired information is displayed. In the case where there is already acquired information stored prior to the jackpot hold information although it was a loss, it is stored in the second search flag storage area. Further, if the result of the notice condition establishment lottery based on reach hold information (reach support hold command) or non-reach hold information (non-reach support hold command) in the acquired information is won or lost, it is deleted.

  If it is determined in step S3903c that the first search flag is not stored in the first search flag storage area, the process advances to step S3904c to store the first search flag in the first search flag storage area, and the first search counter A process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit (Cmax) of (Ci) is performed. And if the process of step S3904c is performed, it will progress to step S3905c. If it is determined in step S3903c that the first search flag is stored in the first search flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S3905c without passing through step S3904c.

  Here, the first search counter is provided in the first search counter area in the search counter area 329, and when the first search flag is stored, measuring means for specifying the timing for deleting the first search flag. It is. In the first search counter, the number of acquired information is set to an upper limit value (Cmax), and the count value of the first search counter is updated to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. The Then, when the hold information stored in the first search counter area after the update reaches the upper limit value (Cmax), that is, the number of acquired information, the first search flag is deleted.

  In the process of step S3905c, it is determined that the acquired information whose count value of the first search counter is Ci is jackpot hold information. This step S3905c is performed based on the count value of the first search counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the acquired information acquired first (however, when the number of acquired information is one) is jackpot holding information. Here, the acquired information acquired first is “acquired information 1”, the acquired information stored next to “acquired information 1” is the acquired information stored after “acquired information 2”, and “acquired information 2”. The acquired information stored after “acquired information 3” and “acquired information 3” is referred to as “acquired information 4”. The acquired information stored after “acquired information 4” is “acquired information 5”, the acquired information stored after “acquired information 5” is “acquired information 6”, and “acquired information 6”. The stored acquired information is referred to as “acquired information 7”, and the acquired information stored after “acquired information 7” is referred to as “acquired information 8”.

  Here, also in the third embodiment, when the jackpot holding information is found based on the count value of the first search counter by performing a search (first search) on whether or not the jackpot holding information exists in the acquired information. Then, the process proceeds to step S3906c, and a lottery for establishing a notice condition for jackpot is performed. The processing in step S3906c is the same processing as S3201 in FIG. Then, when the process of step S3906c is executed, it is determined in step S3907c whether or not the lottery for establishing a big hit notice condition is a win. If it is determined that the game is won, a jackpot winning process is executed in step S3908c. This jackpot winning winning process is the same process as in FIG. However, in the step S3215a of the “big jackpot winning process” executed in the step S3908c, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 105, the number indicating the occurrence order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (the number of target acquired information) Is set in the pending notice counter. Specifically, when the acquired information (big hit hold information) won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition is the acquired information 7, “7” is set in the notice counter. For example, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “7”, if the lottery information acquired in the third (acquisition order) (big hit hold information) is won in the lottery for establishing the notice condition, 3 "is set.

  When the jackpot winning winning process of step S3908c is executed, the process proceeds to step S3910c, the second notice effect execution determination flag and the process of deleting the first search flag are performed, and then the second notice effect execution determination process ends. In the third embodiment, since the jackpot hold information is preferentially set as the target of the notice condition establishment processing in the acquired information, the second notice effect can be executed with higher probability than the normal notice effect.

  In step S3907c, if the big hit notice condition satisfaction lottery is a loss, the process proceeds to step S3909c. In the process of step S3909c, it is determined whether or not the number of existing hold information is “1”. That is, when the number of acquired information is one, if the jackpot hold information is, or if the lottery for establishing the notice condition of the jackpot hold information is a loss, the second notice effect execution determination process is terminated. It is the purpose. If the number of the existing hold information is “1”, the process proceeds to step S3910c, and after performing the process of deleting the second notice effect execution determination flag and the first search flag, the second notice effect execution determination process. Exit.

  If it is determined in step S3909c that the number of pieces of acquired information is greater than one (if a negative determination is made in step S3909c), the process proceeds to step S3911c, and whether or not “Ci ≧ 2” is satisfied. judge. In other words, it is determined whether or not the jackpot holding information corresponding to the value of the first search counter (the jackpot holding information that was lost in the lottery for establishing the notice condition) has the second or higher acquisition order. If the determination in step S3911c is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3912c. In this step S3912c, the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, the process of storing the second search flag in the second search flag storage area, and the upper limit value of the second search counter (Di) ( Dmax) is set as “Ci−1”, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is temporarily ended. In this case, in the upper limit (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the number of acquisition hold information acquired before the jackpot hold information that is the target of the processing of S3905c this time is set. For example, if the acquired information 6 is jackpot holding information that is the target of the processing of S3905c this time, the acquired information 1 to 5 is set as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di). When the process of step S3912c is completed, the second notice effect execution determination process is once ended, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is started again. The process shifts to S3916c. If a negative determination is made in step S3911c (when acquisition information 1 is a loss in the second notice lottery), the process proceeds to step S3909e, and the second notice effect execution determination process ends.

  If the determination in step S3905c is negative, the process proceeds to step S3913c to determine whether the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax). That is, if the jackpot holding information cannot be found by repeating the process of step S3905c by the number of pieces of acquired information, an affirmative determination is made in step S3913c. More specifically, when the number of acquired information is “3”, the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1), the acquired information 2 (Ci = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3) are stored in the order of storage. If jackpot holding information cannot be found even after the processing of step S3905c, the determination in step S3913c is positive, and if the processing of step S3905c has not yet been performed for the acquired information 3 (Ci = 3). In step S3913c, a negative determination is made. If the number of acquired information is “1” and the acquired information 1 (Ci = 1) is determined to be negative in step S3905c, the determination is positive in step S3913c.

  If it is determined in step S3913c that it is not the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3914c, the count value of the first search counter (Ci) is incremented by 1, and the second notice effect execution determination process is once ended. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3905c through an affirmative determination in step S3901c, a negative determination in step S3902c, and an affirmative determination in step S3903c. In this case, the acquired information obtained after the previously acquired information (acquired information on whether or not the jackpot holding information is determined) as the processing target of S3905c becomes the processing target of S3905c.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913c that the count value of the first search counter is the upper limit value (Cmax), the process proceeds to step S3915c, and the process of deleting the first search flag from the first search flag storage area, After executing the process of storing the two search flags in the second search flag storage area and the process of setting the number of acquired information as the upper limit value (Dmax) of the second search counter (Di), the second notice effect is executed. The determination process ends. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is activated again, the process proceeds to step S3916c in FIG. 111 through an affirmative determination in step S3901c and an affirmative determination in step S3902c.

  In the processing after step S3916c in FIG. 111, for the acquired information other than the jackpot holding information (reach holding information or non-reach holding information), the lottery for establishing the notice condition is performed in the order of storing the acquired information (reach holding information or non-reach holding information). Do. Specifically, in step S3916c, a lottery for establishing a notice condition is performed for the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter. This notice condition satisfaction lottery is the same process as the process of S3301 in FIG. 56B or the process of S3401 in FIG. Therefore, depending on whether the acquisition hold information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is “reach hold information” or “non-reach hold information”, the lottery for establishing the notice condition is determined to be won in step S3923. Probability is different.

  The second search counter is provided in the second search counter area in the search counter area 329, and is a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the second search flag when the second search flag is stored. is there. In the second search counter, an upper limit value is set in step S3912c or step S3915c, and the count value of the second search counter is updated so as to be incremented by 1 each time the acquired information is searched in the storage order. Then, after the update, the information stored in the second search counter area is the upper limit value (Dmax), that is, the upper limit value (Dmax) set in the process of S3912c or S3915c and the second search flag are deleted.

  When the notice condition satisfaction lottery is performed in step 3916c, the process proceeds to step S3917c, and it is determined whether or not the result of the notice condition satisfaction lottery is winning. If it is determined that the winning is made, a notice condition establishment process is executed in step S3918c. Specifically, when the acquisition information corresponding to the count value of the second search counter at that time is “reach hold information”, the “reach notice condition establishment process” similar to FIG. 106 described above is executed. When the acquisition hold information is “non-reach hold information”, the “non-reach notice condition establishment process” similar to FIG. 107 described above is executed. However, in step S3318a of the “reaching success winning process” executed in step S3918c, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information acquired (the number of acquired information) is set in the pending notice counter. Also in step S3413a of the “non-reach establishment winning process” executed in step S3918c, the number indicating the acquisition order of the acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery (number of acquired information) is set in the pending notice counter. . Specifically, when the number of pieces of acquired information won in the notice condition establishment lottery is “5”, “5” is set in the hold notice counter). For example, even if the acquired number of acquired information is “7”, if the previously acquired information acquired in the second (in the order of acquisition) is won in the lottery for establishment of the notice condition, “2” is set in the holding notice counter. The

  When the notice condition establishment process is executed in step S3918c, the process proceeds to step S3921c, and after the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are erased, the notice effect execution determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3917c that the lottery is made in the notice condition establishment lottery, the process proceeds to step S3919c. In other words, the process also proceeds to step S3919c when it is determined that the notice condition fulfillment lottery result for the acquired information (for example, Di = 1, that is, acquired information 1) indicated by the count value of the second search counter is a loss.

  In step S3919c, it is determined whether the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value (Dmax). Here, the process of step S3919c is a second notice effect execution determination process when the lottery for establishing the notice condition in step S3917c is performed for the upper limit number of times (Dmax) set in the process of S3912c or S3915c, and the winning condition cannot be won. Is a process for ending. Specifically, when the number of acquired information is “3”, the acquired information 1 (Di = 1), the acquired information 2 (Di = 2), and the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) are stepped in the storage order. If the affirmative determination is not made in the process of step S3917b even after the process of S3916c is performed, the count value of the second search counter is determined to be the upper limit value (Dmax) in the process of step S3919c. Further, when the acquired information 3 (Di = 3) has not been subjected to the processing after step S3916c, the determination is negative in step S3919c.

  If the upper limit value (Dmax) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S3920c, the count value of the second search counter (Di) is incremented by 1, and then the second notice effect execution determination process is once terminated. In this case, when the second notice effect execution determination process is started again, the process proceeds to the process after step S3916c through the positive determination in step S3901c and the positive determination in step S3902c.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3919c that the count value of the second search counter has reached the upper limit (Dmax), the process proceeds to step S3921c, and the second notice effect execution determination flag and the second search flag are deleted. Thereafter, the notice effect execution determination process ends. In addition, you may perform the process after S3916c separately by reach hold information and non-reach hold information. That is, until the count value of the second search counter reaches the upper limit value (Dmax), the lottery for establishing the notice condition for the reach hold information is performed, and if all are lost, the count value of the second search counter is the upper limit value ( Until reaching Dmax), a notice condition establishment lottery for non-reach hold information may be performed.

  Also in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even when the notice initialization process of step S3809a in FIG. 110) in FIG. 110 or step S3818c in FIG. 111 is performed, and the notice condition establishment flag may be stored in the work RAM 254 again. In this case, in the flag erasing process of FIG. 109, an affirmative determination is obtained in the process of S3805a, and the process proceeds to S3806a and subsequent processes. At this time, since the number of target acquired information (the total number of target acquired information and the previous acquired information) is set in the notice counter, processing such as S3806a and S3807a is performed, and the above-described FIG. Based on FIG. 73 and the like, the second notice effect is executed. Moreover, in 3rd Embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in the process of S3811a when ending the second notice effect, the second notice effect may be executed again.

  According to the third embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, in a pachinko machine (for example, called “8 chances”) where the hold information is likely to be “8”, as described above, “the prefetch zone is selected when performing the prefetch effect on the prefetch hold information sent from the main control”. In this state, if the process of not winning another pre-read zone is executed, the following problem may occur. In other words, in this type of pachinko machine, when the result is displayed as a result of the fluctuation display that is the target of the notice effect, a lottery for whether or not the notice is available for the hold information is performed until a maximum of seven pieces of acquired information are processed. In other words, a non-lottery period for seven pieces of hold information (a period during which a lottery for whether to give a notice can not be performed) is made.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in order to determine whether or not the second notice effect can be performed when the result of the change display that is the subject of the notice effect is displayed as a result of the deviation, (A period during which a lottery for whether or not to accept) cannot be performed).

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) As described above, it is effective to apply the aspect of the second embodiment to the third embodiment. In other words, in the example of FIG. 90 (c), the acquired information 1 is the hold information (fourth rank hold information) for displaying the result of the loss through the normal reach. Further, the acquired information 2, the acquired information 4, the acquired information 5 and the acquired information 7 are the hold information (the 5th rank hold information) for displaying the detachment result without the reach. And the acquired information 3 is holding information (third-ranking holding information) for displaying a result of losing via super reach, and the acquired information 6 is holding information (second-ranking holding information) indicating a normal jackpot. . And in 3rd Embodiment, although the number of acquired information tends to increase more than 2nd Embodiment, according to the structure (structure which specifies the acquisition order of jackpot hold information at the time of acquisition) of 2nd Embodiment, the acquired information Even if the search is not sequentially performed, it is possible to find the hold information for preferentially performing the lottery for establishing the notice condition. That is, whether or not to execute the second notice effect can be efficiently determined by preferentially performing the notice condition establishment lottery with the acquired information 6 in which the Cp value is specified.

(2) Also, the above-described modified example 5 (FIG. 81) can be applied to the third embodiment. That is, also in the third embodiment, the presence / absence of the acquired information is confirmed when the game times that are the targets of the notice effect are started, and the second notice effect execution determination flag is stored when the result of the game times is displayed. The embodiment to illustrate was illustrated. However, as shown in Modification 5 in FIG. 81, when the game times that are the targets of the notice effect are finished, the existence of the acquired information may be confirmed. In addition, while the game times that are the subject of the notice effect are in progress (variable display), the existence of the acquired information is confirmed, or the game times that are the subject of the notice effect are finished (for example, one second before). In addition, the presence / absence of acquired information may be confirmed. In these cases, since the time for confirming the presence / absence of acquired information is delayed, there is a high possibility that the number of acquired information can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to obtain high-ranked acquired information or to obtain a chance for a notice condition establishment lottery.

(3) Also in the third embodiment, when there is already-acquired information when the display result of the game times targeted by the notice effect is out (including 2R probability variation jackpot), the second notice effect execution determination process is performed. The aspect performed repeatedly is illustrated. For this reason, in the case where the acquired information exists when the display result of the game times targeted by the second notice effect is off, the second notice effect execution determination process is performed again. That is, when the notice effect is ended, if the determination in step S3811a in FIG. 109 is affirmative, the second notice effect may be executed again. However, the number of executions of the second notice effect may be limited. For example, when the display result of the game times targeted by the notice effect is out (including the 2R probability variation jackpot), the second notice effect execution determination process may be performed only once or only twice. It is good as well. For example, when it is performed only once, if the first second notice effect execution determination process is performed after the normal notice (first suggestion effect), it is prohibited to perform the second notice effect execution determination process again. Set the flag to be used. Then, the flag may be deleted when performing a normal notice (first suggestion effect) again.

(4) In the third embodiment, a game ball based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance portion 62a and a game round based on entering the second ball entrance portion 62b are designated as the first ball entrance. Although the aspect which performs in order of the entrance to the part 62a or the 2nd entrance part 62b was illustrated, the game ball enters the 2nd entrance part 62b and the game turn based on the entrance to the 1st entrance part 62a It is good also as an aspect which performs game times based on that in parallel. For example, the display screen G includes an area for displaying a game time based on a game ball entering the first ball entering part 62a and an area for displaying a game time based on entering the second ball input part 62b. It is possible to display in parallel the game times based on entering the first entrance 62a and the game times based on entering the second entrance 62b.

(Fourth embodiment)
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment corresponds to a modification of the first embodiment described above, and is the same as the first embodiment except for the following points. For this reason, in 4th Embodiment, the point different from 1st Embodiment is demonstrated and description of the point which is common in 1st Embodiment is abbreviate | omitted.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the execution time of the cancellation operation is changed according to the degree of achievement of the return ball cancellation operation. That is, the predetermined cancellation operation is performed for a predetermined time, but when the return ball cancellation operation is insufficient, the execution time of the next cancellation operation may be longer than the predetermined time. Hereinafter, features of the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the fourth embodiment, (a) the return ball cancellation process is performed based on FIG. 112 (a), and (b) the return ball cancellation process (S508) and the game ball launch control process ( The point that the post-end time measurement process of FIG. 112 (b) is added during S509) is different from the first embodiment, but the other points are the same as in the first embodiment. Further, in the return sphere elimination process of the fourth embodiment, the point that the process of S1603A is performed instead of the process of S1603 and the point that the process of S1606A is performed instead of the process of S1606 are the return sphere elimination process of the first embodiment. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment.

  Here, also in the process of S1603A, the process of setting the cancellation operation execution flag, the process of starting the cancellation operation, the process of erasing the return ball flag, and the process of setting the cancellation operation end timer te are executed. However, in the fourth embodiment, the value set in the elimination operation end timer te differs depending on whether the achievement level of the elimination operation is sufficient or insufficient.

  Specifically, when the value of the time measurement timer after the end is “0”, “450 (1.8 seconds)” is set in the cancellation operation end timer te, and the value of the time measurement timer after the end is “ In the case of “positive number”, “600 (2.4 seconds)” is set in the elimination operation end timer te. Here, the post-end time measurement timer ts is a timer for measuring an elapsed time since the previous return ball canceling operation, and an upper limit (initial) value is set in the processing of S1606A. That is, in the process of S1606A, in addition to the process of ending the cancellation operation and the process of erasing the cancellation operation execution flag, a process of setting “300 (1.2 seconds)” to the post-end time measurement timer ts is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 112B, when the post-end time measurement process of the fourth embodiment is started, it is determined in step S1650 whether the post-end time measurement timer ts is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1650, the post-end time measurement process of the fourth embodiment is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S 1650, the process proceeds to step S 1651, the post-end time measurement timer ts is decremented by “1”, and the post-end time measurement process of the fourth embodiment is once ended. Here, the post-end time measurement process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. For this reason, when a negative determination is made in step S1650, the value of the post-end time measurement timer ts is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

  In the fourth embodiment, after “1.2 seconds” have elapsed since the previous canceling operation, the value of the time measurement timer ts after the end becomes “0”, and before “1.2 seconds” has elapsed. The value of the time measurement timer ts after the end becomes “positive value”. Then, after “1.2 seconds” have elapsed since the previous return ball canceling operation, it is determined that the degree of achievement of the previous canceling operation is sufficient, so that the normal value ( “450 (1.8 seconds)”) is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the time measurement timer ts after the end is “positive value”, that is, when a return ball is detected before “1.2 seconds” elapses, the degree of achievement of the previous canceling operation is It is determined that there may have been insufficient. For example, since it is determined that the game ball (return ball) remaining on the launch rail 74 has been detected (see FIG. 37) even after the previous cancellation operation has been performed, the normal value is set for the cancellation operation end timer te. A larger value (“600 (2.4 seconds)”) is set.

  According to the fourth embodiment, when a return ball is detected after a sufficient time has elapsed since the previous cancel operation, the degree of achievement of the previous cancel operation is sufficient (the return ball on the launch rail 74 is The execution time of the current resolution operation is set to the normal time. On the other hand, if a return ball is generated within a short period of time after the previous return ball canceling operation, the degree of achievement of the previous cancel operation may be insufficient (the return ball on the launch rail 74 is not canceled). The execution time of the current canceling operation is set to be long.

  In the fourth embodiment, even when the execution time of the current canceling operation is set to be long, the next canceling operation is performed when a return ball is detected after a sufficient time has elapsed since the current canceling operation was performed. Execution time is set to normal time. However, if the execution time of the current canceling operation is set longer and the return ball is detected after a sufficient time has elapsed since the current canceling operation is performed, the execution time of the next canceling operation is increased. It is good to do.

  In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113A, if the achievement degree is insufficient even if the execution time of the elimination operation is set to be long, the execution time of the elimination operation is further increased. It is good also as setting long (henceforth an application example). In other words, in the application example, when a return ball is detected within a short period of time after performing the previous canceling operation, the execution time of the current canceling operation is set long (set to 2.4 seconds). However, when a return ball is detected within a short period of time after performing the current canceling operation, the execution time of the next canceling operation is set longer (set to 3.0 seconds). Similarly, when a return ball is detected within a short period of time after the next canceling operation is performed, the execution time of the canceling operation subsequent to the “next canceling operation” is set longer (3.6). It may be set to seconds). In other words, the execution time of the canceling operation may be set longer until the degree of achievement is sufficient. In this case, after the achievement level of the resolution operation is sufficient, the execution time of the resolution operation subsequent to the resolution operation may be returned to the normal time. The “execution time” may be left as is.

  Further, in step S1606A in FIG. 112A, the time (period) set in the post-end time measurement timer ts may be a long time (long term) such as 10 hours, 20 hours, 1 week, 1 month, or 1 year. Good. In this case, when the post-end time measurement timer ts is “0” when performing the process of S1603A, it is determined that the return sphere occurrence frequency is the first frequency (low frequency), and the execution time of the canceling operation is set. Set to the first predetermined time. On the other hand, if the post-end time measurement timer ts is “positive number”, it is determined that the return sphere occurrence frequency is the second frequency (high frequency) higher than the first frequency, and the execution time of the canceling operation is the first time. You may set to 2nd predetermined time longer than predetermined time.

  In step S1603A in FIG. 112 (a), when the post-end time measurement timer ts is a value close to “upper limit value set in step S1606A” such as “299” or “298”, the canceling operation is executed. Time will be substantially extended. That is, even if the planned “end time of the cancellation operation (1.8 seconds)” is reached, if the return ball is detected, the “end time of the cancellation operation” is substantially extended ( Will be extended for 2.4 seconds). Regardless of the degree of achievement in the resolution operation, the execution time of the resolution operation executed next can be made longer or shorter than the execution time of the resolution operation executed first. . Furthermore, the elimination operation with a long execution time and the elimination operation with a short execution time may be performed alternately.

  According to the fourth embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the execution time of the canceling operation is changed according to the degree of achievement of the canceling operation of the return sphere, so that the return sphere can be achieved more reliably.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 4th Embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) In the first embodiment, the presence or absence of a return ball is detected based on the length of the detection interval of game balls (whether or not it is shorter than the firing cycle), but in the return ball detection process of Modification 11 in FIG. As shown, the ball speed of the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 (the time for the passage detection sensor 74b of the launch rail 74 to detect the passage of the game ball, that is, the time for the game ball to pass through the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). The presence or absence of a return ball may be detected based on In addition, the return ball detection process of the modification 11 shows the other specific example of the return ball detection process in step S507 of a normal process.

  The return ball detection process of the modified example 11 is based on the time when the passage detection sensor 74b of the launch rail 74 detects the passage of the game ball (the time when the game ball passes the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). It detects the presence or absence of occurrence. In other words, the hitting force generated by the hitting portion 75b is directly applied to a game ball (hereinafter referred to as a normal launching ball) that is launched by the launching device 75 from the launch position 74W. On the other hand, the return ball that runs backward on the launch rail 74 runs backward on the launch rail 74 using gravity applied to the return ball, not the hitting force generated by the hitting portion 75b. For this reason, the ball speed (w2) at which the return ball runs backward on the launch rail 74 is slower than the ball speed (w1) at which the normal launch ball passes through the launch rail 74 (detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b). And in the modification 11, the presence or absence of a return ball | bowl is detected based on the length of time when the passage detection sensor 74b detects a game ball.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the launch rail 74 is installed at a steep slope (for example, when the tilt angle is 50 to 80 degrees), and a large number of return balls are generated. When firing together with a ball, if a large number of return balls reciprocate within the detection range of the passage detection sensor 74b or stop within the detection range, the time for the passage detection sensor 74b to detect the game ball becomes even longer. Further, the speed of passing through the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) is slower in the return ball than in a normal game ball (a game ball launched by the launch device 74 in a state where the return ball is not present on the launch rail) It is common to become.

  However, depending on the condition of the launch rail (the presence of other return balls on the launch rail, etc.), the speed of passing the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) may be faster for the return ball than for a normal game ball. There is also. However, the speed of passing through the passage detection sensor 74b (detection means) is normal speed (the speed at which the game ball launched by the launching device 74 passes through the passage detection sensor 74b in a state where the return ball is not present on the launch rail). If there is even one game ball that is later than (), it can be recognized that a return ball has occurred.

  In the return ball detection process shown in FIG. 113B, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the passage detection sensor 74b has detected a game ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, the process advances to step S1512 to add “1” to the detection time counter TC3 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the return ball detection process is temporarily ended. Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. For this reason, when the passage detection sensor 74b detects a game ball, the count value set in the detection time counter TC3 is incremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle). That is, the detection time counter TC3 is a counter that determines a time (a period during which the detection is continued) detected by the passage detection sensor 74b.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1513, and it is determined whether or not the value of the detection time counter TC3 is “3” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, it is determined that the detection time by the passage detection sensor 74b is short and the return ball is not detected. For this reason, the process proceeds to step S1515 to determine whether or not the value of the detection time counter TC3 is “0”, and when the value of the detection time counter TC3 is determined to be “0”, The return ball detection process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1515, the process proceeds to step S1516. After the value of the detection time counter TC3 is set to “0”, the return ball detection process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, it is determined that the return ball is detected because the detection time by the passage detection sensor 74b is long. For this reason, when the process proceeds to step S1514 and the return ball flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1515. In step S1515 after step S1514, a negative determination is made uniformly. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1516, the value of the detection time counter TC3 is set to “0”, and the return ball detection process is terminated. Here, the return ball flag of the modified example 11 is also a flag indicating that a return ball is generated. In the modified example 11, the mode in which the return ball is determined to be present when the count value of the detection time counter TC3 is “3” or more is illustrated. However, the value of the detection time counter TC3 serving as a reference for the determination That is, the ball speed of the game ball when it is determined that there is a return ball is not limited to that shown in the modification 11, and various selections are made according to the angle of the firing rail 74 to be used, the type of the launching device 75 to be used, and the like. it can.

(2) In the first embodiment and the eleventh modification, the mode in which the presence or absence of the return sphere is determined by the single passage detection sensor 74b is exemplified. A mode in which the presence or absence of a return ball is determined using the individual passage detection sensors 74x and 74y can also be exemplified. In the modified example 12, a first passage detection sensor 74x and a second passage detection sensor 74y are arranged in the middle of the firing rail 74. Among these, the first passage detection sensor 74x is a sensor disposed at a position close to the launch position 74W, and the second passage detection sensor 74y is a sensor disposed at a position farther from the launch position 74W than the first passage detection sensor 74x. It is. The structures of the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y are the same as those of the passage detection sensor 74b of the first embodiment.

  The game ball launched from the launch position 74W passes through the detection hole (through hole) of the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y in this order. Then, based on measuring the time from when the game ball passes the first passage detection sensor 74x until it passes the second passage detection sensor 74y (counting the count value of the counter TC4), Determine presence or absence. In addition, the presence or absence of a return ball can be determined by the order of the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y that detect a predetermined game ball. Specifically, when the order of detecting a predetermined game ball is the order of the second passage detection sensor 74y and the first passage detection sensor 74x, it is determined that the game ball has run backward on the launch rail 74 ( It is possible to determine that a return ball has been generated.

  Hereinafter, the return ball detection process of Modification 12 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 114 (b), “first detection” indicates that the first passage detection sensor 74x has detected a game ball (when a game ball is detected), and “first detection”. The “flag” is a flag indicating that the first passage detection sensor 74x has detected a game ball. The “second detection” indicates that the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected a game ball (when a game ball is detected), and the “second detection flag” indicates that the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball. It is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected.

  In the return ball detection process of the modified example 12, in step S1521, it is determined whether or not the first passage detection sensor 74x has detected a game ball (whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first passage detection sensor 74x). judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1521, the return ball detection process is temporarily ended after setting the first detection flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1521, the process proceeds to step S1523 to determine whether or not the first detection flag is set. If the determination in step S1523 is affirmative, the process advances to step S1524 to add “1” to the detection interval counter TC4 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In step S1525, the second passage detection sensor 74y It is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected (whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second passage detection sensor 74y). Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. For this reason, the count value set in the detection interval counter TC4 is incremented by 1 at a predetermined period (4 msec period). The detection interval counter TC4 is a counter that determines the time from when the first passage detection sensor 74x detects a game ball until the second passage detection sensor 74y detects the game ball.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1525, the return ball detection process is once terminated. That is, when the game ball is detected by the first passage detection sensor 74x but the game ball is not detected by the second passage detection sensor 74y (the game ball is detected by the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y). In the case of passing between), the return ball detection process is once ended.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1525 (when the second passage detection sensor 74y detects a game ball), the process proceeds to step S1526, and whether or not the “value of the detection interval counter TC4” is “within an allowable range”. Determine whether. For example, when the game ball at the launch position 74 is fired in a normal state by the launch device 74 (when fired in a state where no return ball is present on the launch rail 74), the game ball is detected by the first passage detection sensor 74x. And the second passage detection sensor 74y is “0.1 seconds (the value of the detection interval counter TC4 is 25)”. In this case, if the “time” is within the range of “0.92 seconds (TC4 = 23) to 0.108 seconds (TC4 = 27)”, it is determined as “tolerable range”. On the other hand, if the “time” is less than “0.92 seconds” or exceeds “0.108 seconds”, it is determined as “out of tolerance”. The “allowable range” of the “time” is not limited to the range shown in the modified example 12, but the installation state of the target pachinko machine, the rattling of the launch position 74, the angle of the launch rail 74 to be used, and the launch device to be used Various selections can be made according to 75 types.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1526, the process proceeds to step S 1528, a process of deleting the “first detection flag”, a process of setting the value of the detection interval counter TC 4 to “0”, and the return ball detection process are ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1526, the process proceeds to step S1527, and a return ball flag is set. Then, the return ball detection process is terminated through the process of step S1528.

  If it is determined in step S1523 that the first detection flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1530, and whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected a game ball (second passage detection sensor 74y). It is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by. If a negative determination is made in step S1530, the return ball detection process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1530, the process proceeds to step S1531, a process of setting a return ball flag is performed, and the return ball detection process is terminated. Here, a negative determination in step S1523 and a positive determination in step S1530 mean that a predetermined game ball has been detected in the order of the second passage detection sensor 74y and the first passage detection sensor 74x (that is, , The game ball has run backward on the firing rail 74). That is, after a negative determination in step S1523 and an affirmative determination in step S1530, the process proceeds to step S1531, and a return ball flag is set.

  According to the above modification 12, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained. That is, in order to arrange the two passage detection sensors 74x and 74y on the launch rail 74, "the detection interval of the game ball between the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y" or "first passage By determining which one of the detection sensors 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected the game ball first, it is easy to recognize the occurrence of the return ball. . In particular, according to the modified example 12, the presence or absence of a return ball can be reliably recognized by considering the order in which the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y detect the game ball.

  Moreover, as shown in the modification 13 of FIG. 115 which shows the other modification of 1st Embodiment, only when the detection of a game ball is made in order of the 2nd passage detection sensor 74y and the 1st passage detection sensor 74x. The return ball may be determined. Also in the modification 13, the arrangement interval between the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y may be the same as that in the modification 12. That is, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), a certain amount of space is provided between the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y, and the “game ball detection range” in the first passage detection sensor 74x The “game ball detection range” in the second passage detection sensor 74y may be separated. However, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the two passage detection sensors 74x and 74y may be arranged close to each other in the middle of the firing rail 74. As shown in FIG. 115A, when the detection ranges of the passage detection sensors 74x and 74y are close to each other (for example, a distance of 2 mm to 10 mm), there is no momentum in the game ball launched from the launch position 74. However, when the game ball passes the detection range of the first passage detection sensor 74x, the game ball reaches the detection range of the second passage detection sensor 74y. Further, when the game ball that runs backward on the launch rail 74 passes through the detection range of the second passage detection sensor 74y, the game ball reaches the detection range of the first passage detection sensor 74x. Therefore, the return ball can be detected more reliably regardless of the sphere of the return ball. In particular, if the first passage detection sensor 74x is disposed at a position close to the firing position 74 (disposed at a distance of one or two game balls), “ball clogging” is caused on the firing rail 74. Even if the firing operation is performed, it is effective when a large number of game balls reciprocate in the vicinity of the firing position 74 (when a large number of game balls hardly move).

  In Modification 13, the return ball detection process is performed based on the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in Modified Example 13, in the return ball detection process, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1521, the first detection flag is set, and then the return ball detection process is temporarily terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1521, the process proceeds to step S1523 to determine whether or not the first detection flag is set. If the determination in step S1523 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1524B to determine whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected a game ball. If a negative determination is made in step S1524B, the return ball detection process is once terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1524B, the process proceeds to step S1525B, the process of deleting the “first detection flag” is performed, and the return ball detection process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1523, the process proceeds to step S1526B, and whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y has detected a game ball (whether or not the second passage detection sensor 74y is detecting a game ball). Or not). If a negative determination is made in step S1526B, the return ball detection process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1526B, the process proceeds to step S1527B, a process of setting a return ball flag is performed, and the return ball detection process ends.

  According to Modification 13 described above, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. That is, since the two passage detection sensors 74x and 74y are arranged on the launch rail 74, any one of the first passage detection sensor 74x and the second passage detection sensor 74y detects the game ball first. It is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of the return sphere.

(2) In the first embodiment, when the output state of the firing permission signal is at the HI level, the cancellation operation execution flag is set at the predetermined timing ty3, but at the timing tv1 before the timing ty3, the ball feeding device When one game ball is sent out on the launch rail 74 by 76, the launch operation is performed, but as shown in Modification 14 (Modification of the first embodiment) shown in FIG. 45 (b). The firing operation after setting the cancellation operation execution flag may be prohibited (not performed).

  This modification 14 is also similar in that the value of the firing period counter is cleared to “0” in step S5003 of the firing control process of FIG. However, in step S5003, when the cancellation operation execution flag is set and the output state of the firing permission signal becomes the LOW level, it is determined whether or not the ball has been fed. If it is determined in step S5003 that the ball has been fed, the ball fed state is canceled. As described above, when the output state of the firing permission signal becomes the LOW level based on the setting of the canceling operation execution flag, if the ball is already fed, the ball fed state is canceled. Then, the launching device 75 does not perform the firing operation after the canceling operation execution flag is set.

  Moreover, in the modification 14, you may perform a discharge control process based on FIG. Here, in the launch control process of FIG. 52, the process of step S5003A is performed instead of step S5003, the process of step S5004A is performed instead of step S5004, and the process of step S5008A is performed instead of step S5008. The difference is that the process of step S5009A is performed instead of step S5009, the process of step S5010A is performed instead of step S5010, and the process of step S5010 is omitted. This is the same as the launch control process 42.

  Also in the launch control process of FIG. 116, first, in step S5001, whether or not the launch permission signal output from the main control device 81 to the power source / launch control device 98 (launch permission receiving circuit 98e) is at the HI level. Determine. If the firing permission signal is at the HI level, 1 is added to the value of the firing cycle counter (not shown) provided in the power / fire control device 98 in step S5002.

  If the firing permission signal is at the LOW level, the value of the firing cycle counter is cleared to “0” in step S5003A. However, when the canceling operation execution flag is set and the output state of the firing permission signal becomes LOW level, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing counter (CTS) is positive (whether or not the ball has been fed). When the determination is made and the value of the firing counter (CTS) is positive, the value of the firing counter (CTS) is set to “0”. Thereby, when the value of the firing counter (CTS) is positive (the ball is already fed) and the canceling operation execution flag is set, the launching device 75 may perform the firing operation after setting the canceling operation execution flag. Absent. The game ball in the already fed state is removed from the lower end of the firing rail 74 when the return ball canceling operation is executed. Here, the firing counter (CTS) is configured by using a subtraction type counter and is provided in the power source / launch control device 98. When the supply of one game ball onto the launch rail 74 by the ball feeder 76 is completed, the upper limit value is set. When the counter value becomes “0”, the game ball on the launch rail 74 is launched. The

  When the process of step S5002 or the process of step S5003A is executed, the process proceeds to step S5004A. In the process of step S5004A, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing counter (CTS) is positive (whether or not the ball has been fed). If the firing counter (CTS) is “0” (when the ball is not already fed), it is determined in step S5005 whether or not the value of the firing cycle counter is “150”. If the value of the firing cycle counter is not “150”, the firing control process is once terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the firing cycle counter is “150”, the processing of step S5006 and step S5007 is executed, and then the processing of step S5008A is performed. Here, in step S5008A processing, the upper limit “50” is set to the value of the firing counter (CTS).

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5004A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the firing counter (CTS) in step S5009A. In the subsequent step S5010A, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing counter (CTS) is “0”. The count value of the firing counter (CTS) is incremented by 1 at a period of 4 msec (the same period as the normal process). The case where the value of the launch counter (CTS) is “0” means that 0.2 sec has elapsed after the game ball is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74.

  If the value of the firing counter (CTS) is not “0”, the firing control process is once ended. On the other hand, if the value of the firing counter (CTS) is “0”, the process proceeds to step S5011, and the signal received by the power / fire control device 98 from the variable resistor 88 of the firing handle 8A. Based on the above, the firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 8A is grasped. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S5012, and a driving signal for launching according to the launching intensity grasped in step S5011 is output to the launching device 75.

  Thereby, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 74 is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8A, and the launch control process ends. When the value of the firing counter (CTS) becomes “0”, the ball feeding completed state is cancelled. In addition, in the launch control process of FIG. 52, a modification in which the process of step S5003 of the launch control process of FIG. 42 is performed instead of the process of step S5003A can be exemplified.

(3) In the first embodiment, detection signals from the touch sensor 87 and the stop switch 89 are input to the main control device 81 via the power supply / launch control device 98, and the main control device 81 receives these signals. On the basis of this, whether or not to fire is set, and a signal (launch permission signal) indicating that is input to the power source / launch control device 98. However, unlike the first embodiment, the detection signals from the touch sensor 87 and the stop switch 89 are transmitted to the control device (for example, the payout control device 97) different from the main control device 81 via the power supply / launch control device 98. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the different control device is set to determine whether or not to fire based on these signals, and a signal indicating that is input to the power / fire control device 98. Further, in the configuration in which the power supply / launch control device 98 includes the MPU, the process of S5008 in FIG. 42 is performed by storing (setting) a flag indicating the setting of the already sent state in the “RAM provided in the MPU”. By deleting the flag from the “RAM provided in the MPU”, the processing of S5013 in FIG. 42 can be performed. In this case, the MPU can determine the state of the flag (stored or erased) to execute the process of S5004. In Modification 14, when the canceling operation execution flag is set and the output state of the firing permission signal becomes the LOW level, the processing of S5003A in FIG. 48 may be performed by deleting the flag.

(4) In the first embodiment, when the return ball flag is set, the mode of setting the cancellation operation execution flag is exemplified. However, as in Modification 10 (modification of the first embodiment) shown in FIG. When the return ball flag is set, it is possible to “stop the ball feeding (stop the ball feeding operation and perform the launching operation) prior to the canceling operation”.

  As will be described later, in the modified example 15, when a return ball is generated without a return ball for a predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) or longer, the first return ball flag is set and the ball feed stop flag is set. Is done. That is, when a return ball is generated in a state where no return ball is generated for a while, the first return ball flag is set and the ball feed stop flag is set. In the modified example 15, “3.0 seconds” is exemplified as the “predetermined time”, but the “predetermined time” is not necessarily “3.0 seconds”. For example, “6.0 seconds” , “12.0 seconds”, “1 hour”, “1 day”, “1 week”, “January”, etc. The “predetermined time” is set when the pachinko machine 10 is designed or manufactured, and the predetermined time (period) is set to one time when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall. May be. Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer, a plurality of candidates for the “predetermined time (predetermined period)” are determined, and after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the pachinko hall, the predetermined selection means is operated. Thus, one time (period) may be selected from a plurality of “predetermined times (predetermined periods)”. This selection means may be one that can be operated by the player, or one that the player cannot operate (selection that can be operated by the manager of the pachinko machine 10 or a pachinko hall clerk and cannot be operated by the player) Means).

  In the modified example 15, when the return ball is generated before the “predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds)” elapses after the first return ball flag is set, the second return ball flag is set. The cancellation operation execution flag is set. Further, when a return ball is generated after the “predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds)” has elapsed after the ball feed stop flag is cleared, it is determined that “the return ball has not been generated for a while”. The first return ball flag is set again, and the ball feed stop flag is set.

  Next, features of Modification 15 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. This timing chart shows the relationship between a ball feed stop flag, a cancellation operation execution flag, a firing permission signal, a ball feed operation performed by the ball feed device 76, and a launch operation performed by the launch device 75.

  FIG. 117 shows a case where the condition satisfaction signal inputted from the power / fire control device 98 to the main control device 81 is at the HI level and the cancel operation execution flag is released (the main control device 81 is fired). In the case where the output state of the permission signal is HI level), a return ball is generated, and the ball feed stop flag is set at the timing of tw1. In this case, even after the timing of tw1 has elapsed, the launch permission signal is maintained at the HI level, and the launch operation performed by the launch device 75 can be performed. However, when the ball feed stop flag is set, the ball feed operation performed by the ball feed device 76 is not performed.

  While the ball feed stop flag is set (for example, 3 firing cycles are illustrated), a new game ball is not sent to the firing rail 74. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a new game ball is sent out to the launch rail 74 even though a return ball has already occurred on the launch rail 74. In addition, while the ball feed stop flag is set, the launching operation performed by the launching device 75 is performed. Therefore, if a game ball remains on the launch rail 74 when the ball feed stop flag is set, this remains. A game ball can be launched along the firing rail 74. In this case, the remaining game ball reaches the gap 7D (foul ball collection port) from the upper end of the launch rail 74, falls from the interval 7D, and can be discharged to the lower plate 72 through the foul ball passage.

  As described above, after the ball feed stop flag is set, the launch operation can be executed for a certain period of time (in the modified example 15, three launch cycles are exemplified), and the return ball may be eliminated by this launch operation. . When the set period of the ball feed stop flag (e.g., 3 firing cycles) is passed, the ball feed stop flag is cleared, and if no return ball is detected, “ball feed operation and launch operation 0.2 after that” Is performed in a cycle of 0.6 sec.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the ball feed stop flag is erased even if it is possible to execute the launch operation for a fixed time (three launch cycles) after the ball feed stop flag is set or the return ball is not eliminated. The However, if the return ball is confirmed before the predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) elapses after the ball feed stop flag is erased, the cancel operation execution flag is set, and the firing permission signal is set to HI. From level to LOW level. When the canceling operation execution flag is set, the ball feeding operation and the firing operation are not performed. If a return ball is detected after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3.0 seconds) after the ball feed stop flag is deleted, the ball feed stop flag is set again.

  This modification 15 is that in the normal process (FIG. 26), (a) the return ball detection process is performed based on FIG. 54, (b) the return ball cancellation process is performed based on FIG. 116) The point where the preparation flag management process of FIG. 56 (a) is performed between the return ball cancellation process (S508) and the game ball launch control process (S509), and (d) the game ball launch control process (S509) shown in FIG. Although the points to be performed are different from those of the first embodiment, the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  Next, features of the return ball detection process of Modification 15 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the return ball detection process of the modified example 15, instead of “if step S1506 is affirmed and step S1507 is executed, then step S1508 is executed”, instead of “step S1506 is affirmatively determined” The point that step S1508 is executed after step S1507A or step S1507B is executed is different from the first embodiment. Note that the return ball detection process of the modification 15 is a modification of the return ball detection process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment, but the return ball detection process of the modification 15 is the modification 11, the modification 12, and the modification. It is good also as a modification of 13 return ball | bowl detection processes.

  In the return ball detection process of the modified example 15, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1506A to determine whether a preparation flag is set. Here, the preparation flag is a flag indicating that preparation for executing the canceling operation is performed, and is set after the stop of the ball feeding or after the canceling operation is ended, as will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1506A, the process proceeds to step S1507A to set a first return ball flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1506A, the process proceeds to step S1507B to set a second return ball flag. Then, when the process of step S1507A or step S1507B is performed, the return ball detection process is terminated through the process of step S1508. Here, the “first return ball flag” is a flag indicating that the ball feed stop process is being performed, and the “second return ball flag” is a flag indicating that the return ball cancellation operation is being performed.

  Next, the return ball cancellation process of the modification 15 is demonstrated using the flowchart of FIG. In the return ball elimination process of the modified example 15, it is determined whether or not a ball feed stop flag is set in step S1611. Specifically, the process of step S1611 can be performed by determining whether or not the ball feed stop flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Here, the ball feed stop flag is a flag indicating that the ball feed operation is being stopped, and is set when the return ball canceling process is started in a state where the first return ball flag is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S <b> 1611, the process proceeds to step S <b> 1612, and it is determined whether or not a canceling operation execution flag is set. Specifically, the process of step S1612 can be performed by determining whether or not the cancellation operation execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Here, the cancellation operation execution flag is a flag indicating that the cancellation operation is being executed, and is set when the return ball cancellation process is started in a state where the second return ball flag is set. The meaning of the canceling operation is the same as in the first embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1611 and step S1612, it is determined in step S1613 whether the first return ball flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1613, in step S1614, a process of setting a ball feed stop flag, a process of stopping the ball feed operation, a process of deleting the first return ball flag, and a ball feed stop end A process of setting “450 (1.8 seconds)” to the timer tf is executed, and the return ball elimination process is terminated. Here, the ball feed stop end timer tf is a timer for determining when to stop the “ball feed operation stop” when the stop of the ball feed operation is started (when the ball feed stop flag is set).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1613, it is determined in step S1615 whether or not the second return ball flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1615, the return ball elimination process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1615, in step S1616, a process of setting a cancellation operation execution flag, a process of starting the cancellation operation, a process of erasing the second return ball flag, and a resolution operation A process of setting “450 (1.8 seconds)” to the end timer te is executed, and the return ball elimination process is ended. Here, the elimination operation end timer te is a timer that determines when the elimination operation is terminated when the elimination operation is started (when the elimination operation execution flag is set).

  If it is determined in step S1611 that the ball feed stop flag is set, the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is decremented by 1 in step S1620. That is, the return ball cancellation process is a part of the normal process, and is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, the count value set in the cancellation operation end timer te is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

  After performing step S1620, the process proceeds to step S1621. In step S1621, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is “0”. If the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is not “0”, the return ball elimination process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the ball feed stop end timer tf is “0”, in step S1622, the process of ending “stop of the ball feed operation” and the process of deleting the ball feed stop flag are performed. Then, after the processing for setting the preparation flag and the processing for setting “750” to the counter tv for time measurement after completion, the return ball elimination processing is terminated. Here, the post-end time measurement counter tv is a counter for measuring the time after the ball feed stop flag or the cancellation operation execution flag is deleted. Here, the return ball detection process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26), and is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, the value set in the post-end time measurement counter tv is a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle). Decrement by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1611, and a positive determination is made in step S1612, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, the value of the cancellation operation end timer te is decremented by 1. Then, after step S1617 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1618. In step S1618, it is determined whether or not the value of the elimination operation end timer te is “0”. If the value of the canceling operation end timer te is not “0”, the return ball canceling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the elimination operation end timer te is “0”, in step S1619, the processing for terminating the elimination operation, the processing for erasing the elimination operation execution flag, and the preparation flag are set. After performing the process and the process of setting “750” to the time measurement counter tv after completion, the return ball elimination process is terminated. Also in the return ball elimination process of the modification 15, in step S1619, the elimination operation is terminated (the excitation of the solenoid 77a is stopped, the support member 77 is lowered, and the game ball at the launch position 74W can be supported. If processing is not performed, a warning sound may be generated or a warning lamp may be displayed.

  The preparation flag management process of the modification 15 is demonstrated using FIG. 120 (a). When the preparation flag management process is activated, it is determined in step S1671 whether or not a preparation flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1671, the preparation flag management process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1671, the process proceeds to step S1672, the post-end time measurement timer tv is decremented by "1", and the process proceeds to step S1673.

  In step S1673, it is determined whether or not the value of the post-end time measurement timer tv is “0”. If the post-end time measurement timer tv is not “0”, the post-end time measurement process is ended. To do. On the other hand, if the post-end time measurement timer tv value is determined to be “0” in step S1673, the process proceeds to step S1674, and after the preparation flag is erased, the preparation flag management process is ended.

  That is, in the modified example 15, when the preparation flag is “after stopping the ball feeding (after stopping the ball feeding operation but finishing the state of continuing the launching operation)” or “after completing the canceling operation”, the predetermined flag Although time (for example, 3 firing cycles) is set, the time is erased when the time (for example, 3 firing cycles) elapses. For this reason, when a return ball is detected after the predetermined time (for example, three firing cycles) has elapsed, the first return ball flag is set and the ball feeding is stopped.

  Next, the features of the game ball launch control process of Modification 15 will be described with reference to FIG. The game ball launch control process of Modification 15 is different from the game ball launch control process of the first embodiment in that step S1705B, step S1705C, and step S1705D are added after the process of step S1705.

  That is, in the game ball launch control process of the modified example 15, when step S1705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1705B. In this step S1705B, it is determined whether or not a ball feed stop flag is set. If the ball feed stop flag is set, the process of S1705C is executed, and then the game ball launch control process is terminated. If the ball feed stop flag is not set, the process of S1705D is executed. Then, the game ball launch control process is terminated. Here, the process of S1705C is a process of setting the output state of the ball feed stop signal to the HI level based on the ball feed stop flag being set, and the process of S1705D is a process of setting the ball feed stop flag. This is a process for setting the output state of the ball feed stop signal to the LOW level based on the absence of the ball feed. Note that when the main controller 81 sets the output state of the ball feed stop signal to the HI level or the LOW level, the launch permission signal is input to the power source / launch controller 98 (the launch permission receiving circuit 98e shown in FIG. 16). It has become. The power supply / launch control device 98 stops the ball feeding operation based on the ball feeding stop signal being at the HI level.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (b), a firing control process of Modification 15 will be described. When the process of S5006 is performed, the point of performing the process of S5006A is different from the launch control process of the first embodiment.

  In the launch control process of the modified example 15, if it is determined in the process of step S5006 that the value of the launch period counter is “150”, the process proceeds to S5006A, and whether or not the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level. Determine whether. If it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is not at the HI level, in step S5007, a ball feed drive signal is output to the ball feed device 76, and then the launch control process is performed through step S5008. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, the process of step S5007 is skipped, and the firing control process is terminated through step S5008. That is, the ball feeding device 76 does not move one game ball to the firing position of the firing rail 74, but sets the ball feeding completed state and ends the firing control process. As described above, in the modification 15, the launch permission signal is at the HI level, but when the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, the process of step S5007 is skipped. In this case, the ball feeding operation is prohibited, and a new game ball is not sent out to the firing rail 74. However, since the ball feeding state is set, steps S5009 to S5013 are executed (see FIG. 42). .

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, if the ball feeding operation is continued even if a return ball is generated, a large number of game balls are accumulated on the firing rail 74, causing a ball clogging on the firing rail 74, or the degree of the ball clogging. It can get worse. On the other hand, in the modified example 15, when a return ball is generated, first, the ball feeding operation is stopped and the firing operation is continued. That is, the ball feeding operation is stopped, and the return ball is eliminated (excluded from the launch rail 74) by firing the game ball existing on the game ball to the launch rail 74. When the return ball is eliminated, the normal game is continued as it is. When the return ball is not eliminated, the return ball elimination process is performed. That is, in the modified example 15, even if the return ball flag is set, “stop the ball feeding operation” is first performed, and the execution frequency of the return ball cancellation process is reduced, which contributes to a smoother progress of the game. Can do. Also in the modified example 15, the execution time of the canceling operation may be changed according to the degree of achievement of the return ball canceling operation, etc., as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 112). For example, the execution time of the canceling operation that is executed following the canceling operation may be made longer than the execution time of the canceling operation that is first executed after the stop of the ball feeding operation.

  Moreover, although the launch control process of the modification 15 was made into the modification of the launch control process of 1st Embodiment, as shown in FIG.120 (c), the launch control process of the modification 15 is changed to the modification 14 (FIG. 52). This may be a modification of the launch control process. That is, if it is determined in step S5006 that the value of the firing period counter is “150”, the process proceeds to S5006A, where it is determined whether or not the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level. If it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is not at the HI level, in step S5007, a ball feed drive signal is output to the ball feed device 76, and then the launch control process is performed through step S5008A. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, the process of step S5007 is skipped, and the firing control process is terminated through step S5008A. That is, the ball feeding device 76 does not move one game ball to the firing position of the firing rail 74, but sets the ball feeding completed state and ends the firing control process. As described above, in the modification 15, the launch permission signal is at the HI level, but when the ball feed stop signal is at the HI level, the process of step S5007 is skipped. In this case, the ball feeding operation is prohibited, and a new game ball is not sent out to the firing rail 74. However, since the process of step S5008A is executed, the processes of steps S5009A, S5010A, 50111, and 5012 are executed ( 116).

(4) Also, as shown in Modification 16 (Modification of the first embodiment) shown in FIG. 122 (a), a notch 74E is provided at the lower end (rear end) of the launch rail 74, and the launch rail of the game ball 74 may facilitate the discharge from above. That is, by retracting the support member 77 from behind the game ball F, the game ball F on the launch rail 74 can be discharged from the lower end of the launch rail 74, but the discharge path at that time is the lower end of the launch rail 74. The notch 74E is widened by the amount provided. For this reason, smooth discharge of the game ball from the launch rail 74 can be achieved. As this notch 74E, an arc-shaped notch 74E having a radius of curvature larger than the diameter of the game ball can be exemplified, but the shape and size of the notch 74E can be such that at least a part of the game ball can enter. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, when the lower end part of the firing rail 74 is substantially linear in a plan view, when the interval between the lower end part of the firing rail 74 and the tip part (striking part 75b) of the launching device 75 is narrowed, the firing rail 74 is used. By providing the notch 74E at the lower end portion of this, the interval between the lower end portion of the firing rail 74 and the tip end portion (striking portion 75b) of the firing device 75 can be secured. Further, when the notch 74E is provided at the lower end portion of the launch rail 74, it is desirable that the center of gravity position GW of the game ball supported from behind by the support member 77 on the launch rail 74 exists on the launch rail 74.

(5) Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the support member 77 is operated and the return ball canceling operation is executed. However, the return ball canceling method is not limited to the method shown in the first embodiment. For example, as shown in Modification 17 of FIG. 122 (b) (Modification of the first embodiment), the lower end side (rear end) 74F of the firing rail 74 can be rotated with reference to the hinge 74G, and the lower end side. The (rear end) 74F may be rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the game ball F on the launch rail 74 may be discharged. Further, as shown in Modification 18 of FIG. 123 (Modification of the first embodiment), the launching device 75 is movable (retractable) in a direction away from the firing rail 74, and the support member 77 is moved and the launching device 75 is moved. It is good also as discharging | emitting the game ball F on the launch rail 74 by performing reverse | retreat.

(6) Further, as shown in Modification 19 of FIG. 124A (Modification of the first embodiment), the firing rail 74 can be moved in the firing direction (direction close to the guide rail portion 5E). To do. As a result, the lower end side (rear end) W1 of the launch rail 74 moves in the launch direction (direction approaching the guide rail portion 5E), and the game ball is located between the lower end side (rear end) W1 and the support member 77. It is good also as providing the clearance gap part W2 which can pass, and discharging | emitting the game ball F through this clearance gap part W2. That is, the launch rail 74 is moved in a predetermined direction, and the distance between the lower end side (rear end) W1 (the launch position 73) of the launch rail 74 and the support member 77 exceeds the diameter of the game ball. The game balls on the rail 74 can be discharged out of the firing rail 74.

(7) Further, as shown in Modification 20 (Modification of the first embodiment) of FIG. 124 (b), the rotation center W3 (a surface parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine 10) is formed on the upper end side of the firing rail 74. A rotation center that can be rotated inside) Then, the gap rotates through the rotation center W3 of the firing rail 74 (rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) and allows the game ball to pass between the lower end side (rear end) W1 and the support member 77. W4 may be provided, and the game ball F may be discharged through the gap W4. In the modification 20, the rotation of the firing rail 74 is executed until it comes into contact with the stopper W5.

  Similarly, as shown in Modification 21 (Modification of the first embodiment) in FIG. 124C, the launch rail 74 is provided at the center of rotation provided in a plane substantially perpendicular to or intersecting with the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to rotate with reference to W6. Then, the launch rail 74 is rotated with the rotation center W6 as a reference, and the groove portion 74M of the launch rail 74 is tilted so as to be inclined downward, whereby the game ball F on the launch rail 74 is discharged in the direction in which the groove portion 74M is tilted. It is good to do. That is, as shown in the modified examples 19 to 20, by rotating the launch rail 74, the game ball F on the launch rail 74 can be discharged out of the launch rail.

(8) Moreover, as shown in the modified example 22 of FIG. 125, the firing rail 74 has a contractible structure, and the lower end side (rear end) W7 of the firing rail 74 is in the firing direction (direction close to the guide rail portion 5E). It is good also as providing the clearance gap W8 which can pass a game ball between the said lower end side (rear end) W7 and the support member 77, and discharging | emitting the game ball F through this clearance gap W8. For example, the lower end portion W9 of the firing rail 74 is configured by a lower end portion of the first rail portion 74A and a second rail portion 74B that is slidably disposed on the first rail portion 74A. And when the return ball | bowl is not produced, the lower end side part of the 2nd rail part 74B protrudes in the opposite direction to a discharge direction rather than the lower end side of 74 A of 1st rail parts. Moreover, although the launch position 74W is provided on the upper surface of the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B, when a return ball is generated, the second rail portion 74B is moved to the first rail portion by using driving means such as solenoidoid. Slide on 74A in the firing direction. As a result, the “projection amount from the first rail portion 74A” at the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B is reduced. A gap portion W8 through which a game ball can pass is provided between the lower end side portion of the second rail portion 74B and the support member 77, and the game ball F may be discharged through the gap portion W8. An inclined surface W10 is provided on the upper end portion side of the second rail portion 74B so as to descend toward the first rail portion 74A, and a step is formed between the upper end portion side of the second rail portion 74B and the upper surface of the first rail portion 74A. Can be eliminated. For this reason, the game ball launched from the launch position 74W and passed through the upper surface of the second rail portion 74B smoothly moves toward the upper surface of the first rail portion 74A.

(9) In the first embodiment, a through-type proximity switch is used as the passage detection sensor 74b. However, the passage detection sensor 74b may be configured with an optical sensor as in Modification 18 of FIG. For example, a light-emitting element 74m (light-emitting unit) configured by an LED and a light-receiving element 74n (light-receiving unit) configured by a phototransistor are disposed opposite to both sides of the launch rail 74. When the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 blocks the light emitted from the light emitting element 74m (passes through the passage detection sensor 74b), a HI level detection signal is output, and the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 emits light. If the light emitted from the element 74m is not blocked (does not pass through the passage detection sensor 74b), a LOW level detection signal may be output. However, also in this case, when the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 blocks light emitted from the light emitting element 74m, a LOW level detection signal is output, and the game ball passing through the launch rail 74 exits from the light emitting element 74m. If the light is not blocked, a HI level detection signal may be output.

  Also in this modified example 22, it can be determined that a return ball has been generated when the period in which the passage detection sensor 74b detects the HI level detection signal is shorter than the firing period. Alternatively, if the time during which the passage detection sensor 74b outputs the detection signal at the HI level is normal time, it is determined that the game ball has been normally launched from the launch position 74w, and the passage detection sensor 74b has the HI level. If the time during which the detection signal is output is longer than the normal time, it can be determined as a return ball. Further, if the passage detection sensor 74b is configured by an optical sensor, the passage detection sensor 74b can be easily brought into a non-contact state with the game ball to be launched. That is, when the passage detection sensor 74b of the first embodiment is used, the game ball passes through the detection hole 74c of the passage detection sensor 74b. However, in the passage detection sensor 74b of the modified example 18, the launch rail 74 is Since it is non-contact with the passing game ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the launched game ball is affected by the passage detection sensor 74b.

(10) Instead of the passage detection sensor 74b of the first embodiment or the modification 18, a modification (a modification of the first embodiment) using a weight sensor for detecting the weight of the launch rail 74 can be exemplified. This weight sensor is provided with a support portion that supports the weight of the launch rail 74 and the weight of the game ball disposed on the launch rail 74, for example, below the launch rail 74. This support portion is assumed to compress and deform in proportion to the weight of the launch rail 74 and the weight of the game ball disposed on the launch rail 74. And a strain gauge is affixed on the surrounding wall part of a support part. This strain gauge is configured using an element that reduces the electrical resistance against strain in the compression direction, and is connected to the MPU 202 configuring the main control board 201 via a bridge circuit (not shown).

  When the support portion is compressed and the strain gauge is distorted, the electrical resistance changes according to the strain amount of the strain gauge. For this reason, the voltage output from the bridge circuit is input to the MPU 202 in accordance with the strain amount of the strain gauge. In the main controller 81, a signal level (hereinafter referred to as a first signal level) when one game ball is mounted on the launch rail 74 is determined in advance, and the first signal level and the bridge circuit The output signal level (hereinafter, second signal level) is compared. When it is determined that a plurality of game balls are mounted on the launch rail 74, it may be determined that a return ball has been generated, and the return ball cancellation process may be executed. Thus, when the weight of the game ball on the launch rail 74 is larger (larger) than the predetermined value by the weight sensor, it may be determined that a return ball has occurred. In this case, the presence or absence of a return ball can be more reliably determined by the weight of the game ball on the launch rail 74. The weight sensor is not particularly limited in its form and structure as long as the weight of the game ball on the launch rail 74 can be measured. For example, a support portion that supports the entire area of the firing rail 74 may be provided below the firing rail 74, and a strain gauge may be provided on the support portion.

(11) In the first embodiment, the launch position 74w of the launch rail 74 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), at a position on the right side below the attachment site of the game board 24, and fired. The rail 74 is gently raised from the right side to the left side and is arranged in an inclined shape (an inclination angle of about 25 to 35). The game ball that has passed through the launch rail 74 is guided to the guide rail portion 5E provided on the left end side of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21). However, as in the comparative example of FIG. 126 (a), the firing rail 574 is located on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21) and below the attachment portion of the game board 24. 21) is provided substantially at the center along the left-right direction (shown by a solid line) or near the left end of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21) (shown by a broken line), and the firing rail 574 has a steep upward slope from the right to the left ( A gaming machine provided at an inclination angle of about 50 to 80 has also been proposed.

  In the firing rail 574, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), a thick portion 574a that is disposed below and has a large thickness and a thin portion 574z that is disposed on the top and has a small thickness are substantially continuous obliquely. The arrangement is arranged. In addition, the rail width excluding the lower end portion side of the launch rail 574 (width orthogonal to the launch direction of the game ball) is a width through which one game ball can pass, but on the lower end side of the thick portion 574a, the rail width Is provided with a reduced diameter portion 574c that gradually narrows downward.

  Near the lower end portion of the reduced diameter portion 574c, the rail width is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball that has entered the firing rail 574 is supported from below by the inner wall surface 574d near the lower end portion of the reduced diameter portion 574c. . That is, this inner wall surface 574d constitutes a specific example of the firing position 574e. The reduced diameter portion 574c includes a left side forming portion 574m disposed on the left side and a right side forming portion 574n disposed on the right side. Further, a striking hole 574f is opened at the lowermost end portion (the lowermost end portion of the firing rail 574) of the reduced diameter portion 574c.

  Further, a striking rod 574g is provided on the right side of the reduced diameter portion 574c on the front surface portion of the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), and the striking rod 574g is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation point 574h. Then, it is possible to hit the game ball in which the hitting bar 574g is supported at the launch position.

  The firing rail 574 has a steep inclination angle and a substantially bag shape in which the firing rail 574 opens upward. For this reason, when a return ball is generated, there is a high possibility that two, three, and four game balls accumulate on the firing rail 574. In particular, when a so-called “choro strike” is attempted by reducing the amount of rotation operation applied to the launch handle 8A, game balls may accumulate on the launch rail 574, and it may be difficult to continue the game. In this case, it is necessary to eliminate game balls in the launch rail 574 manually by a pachinko hall clerk.

  On the other hand, in the modified example 23 (modified example of the first embodiment) shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (b), the lower side of the left side forming portion 574m can be operated in an oblique direction (in a direction substantially orthogonal to the firing direction). The movable portion 574k is operable. And the solenoid 574j which comprises the drive source of this movable part 574k is provided, and the plunger 574p which protrudes from the solenoid 574j is mounted | worn with the movable part 574k. When the solenoid 574j (incorporated coil) is excited, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 574p decreases, and when the excitation of the solenoid 574j (internal coil) is stopped, the amount of protrusion of the plunger 574p increases.

  Further, a passage detection sensor 574b for detecting a game ball passing through the firing rail 574 is provided near the lower end of the thin portion 574z. Various types of the passage detection sensor 574b can be selected. For example, a magnetic detection type proximity sensor exemplified in the first embodiment or the like, an optical sensor exemplified in Modification 18 or the like, a weight sensor, or the like can be used.

  During normal operation (when the game ball is supported at the firing position), as shown in FIG. 127 (a), excitation of the solenoid 574j (built-in coil) is stopped, and the protruding amount of the plunger 574p is reduced. At this time, since the inner wall surface of the movable portion 574k and the inner wall surface of the right-side forming portion 574m become a distance that can hold the game ball (because the distance is smaller than the diameter of the game ball), 574e can be supported. On the other hand, when a reverse running ball is generated (specifically, when the passage detection sensor 574b detects a return ball), as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the solenoid 574j is excited and the protrusion amount of the plunger 574p. Is reduced. For this reason, since the inner wall surface of the movable part 574k and the inner wall surface of the right side forming part 574m exceed the distance that can hold the game ball (because the distance is larger than the diameter of the game ball), the game ball on the launch rail 574 Passes through the upper part of the movable part 574k and is discharged from the lower end of the firing rail 574. Then, it passes through a communication passage (not shown) and is guided to the lower plate 72.

  Thus, according to the modified example 23, since the discharge means (the process of step S1702 performed by the main control device 81 based on the detection result of the passage detection sensor 74b, the solenoid 574j that operates the movable portion 574k, etc.) is provided. Even if the launch rail 574 is disposed at a steep slope or the launch rail 574 has a structure that tends to cause ball clogging, the return ball can be automatically discharged to ensure smooth game progression.

  In the modified example 23, the movable part 574k configured by a part of the thick part 574m is operated to discharge the return ball, but various places can be selected as the movable part 574k. For example, in the thick part 574a, it is comprised by a lower end surface part (bottom part) and the other part (henceforth a main-body part), and the impact hole 574f (refer FIG. 62) is provided in a lower end surface part (bottom part). The lower end surface portion (bottom surface portion) is supported by a hinge or the like with respect to the main body portion, the lower end surface portion (bottom surface portion) is used as a movable portion, and the lower end of the main body portion is closed (however, the impact hole 574f is opened). And a non-use state in which the lower end of the main body portion is opened (however, the striking hole 574f is open). When the passage detection sensor 574b does not detect the return sphere, the solenoid 574j is excited (or the excitation is stopped) to constitute a non-use state, and when the passage detection sensor 574b detects the return sphere. The excitation of the solenoid 574j may be stopped (or excited) to constitute a non-use state.

Furthermore, in the modified example 23, the discharge rail 574 (particularly, the thick portion 574a), the discharge hole through which the game ball can pass (drop) to the portion whose outer peripheral surface faces downward, and the discharge hole are opened and closed. A shutter is provided. When the passage detection sensor 574b does not detect the return ball, the solenoid 574j is excited (or the excitation is stopped), the discharge hole is closed by the shutter, and the passage detection sensor 574b detects the return ball. Alternatively, the excitation of the solenoid 574j may be stopped (or excited), the shutter may be operated, and the discharge hole may be opened.

(12) In the first embodiment and its modification, the drive means (actuator) of the discharge means is configured by a solenoid, but other drive means (actuator) such as a motor may be used. In the first embodiment and its modification, the solenoid is excited when the return ball discharge operation (resolving operation) is executed, and the solenoid is stopped when the return ball discharge operation (resolving operation) is stopped. Although the mode of (de-energized) is exemplified, the solenoid is de-energized when executing the discharge operation (cancellation operation), and the mode of exciting the solenoid when stopping the discharge operation (resolving operation) of the return ball is illustrated. You can also.

(13) In the first embodiment, the end time of the return ball discharge operation (return ball cancellation operation) is uniformly set to “1.8 seconds” after the start of the return ball discharge operation. The end time may be changed depending on whether or not the normal gaming state was established at the start of the operation. That is, in Modification 24 of FIG. 128 (Modification of the first embodiment), when the return ball discharge operation is started, main controller 81 receives “LOW level condition establishment signal when return ball discharge operation starts. "When the player is not touching the firing handle 8A or operating the stop switch 89"), the end time of the return ball discharge operation (return ball cancellation operation) is set as the return ball discharge time. After the operation starts, “1.8 seconds” is set.

  However, if the main control device 81 receives the “HI level condition establishment signal” when the return ball discharge operation is started, “after a time obtained by subtracting a predetermined time from 1.8 seconds has elapsed. The return ball discharge operation (return ball cancellation operation) may end.

  For example, as shown in Modification 24 of FIG. 128, a predetermined firing cycle (hereinafter referred to as a first firing cycle) is started at timing T1, and fired at timing T2 of 0.2 seconds after the start of the first firing cycle. Assuming the action was performed. Then, it is assumed that the canceling operation is started at a timing T3 of 0.3 seconds after the first firing cycle is started. In this case, the firing cycle that should have started after the first firing cycle (hereinafter referred to as the second firing cycle) and the firing cycle that should have started after the second firing cycle. (Hereinafter referred to as the third firing cycle) are executed sequentially, the return ball discharge operation (return ball elimination operation) is finished at the timing T4 when the third launch cycle ends.

  That is, since the main controller 81 continues to receive the HI level condition establishment signal during the first to third firing periods, the canceling operation execution flag is set. The output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. Then, at the timing T4 when the third firing cycle ends, the canceling operation execution flag is canceled, and the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the HI level. Then, the ball feeding operation is performed at the timing T5 when 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the timing T4, and the launching operation is performed at the timing T6 after 0.2 seconds.

  Next, “intra-period elapsed time measurement processing” will be described with reference to FIG. This “in-cycle elapsed time measurement process” is a process for measuring the time from the start of the firing cycle when a predetermined firing cycle is being executed. This “in-period elapsed time measurement process” is performed as the normal process of FIG. 26 and is executed following the process of S509. And if the elapsed time measurement process in a period is performed, it will transfer to the process of step S510. Note that the normal process of the modified example 24 is the same as the normal process of the first embodiment, except that the in-period elapsed time measurement process is added and a part of the return ball elimination process is different.

  Also in the period elapsed time measurement process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the output state of the firing permission signal has been changed (see FIG. 41). That is, when the output state of the firing permission signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level or from the LOW level to the HI level, an affirmative determination is made in step S1901. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1905, where the counter TC5 for measuring elapsed time in the cycle is cleared to “0”.

  Here, the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time within the cycle is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the predetermined firing cycle, and whether the firing cycle starts (whether affirmative determination is made in step S1902 described later). When the output state of the firing permission signal is changed to the HI level (when an affirmative determination is made in step S1901), “0” is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time within the period is “150”. This intra-period elapsed time measurement process is a part of the normal process (FIG. 26). As will be described later, the count value of the intra-period elapsed time counter TC5 is incremented by 1 every 4 msec. Moreover, when the output state of the firing permission signal is the LOW level and the firing cycle has not started, the count value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time within the cycle is “0”. The value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time within the period “150” indicates that 0.6 seconds have elapsed after the start of the predetermined firing cycle (the predetermined firing cycle is ended). Yes. For this reason, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1905, and after clearing “0” of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time in the cycle, the elapsed time measuring process in the cycle is once ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step 1903 to determine whether or not the output state of the firing permission signal is at the LOW level. When the output state of the firing permission signal is LOW level, the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is terminated as it is, and when the output state of the firing permission signal is HI level, The value of the counter TC5 is incremented by “1”, and the in-cycle elapsed time measurement process is terminated.

  Next, the feature of the return ball elimination process of the modified example 24 will be described using FIG. 129 (b). The return ball cancellation process of the modification 18 differs from the return ball cancellation process of the first embodiment in that the process of step S1603B is performed instead of the process of step S1603. In the process of step S1603B as well as the process of step S1603, the process of setting the cancellation operation execution flag, the process of starting the cancellation operation, the process of erasing the return ball flag, and the cancellation operation end timer te are set. Perform the process. However, in the process of step S1603B, the set value of the elimination operation end timer te is selected according to the state of the condition satisfaction signal.

  More specifically, when the condition establishment signal received from the power / fire control device 98 is LOW level (when the player is not touching the launch handle 8A or operating the stop switch 89). , “450 (1.8 seconds)” is set in the elimination operation end timer te. Further, when the condition establishment signal is at the HI level, the value of the counter TC5 for measuring the elapsed time within the period is acquired. Then, after the start of the cycle, a value “450-TC5” is set in the elimination operation end timer te.

  According to the above modification 24, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained. That is, even if the player is touching the launch handle 8A and the stop switch 89 is not operated, even if the canceling operation is started, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. That is, even if the player is touching the firing handle 8A and the canceling operation is started without operating the stop switch 89, the firing operation is paused for a period that is a multiple of the firing cycle (0.6 seconds). Is done.

  A player who has abundant gaming experience feels the firing interval (interval of the firing operation), and remembers that this firing interval is “0.6 seconds”. For this reason, the player who touches the firing handle 8A emits a game ball every time the firing interval (0.6 seconds) elapses, or there is a sound that the foul ball is guided to the lower plate 72. If you don't, you will feel uncomfortable. In the modified example 24, the player who is touching the firing handle 8A is guided to the lower plate 72 in one cycle and two cycles of the firing operation that should be performed periodically during the canceling operation. After that, the firing operation is regularly resumed, so that even if the canceling operation is performed, there is no sense of incongruity. In other words, a player who has touched the firing handle 8A, with the exception that the firing operation is paused several times in the middle, the firing operation is executed with a good rhythm before and after the pause. It is unlikely to have a “different feeling”.

(14) In the modified example 24, the mode of determining the end of the canceling operation according to the situation is illustrated, but the determination method of the end of the canceling operation is not limited to the method shown in the modified example 24. For example, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 9, a sensor 874b that detects a game ball discharged from the launch rail 74 is provided, and the game ball discharged from the sensor 874b is not detected for a certain time (for example, 2 seconds). It may be determined that the discharging operation has been completed. In addition, a launch rail 74 and a weight sensor for detecting the weight of the game ball are provided, and this weight sensor is in a state where the game ball on the launch rail 74 is not detected (a state in which only the weight of the launch rail 74 is detected) and is constant. It may be determined that the discharge operation has been completed after a lapse of time (for example, 2 seconds).

(15) Further, in the first embodiment and the modification thereof, the mode in which the return ball canceling operation is performed automatically is illustrated, but the return ball canceling operation may be started manually based on the player's operation. Good. For example, the return ball elimination operation may be performed by an input action performed by the player on a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine. Here, as the input means, “a contact type input means in which a player touches and performs an input action like a button or the like”, “a non-contact type input means that reacts when the player holds his hand”, “ For example, “voice input means that reacts to the voice of the player” or the like. And when the input timing of an input means comes, you may alert | report (warn) by an alerting | reporting means, or you may prompt the input with respect to an input means. Examples of the input timing include “a timing when a return ball is detected”, “a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed (that is, every predetermined time)”, and the like. Further, in the aspect in which the notification is performed at the “timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed”, for example, a time measuring unit or a real time clock (RTC) may be provided in the main control device 81 and the notification may be performed every time the predetermined time elapses. Here, as the notification means, “notification means using sound from the speaker section 64”, “notification means using display of the symbol display device 41”, “light emitting means (for example, various types around the window section 61) For example, “notification means using a lamp unit”, “notification means using vibration”, and the like. Also, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed based on a time measurement result such as a time measuring means or a real time clock (RTC) (for example, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous cancellation operation) It is good also as performing.

  Furthermore, in an aspect in which the input unit is input to perform the return ball elimination operation, an input action may be performed on the input unit at each of the start and end of the cancellation operation. At this time, the input mode at the start and the input mode at the end may be the same or different. Here, as an input mode of the input unit, for example, when the input unit is a button, an input mode specified by the number of presses or an input mode specified by the type of the button to be pressed (when there are a plurality of buttons) Etc. can be illustrated. Moreover, you may provide the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports completion | finish of the said cancellation | release operation, when the cancellation | release operation of a return ball | bowl is complete | finished. Examples of the notification means include “notification means using sound”, “notification means using display”, “notification means using light emitting means”, “notification means using vibration”, and the like.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that performs an operation of eliminating the return ball by applying an input to the input means, it is not necessary to provide sensors such as the aforementioned passage detection sensors 74b and 574b. Moreover, the aspect which performs the cancellation | release operation of a return ball | bowl by giving an input to an input means is not restricted to 1st Embodiment, It can apply also to other aspects (Modifications 16-22 etc.). For example, in the modified example 17, by applying input to the input means, the lower end side (rear end) 74F of the firing rail 74 rotates clockwise with respect to the hinge 74G, and the game ball F on the firing rail 74 It is good also as discharging.

  In addition, although the aspect which comprises a launch path | route structure means by a launch rail part was illustrated in 1st Embodiment, a launch rail part provided with the groove part which goes up a launch path | route structure means toward a launch direction and passes a game ball in an inclined form, and A specific example may be illustrated that includes a guide rail portion that guides the game ball that has passed through the launch rail portion to the game area. In this specific example, the guide rail portion is provided in the vertical direction on the left side of the game area and receives the game ball that has passed through the firing rail portion at the lower end portion from the end portion along the firing direction. You may comprise by the clearance gap part provided between the edge part along the discharge direction of a discharge rail part, and a guide rail part. In this case, the game ball that runs backward in the direction opposite to the launch direction of the guide rail portion can be discharged by the gap portion. In this case, the groove portion of the launch rail portion is arranged at an inclination angle of 25 degrees to 35 degrees toward the launch direction, and the lower end portion of the guide rail portion is substantially the same as the tilt angle along the launch direction of the groove portion. May be provided. In this case, since the launch rail portion is not arranged at a steep slope, a phenomenon in which a plurality of game balls accumulate on the launch rail portion (ball pool phenomenon) can be made difficult to occur.

(Fifth embodiment)
The fifth embodiment also shows a modification of the first embodiment. Also in the fifth embodiment, an example of the “pachinko machine” will be described in detail based on the drawings. This pachinko machine 10 changes the mode of the launch rail 674 so that the return ball discharge operation (return ball cancellation operation) can be executed without electrical control. In the fifth embodiment, FIGS. 1 to 4 are used as they are, but for the sake of convenience, the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment is represented as “pachinko machine 10” for the sake of distinction from the pachinko machine of the other embodiments. (See parentheses in FIGS. 1-4).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment includes an outer frame 11, a gaming machine main body 12, and a game board 24 similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The “configuration of the front door frame 14” and the “configuration of the back side” of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are the “configuration of the front door frame 14” and “the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is the same. And about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  Hereinafter, the features of the firing rail 674 of the fifth embodiment will be mainly described. Here, FIGS. 130 (a) and (b) are schematic plan views for showing the firing rail 674, FIG. 131 (a) is a sectional view taken along line 5-5 in FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is shown. It is 6-6 sectional drawing of Fig.130 (a). FIG. 130 (a) shows how the game ball moves on the firing rail 674 in the firing direction, and FIG. 130 (b) shows how the game ball moves on the firing rail 674 in the direction opposite to the firing direction. .

  As shown in FIG. 131A, the firing rail 674 of the fifth embodiment includes a resin pedestal portion 674a and an exterior portion 674b that covers the pedestal portion 674a. The exterior portion 674b is formed by bending an aluminum plate into a substantially M shape, and covers the front surface portion, the upper surface portion, and the back surface portion of the pedestal portion 674a. The upper surface of the pedestal 674a is covered, and a groove 674c on which a game ball is mounted and fired is configured by a portion having a substantially V-shaped longitudinal section (longitudinal section of the pachinko machine 10 longitudinally). And the firing position 674W is comprised by the lower end part side of this groove part 674c (refer FIG. 130). In the first embodiment, the structure and the like of the firing rail 74 are briefly described. However, the firing rail 74 of the first embodiment also covers the pedestal portion and the pedestal portion like the firing rail 674 of the fifth embodiment. The exterior part is formed by bending an aluminum plate into a substantially M shape, and covers the front part, the upper part and the rear part of the pedestal part. Further, a groove portion 674c on which a game ball is mounted and fired is constituted by a portion that covers the upper surface portion of the pedestal portion and whose longitudinal section (longitudinal section that longitudinally cuts the pachinko machine 10 in the longitudinal direction) is substantially V-shaped. The firing position 674W is constituted by the lower end side of the.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the groove 674c has a pair of edges (a pair of edges along the longitudinal direction) 674d and 674e along the firing direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the groove 674c includes a notch 674f in the vicinity of the firing position 674W. The notch 674f is provided from a part of the rear edge 674d of the pair of edges 674d and 674e toward the vicinity of the groove bottom 674g.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the groove portion 674c has a front inclined portion 674j that is inclined upward from the groove bottom portion 674g toward the front of the gaming machine 10 (see arrow FR in the drawing), and the rear of the gaming machine 10. And a rear inclined portion 674k that is inclined upward. As shown in FIG. 131 (b), the notch 674f is provided by notching a part of the rear inclined portion 674k (near the launch position 674W) to the vicinity of the groove bottom 674g. In the following description, for convenience, a portion of the firing rail 674 that is not provided with the notch 674f is referred to as a complete rail portion 674A, and a portion that is provided with the notch 674f is referred to as an incomplete rail portion 674B. .

  The vicinity of the launch position 674W is, for example, a case where the edge on the launch position 674W side of the notch 674f is a distance 1.5 to 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball from the launch position 674W. The vicinity of the groove bottom portion 674g is an edge along the firing direction of the cutout portion 674f, and an edge close to the groove bottom portion 674g is 0.1 to 0 times the diameter of the game ball from the groove bottom portion 674g. .It refers to the case where the distance is twice (1.1 to 2.2 mm). Furthermore, the case where the width | variety along the firing direction of the notch part 674f is 1.5 times-2.5 times the diameter of a game ball can be illustrated.

  As described above, the groove 674c of the firing rail 674 includes the front inclined portion 674j and the rear inclined portion 674k. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the complete rail portion 674A, the front inclined portion 674j and the rear inclined portion 674k are arranged symmetrically with the groove bottom portion 674d interposed therebetween. However, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the incomplete rail portion 674B, the rear inclined portion 674k is shorter than the front inclined portion 674f. As for the forward inclined portion 674f, the complete rail portion 674A and the incomplete rail portion 674B have the same size.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the complete rail portion 674A, a groove portion 674c having a substantially V-shaped cross section composed of a front inclined portion 674j and a rear inclined portion 674k has a "approximately 1 / Accept part 4 ”. At this time, the front inclined portion 674j and the rear inclined portion 674k have the same size, and the game balls passing through the groove portion 674c can be uniformly supported from the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the incomplete rail portion 674B, the length of the rear inclined portion 674j (length from the groove bottom portion 674g to the edge) is the length of the front inclined portion 674k (groove bottom portion 674g). To the end edge). For this reason, the groove part 674c of the incomplete rail part 674B becomes a substantially cross-sectional L shape, and can accept the game ball F. However, the game balls passing through the groove 674c cannot be supported evenly from the front-rear direction. Note that the length of the rear inclined portion 674k constituting the incomplete rail portion 674B is set to about “1/4” of the length of the front inclined portion 674j.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), a portion located below and behind the notch portion 674f in the pedestal portion 674a constituting the firing rail 674 and a portion located behind the notch portion 674f in the exterior portion 674b. However, it constitutes a recess 675a into which a game ball can enter. Further, in the base member 678, an opening 678b is provided in a portion located behind the recess 675a, and in the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), a recess 21b is provided in a portion located behind the opening 678b. The space 675a, the opening 678b, and the recess 21b communicate with each other to form a discharge passage 675h that can discharge the game ball toward the lower plate 72. The means for discharging the return ball from the firing rail 674 is not limited to the discharge passage 675h. For example, it may be a discharge passage that discharges the return ball directly below the firing rail 674.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the game ball F disposed at the firing position 674W of the firing rail 674 is supported by the support member 677 disposed obliquely rearward, and is fixed to the firing position 674W. That is, a screw (not shown) inserted in a mounting hole (not shown) penetrating the support member 677 in the front-rear direction is screwed to the base member 678 to be fixed to the base member 678. However, since the mounting hole (not shown) of the support member 677 is a long hole, the mounting position of the support member 677 with respect to the base member 678 can be finely adjusted by loosening the screwed screw (not shown). Can do.

  When the game ball F at the launch position 674W is launched by the launching device 675 in a state where there is no return ball on the launch rail 674, the game ball F passes through the launch rail 674 and reaches the guide rail portion 5E (see FIG. 7). That is, the game ball F that is launched from the launch position 674W includes a complete rail portion 674A (a lower side of the launch rail 674 than the notch portion 674f), an incomplete rail portion 674B (a portion where the notch portion 674f is formed), It passes in the order of the complete rail portion 674A (above the firing rail 674 relative to the notch portion 674f). At this time, since the return ball does not exist on the launch rail 674 and the game ball F launched from the launch position 674W has momentum (because the ball speed is fast), a notch 674f is provided in the middle of the launch rail 674. Despite the presence, the game ball F passes through the launch rail 674 and reaches the guide rail portion 5E.

  That is, the game balls F launched from the launch position 674W are supported uniformly from the front-rear direction in the complete rail portion 674A, and thus pass through the complete rail portion 674A in a stable state. Further, the game balls F launched from the launch position 674W are not evenly supported from the front-rear direction in the incomplete rail portion 674B. Passes through the incomplete rail portion 674B without falling toward the center.

  The game ball F launched from the launch position 674W together with the return ball in the state where the return ball runs backward on the launch rail 674 or the return ball exists on the launch rail 674 has no momentum (because the ball speed is slow). There is a high possibility of falling toward the notch 674f. That is, as shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the game ball F is not evenly supported from the front-rear direction in the incomplete rail portion 674B, and thus may fall toward the notch portion 674f. Is expensive. For example, a game ball without momentum loses balance (front-rear balance) when passing through the incomplete rail portion 674B, and is likely to fall toward the notch portion 674f.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the return ball reciprocates on the firing rail 674, and the momentum of the return ball is further reduced by increasing the number of return balls. In the case of weakening, there is a higher possibility that the return ball will fall toward the notch 674f.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, “Electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)”, “Display contents of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 17)”, “Various counters (FIG. 18)”, “Attack table (FIG. 19)” ”,“ Destination of game results for jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 20) ”,“ Matters related to reach display (reach state) ”,“ Reserved ball storage area 232 (FIG. 21) ”,“ Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22) To FIG. 25) ”is the same as in the first embodiment. However, in the “electrical configuration (FIGS. 15 and 16)” of the fifth embodiment, the passage detection sensor 74b and the solenoid 77a (the driving source of the support member) are not required. In the “normal process” of the fifth embodiment, the “return ball detection process” and the “return ball cancellation process” are not executed and the contents of the “game ball launch control process” are different from those of the first embodiment. This is the same as the “normal processing” in the form.

  That is, the “game ball launch control process” of the fifth embodiment is the same as the “game ball launch control process (FIG. 42)” of the first embodiment, except that the process of step S1702 is omitted. The “fire control process” of the fifth embodiment is the same as the “fire control process” of the first embodiment.

  According to the fifth embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment. In other words, according to the fifth embodiment, it is not necessary to drive the support member 77 by the “drive source (solenoid 77a or the like of the first embodiment)” or to perform electrical control to process the return ball. The mechanical structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

  Also, according to the fifth embodiment, a large number of return balls accumulate on the launch rail 674, and the return balls that have lost momentum move on the launch rail 674 and are discharged from the notch 674f. Smoothness can be secured. Furthermore, according to the fifth embodiment, since the discharge means (notch portion 674f) is provided, even if the launch rail 674 is arranged at a steep slope or the launch rail 674 has a structure that easily causes ball clogging, The return ball can be discharged smoothly to ensure a smooth game progression. In the fifth embodiment, the incomplete rail portion 674B may be provided with a discharge port including the groove bottom 674g, and the return ball may be dropped from the discharge port. However, when a discharge port is provided, a step occurs at the discharge port portion in the incomplete rail portion 674B, and a game ball (normal launch ball) disposed at the launch position 674W in a state where there is no return ball on the launch rail 674 , May be affected by the outlet. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the incomplete rail portion 674B includes the groove bottom portion 674g and the short rear inclined portion 674j, so that a normal launch ball can be launched in a stable state.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 5th Embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment other than the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(1) In 5th Embodiment, as shown in the modification 25 of FIG.132 (b), the protrusion part 674s of the back inclination part 674g which comprises the incomplete rail part 674B may be rounded. According to the modified example 25, the discharge (induction to the notch 674f) can be performed more smoothly.

(2) As a modified example of the fifth embodiment, a method of processing a return ball using a support member 7L that can be operated without requiring electric power can be exemplified. For example, as shown in Modification 26 in FIG. 133 (a), the return ball may be processed by operating the support member 7L using the biasing force of the biasing means 7H (for example, a coil spring). That is, in the modified example 26, the support member 7L is movable left and right along the guides 7P and 7P disposed above and below the support member 7L. That is, the support member 7L is movable left and right while sliding the outer peripheral surface of the right portion 7M on the guides 7P and 7P. Further, an urging means 7H is disposed between the right portion 7M of the support member 7L and the wall portion 7J disposed on the right side thereof. Furthermore, the left portion 7N of the support member 7L is located on the left side of the guides 7P and 7P.

  The left end portion of the support member 7L can support the game ball supplied from the ball feeder 76 at the launch position 74W. That is, if there is one game ball present on the launch rail 74 (launch position 74W), the left portion 7N of the support member 7L is placed on the right side of the guides 7P and 7P (a single game ball at the launch position 74W). Projecting by the amount necessary to support the However, the urging force of the urging means 7H is set so that “one game ball can be supported but two or more game balls cannot be supported (moves in the right direction)”. Yes. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), when a return ball is generated on the launch rail 74 and a plurality of game balls are arranged on the launch rail 74, a plurality of game balls are placed on the support member 7L. Since the weight is loaded, the support member 7L moves to the right along the guides 7P and 7P. Then, since the empty space is created as much as the support member 7L moves to the left side, the game ball on the firing rail 74 is discharged from the lower end of the firing rail 74.

  According to the modified example 26, since the electrical control is not used to process the return ball as in the fifth embodiment, the mechanical structure of the pachinko machine is not complicated, and the control device that constitutes the pachinko machine is used. The control burden can be reduced. In the modified example 26, when there are a plurality of game balls on the firing rail 74 and the support member 7L moves in the right direction, all the game balls existing on the launch rail 74 are removed from the launch rail 74. One game ball may be left on the launch rail 74 and the other game balls may be ejected from the launch rail 74. Further, in the modified example 26, the mode in which the support member 7L moves in the left-right direction is illustrated (the mode in which the support member 7L appears in the left-right direction from the guides 7P, 7P). Or you may. Further, in the aspect that appears in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, similarly to the first embodiment, a predetermined actuator (drive means) that drives the support member 7L and a drive control means are provided, and the predetermined detection means uses a return ball. When detected, the support member 7L may be driven to discharge the return ball from the firing rail 74.

(3) In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, since the notch 674f is provided in the rear inclined portion 674j, the game ball (return ball) is discharged backward (in a direction away from the player). Can do. However, the notch 674f may be provided in the front inclined portion 674j or may be provided in the groove bottom 674g.

(4) In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the notch portion 674f is kept open all the time, and the return ball enters the notch portion 674f without touching the return ball. The structure discharged | emitted from the discharge channel 675h was illustrated. However, as shown in Modification 27 shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, an opening / closing member 674n for opening / closing a discharge portion (notch portion 674f or opening) for discharging the return ball may be provided. Here, the opening / closing member 674n of the modified example 27 includes a main body portion 674p and a base portion 674q arranged in an inclined manner.

  A solenoid 674r that constitutes a driving means is attached to the opening / closing member 674n. That is, a part of the plunger 674s protrudes from the solenoid 674r, and the opening / closing member 674n is attached to the protruding end of the plunger 674s. When the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is excited, the protruding amount of the plunger 674s decreases, and when the excitation of the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is stopped, the protruding amount of the plunger 674s increases. The solenoid 674r is connected to a main control device 81 as drive control means. In the modification 27, a solenoid is exemplified as a driving unit for driving the opening / closing member 674n, but the mode of the driving unit is not limited to the solenoid. For example, other actuators such as a motor can be used.

  When normal (when the game ball is supported at the firing position 74W), as shown in FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a), the excitation of the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is stopped, and the plunger 674s The amount of protrusion is increased. At this time, the notch 674f is closed by fitting the main body 674p into the notch 674f. Further, when the main body portion 674p is fitted into the notch portion 674f, the upper surface of the main body portion 674p is flush with the upper surface of the groove portion 674c. Then, the game ball moving on the firing rail 674 does not enter the cutout portion 674f and is held on the firing rail 674.

  On the other hand, when the game ball on the launch rail 674 is to enter the discharge passage 675h through the notch 674f, the solenoid 674r is excited. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b), the protruding amount of the plunger 674s decreases, and the opening / closing member 674n moves rearward, so that the notch 674f is opened.

  According to the modification 27, for example, when the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 determines that no return ball is generated, the excitation of the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is stopped and the notch 674f is closed. State. On the other hand, when the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 determines that a return ball has been generated, the solenoid 674r (built-in coil) is excited and the notch 674f is opened.

  In Modification 27, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the fifth embodiment. That is, when a return ball is not generated and a normal launch is to be performed by the launching device 675, the notch 674f is closed, so that the game ball launched by the launching device 675 is accidentally cut. A situation such as entering the notch 674f can be reliably prevented. Further, when a return ball is generated, the notch portion 674f is opened, so that the return ball can enter the notch portion 674f to be processed. That is, the notch 674f can be opened and closed flexibly.

(5) In the modification 27, the mode in which the opening / closing member 674n is electrically driven and controlled is illustrated, but the opening / closing member 674n may be manually driven based on the player's operation. For example, the return ball elimination operation may be performed by an input action performed by the player on a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine. Here, as the input means, “a contact type input means in which a player touches and performs an input action like a button or the like”, “a non-contact type input means that reacts when the player holds his hand”, “ For example, “voice input means that reacts to the voice of the player” or the like. And when the input timing of an input means comes, you may alert | report (warn) by an alerting | reporting means, or you may prompt the input with respect to an input means.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the allocated information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the grant determination target special information corresponds to the grant information;
Identification information change that starts display of change of identification information based on the result of the assignment determination, ends the change display when a predetermined change time elapses, and displays the result of assignment determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information Means (for example, first result display section AS, second result display section BS);
For the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, first pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, First pre-identification means for identifying the predetermined special information before being subject to the grant determination;
First suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first prior determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the special information that is the specific target;
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specifying means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before the change display ends or before the end of the change display (for example, the first suggestion effect is produced by an effect device such as the symbol display device 41, the display lamp unit 63, the speaker unit 64, or the like). Executing) first suggestion effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
When it is displayed that the special information is a grant non-correspondence result that does not correspond to the grant information according to the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified by the first prior specification means, In a case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, a selection unit that preferentially selects special information that does not have the lowest determination probability from the stored special information;
When the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination, the second prior specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result, the selected special information is the target of the grant determination A second pre-identifying means for identifying before
Second suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect indicating the content of the second prior determination information based on a determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
If the second suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the second suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display And a second suggestion effect executing means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of.

  The feature A1 is a feature extracted from the first to third embodiments. According to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) of this feature A1, the second suggestion effect execution decision means has a decision probability based on the type of special information (such as jackpot hold information, reach hold information, non-reach hold information, etc.), and the first suggestion It is determined whether or not to produce an effect (notice effect). And even if it performs the 1st suggestion effect (notice effect), when a non-assignment result (disappearance result) is displayed, the kind about special information (acquired information) already stored in the acquisition information storage means Whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is determined with a determination probability based on the jackpot hold information, reach hold information, non-reach hold information, or the like.

  The decision whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is given priority to special information whose decision probability is not lowest among the special information (acquired information) already stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, the second suggestion effect can be executed with high frequency. For example, when the special information is “hold information corresponding to the determination result (for example, jackpot hold information)”, the first suggestion effect (notice effect) or the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) may be executed. The probability of determination (that is, the determination probability) is increased (high-ranking hold information). Here, in this specification, for example, “indicating the possibility of being determined as an assignment determination result” includes, for example, “notifying that the assignment determination result is confirmed (100%)”, “ Notifying the presence / absence of a possibility of being a determination result ”,“ notifying that the possibility of a determination result is A% (where A is an arbitrary value selected from 0 to 100). The possibility of becoming a grant determination result through direct notification of the possibility of a grant determination result such as “to do” and “applying an appearance or a cater to appear when it becomes a grant determination result” Is indirectly notified, or both.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of “holding information indicating the grant determination result” and there are superiority and inferiority in the plurality of holding information, the higher-ranking holding information is further ranked in an advantageous order. The “decision probability” may be increased. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot results that generate a high-frequency winning mode, but if one of these jackpot results occurs, the success / failure lottery mode becomes a high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and if another jackpot result occurs, it opens / closes When the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the execution mode ends, the hold information (special information) that generates one jackpot result that leads to the high probability mode is different from the other jackpot result that leads to the low probability mode. The rank may be higher than the hold information (special information) to be generated (hereinafter referred to as the first mode). Similarly, if there are multiple types of jackpot results that generate a high-frequency winning mode, but the number of open / close execution modes (rounds) that are executed after generating the jackpot result is different, the number of rounds that are open / closed is high. The hold information (special information) that generates the jackpot result associated with the mode may be set higher (hereinafter referred to as the second mode). In addition, there are multiple types of jackpot results that generate a high-frequency winning mode, but if one of these results is generated, it is a jackpot result that the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the jackpot result is generated, if the support mode is a jackpot result that becomes the low-frequency support mode, the hold information (special information) that generates one jackpot result linked to the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode. The ranking may be higher than the hold information (special information) that generates other jackpot results to be linked (hereinafter referred to as a third mode). Any two or three of the first to third aspects can be combined.

  The probability that the first suggestion effect (notice effect) or the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is determined to be executed (that is, the determination probability) can be determined as follows, for example. It is the same in the case of “holding information indicating the assignment determination result” (hereinafter referred to as the former case) and in the case of “holding information indicating the assignment non-determination result” (hereinafter referred to as the latter case). There is a possibility that a change display of the aspect (for example, reach) (change display of the identification pending information) may be executed, but in the case of “the former” is higher than the “case of the latter” The hold information (special information) linked to the mode (for example, reach) may be ranked higher than the hold information not linked to the mode (non-reach not linked to reach in the change display). Furthermore, the possibility of appearing along with the “change display associated with the grant determination result (so-called jackpot fluctuation)” in the aspect (for example, reach) is the “change display associated with the non-given determination result (so-called failure”). When there is an aspect (for example, super reach) that is higher than the possibility of appearing along with “variation” ”, an aspect that is likely to appear with the“ change display (so-called jackpot fluctuation) linked to the grant determination result ”(for example, (Super reach) may be ranked higher than other modes (normal reach).

Feature A2.
The game machine according to Feature A1, wherein the special information with which the decision probability is not lowest is the grant information.

  In the feature A2, the special information preferentially selected by the selecting means is “given information” having a high probability (decision probability) for determining execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the highest), so the second suggestion effect Can be executed more frequently.

Feature A3.
The first suggestion effect is based on the special information already stored in the acquisition information storage means when the special information targeted by the first prior specification means is stored in the acquisition information storage means. Based on at least the already stored special information of the change display of the identification hold information to be executed and the change display of the identification hold information related to the special information which is the specific target of the first prior identification means Executed with the change display of identification hold information to be executed,
The second suggestion effect is an identification suspension executed based on the special information previously stored in the acquisition information storage means when the special information selected by the selection means is stored in the acquisition information storage means Along with the change display of identification hold information executed based on at least the previously stored special information among the change display of information and the change display of the identification hold information related to the special information selected by the selection means The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  The feature A3 is that the display result in the game times (hereinafter referred to as the target game times) executed based on the hold information that is the target of the notice effect, and the contents of the effects executed in accordance with the target game times are obtained from the target game times. Alternatively, it may be performed only during the execution of the previously started game times (hereinafter referred to as “previous game times”), or the notice effect may be performed in accordance with the prior game times and the target game times (the variation).

Feature A4.
The acquisition condition is established based on the game ball entering the first start entrance portion (upper operation port 33) or the second start entrance portion (lower operation port 34),
As the acquisition information storage means,
A first acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a first prescribed number when a game ball enters the first starting entrance portion (upper working port 33); ,
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a second prescribed number when a game ball enters the second starting entry portion (lower operating port 34); ,
With
Any one of the features A1 to A3, wherein the transition determination unit makes the determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  The feature A4 is a feature extracted from the first embodiment to the second embodiment described above. In other words, the holding information (first holding information) acquired based on the entering to the first starting entrance part (upper operating port 33) and the entrance to the second starting entrance part (lower operating port 34) Even in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) that distinguishes the hold information (second hold information) acquired based on it, when the acquired information (first hold information, second hold information) is generated, the second suggestion effect is increased. Can be run at a frequency. In the feature A4, when special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit, it is stored in one of the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit. The special information may be processed prior to the special information stored on the other side (game processing such as grant determination or game times). In particular, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it is easy to enter the second start ball entering portion (lower operating port 34), and when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the second start When it is difficult to enter the entrance part (lower operating port 34) or when it is substantially impossible to enter, special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit. If it is, it is meaningful to process the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit in preference to the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit.

  Moreover, it is good also as processing in the order which memorize | stored the special information irrespective of whether the special information is memorize | stored in the 1st acquisition information storage means and the 2nd acquisition information storage means.

Feature A5.
A first entrance part into which a game ball can enter and a second entrance part different from the first entrance part;
Distribution means capable of alternately distributing the destinations of the game balls that have passed through a predetermined entrance to the first entrance part and the second entrance part,
Comprising
As the acquisition information storage means,
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with the first specified number as an upper limit when a game ball enters the first entrance section (first entrance section 62a). When,
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with the second prescribed number as an upper limit when a game ball enters the second entrance section (second entrance section 62b). When,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, comprising:

  The feature A5 is a feature extracted from the third embodiment described above. That is, the holding information (first holding information) based on the entering to the first entering part (first entering part 62a) and the entering to the second entering part (second entering part 62b). Since the hold information (second hold information) can be obtained alternately, the number of acquired information (first hold information, second hold information) is likely to increase particularly. For this reason, in the gaming machine having the characteristics described in any of the characteristics A1 to A3, the second suggestion effect can be executed with high frequency.

  In the feature A5, the transition determination unit may perform the assignment determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit.

Feature A6.
The second suggestion effect execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect before the change display of the identification pending information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein:

  A feature A6 is a feature extracted from the first to third embodiments described above, and specifically indicates a time when it is determined whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect.

Feature A7.
The second suggestion effect execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect before the end of the change display of the identification pending information based on the special information selected by the selection means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein:

  The feature 7 also specifically indicates the time for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect. In this case, since the determination time is later than the above-described A5 and more acquired information may be stored, the probability that the second suggestion effect is executed can be further increased.

Feature A8.
Variable entry means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state of an opening through which a game ball can enter;
Variable entrance control means for switching to the closed state after changing the state of the variable entrance means to the open state;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
With
The privilege granted by the privilege grant means is:
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means being the grant correspondence result, the privilege non-grant which includes maintaining the gaming state of the gaming machine in the closed state of the variable pitching means From a state, after changing the state of the variable pitching means to an open chain state, it is a privilege to shift to a privilege grant state that includes performing a predetermined number of times to return to the closed state,
In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege grant state to the privilege non-grant state, from among the stored special information A second selection unit that preferentially selects special information that does not have the lowest determination probability; and the grant determination result when the special information selected by the second selection unit is the target of the grant determination. Third pre-identifying means for identifying the third pre-identifying information indicating sex before the selected special information is subject to the determination of grant,
Third suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute a third suggestion effect indicating the content of the third prior determination information based on a determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
When the third suggestion effect execution determining unit determines to execute the third suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection unit is started, or the change display The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, further comprising: third suggestion effect executing means for executing the third suggestion effect before the end of the game.

  In feature A8, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege grant state to the privilege non-grant state, the third suggestion effect (third notice effect) is provided in the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Since there is a possibility that it will be executed, the suggestion effect can be executed even more frequently.

Feature A9.
The second suggestion effect executing means is
When it is displayed that the special information is a grant non-correspondence result that does not correspond to the grant information according to the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified by the first prior specification means, Based on the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the second suggestion effect is executed, and
In the case of providing special information stored after the predetermined special information as special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the second suggestion effect being executed is changed to a second suggestion effect based on the special information stored later.

  In the feature A9, since the second suggestion effect being executed is replaced with the second suggestion effect having other contents, the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

Feature B1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the allocated information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the grant determination target special information corresponds to the grant information;
Identification information change that starts display of change of identification information based on the result of the assignment determination, ends the change display when a predetermined change time elapses, and displays the result of assignment determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information Means (for example, first result display section AS, second result display section BS);
For the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, first pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, First pre-identification means for identifying the predetermined special information before being subject to the grant determination;
First suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first prior determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the special information that is the specific target;
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specifying means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before the change display ends or before the end of the change display (for example, the first suggestion effect is produced by an effect device such as the symbol display device 41, the display lamp unit 63, the speaker unit 64, or the like). Executing) first suggestion effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
A case in which special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit when the result of the determination of grant is displayed according to the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information targeted by the first prior identification unit. The selection means for preferentially selecting the special information whose decision probability is not lowest from the stored special information, and the grant when the special information selected by the selection means is the subject of the grant determination Second pre-identification means for identifying the second pre-identification information indicating the possibility of being determined as a determination result before the selected special information is subject to the determination of grant,
Second suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect indicating the content of the second prior determination information based on a determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
If the second suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the second suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display And a second suggestion effect executing means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of.

  In the feature B1, whether the change display result of the identification pending information based on the special information that has been specified by the first prior specification means is an assignment non-correspondence result (outgoing result) or an assignment correspondence result (a jackpot result) Regardless of the fact, there is a possibility that the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) may be executed, so the second suggestion effect can be executed more frequently. In addition, in the case of an assignment correspondence result (a jackpot result), since there is a possibility that the second suggestion effect (second notice effect) is executed, so-called “continuous change” can be notified. Note that the gaming machine having the feature B1 may have the features A2 to A7 described above.

Feature B2.
Variable entry means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state of an opening through which a game ball can enter;
Variable entrance control means for switching to the closed state after changing the state of the variable entrance means to the open state;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the allocated information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be granted corresponds to the grant information, the gaming state of the gaming machine is changed to the variable pitching means. A privilege including performing a predetermined number of times of returning the closed state to the closed state after setting the state of the variable pitching means from the privilege non-granting state including maintaining the state of the vehicle to the closed state Privilege granting means for shifting to the granting state;
Identification information change that starts display of change of identification information based on the result of the assignment determination, ends the change display when a predetermined change time elapses, and displays the result of assignment determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information Means (for example, first result display section AS, second result display section BS);
For the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, first pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, First pre-identification means for identifying the predetermined special information before being subject to the grant determination;
First suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first prior determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the special information that is the specific target;
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specifying means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before the change display ends or before the end of the change display (for example, the first suggestion effect is produced by an effect device such as the symbol display device 41, the display lamp unit 63, the speaker unit 64, or the like). Executing) first suggestion effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege grant state to the privilege non-grant state, from among the stored special information A selection unit that preferentially selects special information that does not have the lowest decision probability, and a possibility that the special determination information selected by the selection unit is determined to be the determination result when the determination is performed. 3 pre-specifying means for specifying the prior specific information before the selected special information is subject to the grant determination;
Third suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute a third suggestion effect indicating the content of the third prior determination information based on a determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
When the third suggestion effect execution determining unit determines to execute the third suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection unit is started, or the change display And third suggestion effect executing means for executing the third suggestion effect before the end of.

  In feature B2, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is returned from the privilege grant state to the privilege non-grant state, the third suggestion effect (third notice) The third suggestive effect can be executed more frequently because there is a possibility that the effect) will be executed. Note that the gaming machine of the feature B2 has the “selecting means” of the feature A1, the “second pre-identifying means” of the feature A1, the “second suggestion effect execution determining means” of the feature A1, and the “second” of the feature A1. You may provide the suggestion production | presentation execution means. In this case, at least one of the features A1 to A6 may be provided.

Feature C1.
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the allocated information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the grant determination target special information corresponds to the grant information;
Identification information change that starts display of change of identification information based on the result of the assignment determination, ends the change display when a predetermined change time elapses, and displays the result of assignment determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information Means (for example, first result display section AS, second result display section BS);
For the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, first pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, First pre-identification means for identifying the predetermined special information before being subject to the grant determination;
Whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect that suggests the content of the first prior specific information, the change display of the identification information that is executed based on the type of the special information that is the specific target corresponds to the determination result. First suggestion effect execution determination means for determining according to the degree of expectation (rank);
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specifying means is started. The first suggestion effect is executed before the change display ends or before the end of the change display (for example, the first suggestion effect is produced by an effect device such as the symbol display device 41, the display lamp unit 63, the speaker unit 64, or the like). Executing) first suggestion effect execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
When it is displayed that the special information is a grant non-correspondence result that does not correspond to the grant information according to the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified by the first prior specification means, In a case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, a selection unit that preferentially selects special information that does not have the lowest determination probability from the stored special information;
When the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination, the second prior specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result, the selected special information is the target of the grant determination A second pre-identifying means for identifying before
Whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect that suggests the content of the second event specific information, the change display of the identification pending information that is executed based on the type of the selected special information is expected level (rank) ) In accordance with the second suggestion effect execution determination means,
Second suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect indicating the content of the second prior specific information based on the determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
If the second suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the second suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display And a second suggestion effect executing means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of.

  The feature C1 is a feature extracted from the first to third embodiments. According to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) of this feature C1, since the selection means preferentially selects one special information according to the above-mentioned expectation (rank), the same effect as the above-described feature A1 is obtained. can get. For example, in the gaming machine having the characteristic C1, it may be determined whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect in the order of expectation (rank). However, if there are multiple types of special information that is the result of grant determination and there is superiority or inferiority among the multiple types of special information (for example, if one has multiple types of jackpot results that generate a high-frequency winning mode) Even if it is the same rank, one may be higher rank than the other. For example, holding information (hereinafter, referred to as high probability distinction information) that is a jackpot result that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When holding information (hereinafter referred to as low probability information) is provided, it may be ranked higher than the former or the latter. However, in this case, since the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is generated in all cases, the selection means preferentially selects the special information that is early in the acquisition order from among the high-accuracy information and the low-accuracy information. Alternatively, special information having a higher rank may be selected preferentially. Note that the gaming machine having the feature C1 may have the features A2 to A7 described above.

Feature D1.
A game area provided on the game board;
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75);
A launch path configuration means for configuring a launch path of a game ball;
With
A gaming machine launched using the launching means passes through the launch path constituting means in a predetermined launch direction, reaches the game area and flows down,
A gaming machine comprising discharge means for discharging a game ball that has run backward in the direction opposite to the launch direction from the launch path constituting means, from the launch path constituting means.

  The feature D1 is a feature extracted from the first to fifth embodiments. According to the gaming machine of this feature D1, the game ball that has run backward in the direction opposite to the firing direction can be discharged by the discharge means.

  Here, the discharge means (a) is configured mainly with a movable member, and by moving the movable member, it is possible to discharge the game ball that has run backward through the launch path configuring means to the outside of the launch path configuring means (first 1b), (b) a discharge part (opening or notch) provided in the launch path constituting means and capable of discharging the game ball that has run backward through the launch path constituting means to the outside of the launch path constituting means. What constitutes (see the fifth embodiment, etc.) can be exemplified. In addition, the game ball on the launch path forming unit is discharged by the discharge unit, and the game ball can be guided to the discharge path, for example. Then, for example, the game ball guided to the discharge path can be discharged to a lower plate or discharged outside the game machine. That is, the game ball (such as a return ball) on the launch path forming unit can be discharged toward the discharge path instead of the path toward the game area (for example, the guide rail portion 5E described above). That is, in the feature D1, “discharge the game ball by the discharge means” means, for example, that “the game ball on the launch path forming means” cannot reach the game area in a direction other than the “guide rail portion 5E” described above. To discharge to the route). Further, examples of the launching path include “substantially linear path”, “substantially arcuate path”, “path combining substantially linear path and substantially arcuate path”, and the like.

Feature D2.
A detecting means for detecting the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means;
The discharge means performs a predetermined operation based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is a predetermined state different from a normal state, The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the game ball on the firing path configuring means can be discharged out of the firing path configuring means.

  According to the feature D2, on the basis of the detection result of the detection means being in a predetermined state, the discharge means may discharge the game ball (return ball) that has run backward through the launch path configuration means to the outside of the launch path configuration means. it can. Here, as the “predetermined state”, for example, (1) “the interval at which the detecting means detects the game ball” is shorter than usual (see the first embodiment), and (2) “the detecting means is a game. A state in which the “time for detecting a sphere” is longer than usual can be exemplified (see the modification 11 in FIG. 113B). In addition, two detection means are provided along the passing direction of the game ball in the launch path constituting means (launch rail 74), and the return ball depends on which of the two detection means detects the game ball first. Can also be determined (see Modification 13 in FIG. 114, Modification 14 in FIG. 115, etc.). That is, when the game balls launched by the launching unit are normally detected in the order of the first detection unit and the second detection unit, the game balls are detected in the order of the second detection unit and the first detection unit. Is a “predetermined state”.

Feature D3.
The discharging means is
Support means (support member 77 shown in FIG. 9 and the like) capable of supporting a game ball disposed at a launch position provided in the launch path constituting means;
Driving means for operating the support means to perform a retreat operation for retreating from a position for supporting the game ball at the launch position;
Drive control means for controlling the drive of the drive means;
With
The drive control means drives the drive means to perform the evacuation operation based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is the predetermined state. Control
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the game ball on the firing path forming means can be discharged out of the firing path forming means based on the execution of the save operation.

  The feature D3 is a feature extracted from the first embodiment described above. In the gaming machine having the feature D3, based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state, the driving of the driving means is controlled so that the supporting means performs a retracting operation. Then, the support means performs the retreat operation, so that the game ball on the launch path configuration means is not supported by the support means, and thus the game ball (return ball) can be discharged out of the launch path configuration means.

Feature D4.
A first path portion that is arranged in an inclined manner in the launch direction, and a second path whose upper end side is rotatably supported by a rotation fulcrum provided on the lower end side of the first path portion. A launch path constituting means (fire rail 74) comprising:
Support means capable of supporting a game ball arranged at a launch position provided in the launch path constituting means;
With
The second path part is
A first state that is arranged on substantially the same straight line as the first path part and constitutes a launch path of a game ball that is launched together with the first path part;
The second state in which the rotation fulcrum is rotated as a reference so as to be in a downward inclined state or a state of depending from the rotation fulcrum can be executed alternatively.
The second path portion is rotated with reference to the rotation fulcrum, and the state of the second path portion is changed from the first state to the second state, or from the second state to the first state. Drive means to change;
Drive control means for controlling the drive of the drive means;
With
The drive control means is configured such that the state of the second path portion is the first state based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path configuration means is the predetermined state. Controlling the driving of the driving means so as to change to the second state from
Based on the fact that the state of the second path portion changes to the second state, it is possible to discharge the game ball on the firing path configuration means out of the firing path configuration means. The gaming machine described.

  The feature D4 is a feature extracted from the above-described modified example 17 {see FIG. 112}. According to the gaming machine having the feature D4, based on the fact that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state, the drive control is performed so that the second path portion changes to the second state. That is, since the second path portion is inclined downward or hangs down on the basis of the rotation fulcrum, the game ball (return ball) that has run backward on the launch path constituting means can be discharged out of the launch path constituting means.

Feature D5.
The launch path constituting means (launch rail 74), which is arranged in an upwardly inclined manner toward the launch direction, and which is a movable portion whose at least a lower end side is movable toward the launch direction;
Support means capable of supporting a game ball arranged at a launch position provided in the launch path constituting means;
Moving means for moving the movable part in the firing direction;
Movement control means for controlling driving of the movement means;
With
The movement control means is configured to cause the movable portion to move toward the firing direction based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path configuring means is the predetermined state. To control the driving of the driving means,
Based on the movement of the movable part toward the launch direction, the game ball on the launch path configuration means can pass through the lower end of the launch path configuration means and be discharged out of the launch path configuration means. The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein

  A feature D5 is a feature extracted from the above-described modification 22 (see FIG. 125). According to the gaming machine having the feature D5, based on the fact that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state, the drive is controlled so that the movable portion moves in the firing direction. As a result, the game ball on the launch path configuration means can pass through the lower end portion of the launch path configuration means and can be discharged out of the launch path configuration means. Therefore, the return ball can be discharged out of the launch path configuration means. .

Feature D6.
The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the firing path configuring means (the firing rail 74) is the movable portion.

  The feature D6 is a feature extracted from the above-described modification 22 {refer to FIG. 125}. In the gaming machine of this feature D6, the entire launch path configuration means (the launch rail 74) is used as a movable part. It is easy to discharge the game ball (return ball) on the means from the lower end portion of the firing path constituting means to the outside of the firing path constituting means.

Feature D7.
The game machine according to Feature D5, wherein a lower end portion of the launch path forming means (launch rail 74) is the movable portion.

  In this feature D7, since the entire length of the launch path forming means (the launch rail 74) is shortened along the launch direction, it is easy to discharge from the lower end portion of the launch path constituting means to the outside of the launch path configuring means.

Feature D8.
The launch path forming means (launch rail 74) includes a first path section that is arranged in an upwardly inclined manner toward the launch direction;
A second path portion slidably disposed on the first path portion above or below the first path portion, and
The second path portion is disposed in a state of protruding a predetermined amount from the lower end portion of the first path portion on the lower end portion side of the first path portion,
The movement control means moves the second path portion in the launch direction based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is the predetermined state. The game machine according to Feature D7, wherein the drive of the drive means is controlled to do so.

  A feature D8 is a feature extracted from the above-described modification 22 (see FIG. 125). According to the feature D8, the launch path forming means (the launch rail 74) can easily obtain a configuration in which the lower end side expands and contracts.

Feature D9.
The discharging means is
A discharge part that is configured by a notch or an opening provided in the launch path forming means (fire rail 74), and that can discharge the game ball that has run backward through the launch path forming means to the outside of the launch path configuring means;
Opening / closing means for selectively executing an open state for opening the discharge portion and a closed state for closing the discharge portion;
Driving means for opening and closing the opening and closing means;
Drive control means for controlling the drive of the drive means;
With
The drive control means is configured to cause the open / close means in the closed state to be in the open state based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is the predetermined state. The game machine according to Feature D2, wherein the drive of the drive means is controlled as described above.

  A feature D9 is a feature extracted from the above-described modified example 27 (see FIGS. 134 and 135). According to the feature D9, based on the fact that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state, the drive of the drive means is controlled so that the discharge unit is in an open state. As a result, the game ball (return ball) that has run backward through the firing path constituting means can be discharged out of the firing path constituting means.

Feature D10.
The launch path constituting means (fire rail 74) arranged in an upwardly inclined manner toward the launch direction;
Launching means for firing the game ball at the launch position;
Firing movement means for moving the firing means in a direction opposite to the firing direction;
Firing movement control means for controlling driving of the firing movement means;
With
The firing movement control means is configured to move the firing means in a direction opposite to the firing direction based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path configuring means is the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D9, wherein the driving of the driving means is controlled so as to move toward the front.

  A feature D10 is a feature extracted from the above-described modification 22 (see FIG. 125). According to the feature D10, since the launching unit moves in a direction opposite to the firing direction based on the state of the game ball being in a predetermined state, the game ball (return ball) on the launch path configuration unit Ejection outside the launch path forming means is further facilitated.

Feature D11.
The discharging means is configured to cause the game path on the launch path configuring means to be configured based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is the predetermined state. A discharge operation for discharging out of the means over a first time period;
Based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is the predetermined state before the second time has elapsed after the discharging operation is ended, the discharging is performed. The game machine according to any one of features D2 to D10, wherein the operation is performed again over the first time period.

  In the case of feature D11, even if the discharge operation is performed for the first time, the occurrence of a return ball is detected before the second time has elapsed, or the return ball is not resolved even if the discharge operation is performed for the first time ( Since the discharge operation is performed again when the game ball remains on the launch path forming means, the return ball can be reliably processed. Note that in the feature D11, the number of re-ejecting operations may be one, but may be a plurality of times. In the latter case, after performing the discharge operation again, the second and subsequent discharge operations may be executed on condition that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state. You may perform the discharge | emission operation | movement of the uniform predetermined number of times (for example, any number in 2-5 times) again.

Feature D12.
The discharging means is configured to cause the game path on the launch path configuring means to be configured based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is the predetermined state. A discharge operation for discharging out of the means over a first time period;
Based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is the predetermined state before the second time has elapsed after the discharging operation is ended, the discharging is performed. The game machine according to any one of features D2 to D10, wherein the operation is executed over a third time longer than the first time.

  In the case of the feature D12, even if the discharging operation is performed over the first time, if the return ball is generated before the second time elapses, the discharging operation is performed over a third time longer than the first time. The return ball can be processed more reliably. Note that in the feature D12, the number of re-discharge operations may be one, but may be a plurality of times. In the latter case, after performing the discharge operation again, the second and subsequent discharge operations may be executed on condition that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball is a predetermined state. You may perform the discharge | emission operation | movement of the uniform predetermined number of times (for example, any number in 2-5 times) again. Further, when performing the second discharging operation a plurality of times, even if the cumulative number of the second discharging operation increases, even if the execution time of the second discharging operation is constant, it may become longer as the cumulative number increases. Good.

Feature D13.
The gaming machine according to any one of Feature D10 to Feature 12, wherein the second time is shorter than the first time.

  According to the feature D13, it is effective when a return ball is generated frequently (when it is generated immediately even if the discharge operation is performed).

Feature D14.
The discharging means is
Based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path configuring means is the predetermined state, the game ball on the firing path configuring means is discharged out of the firing path configuring means. In the case where the discharging operation is performed over the first time, when the detecting unit detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path configuring unit is the predetermined state, the discharging operation is further performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D11 to D13, wherein the gaming machine lasts for a predetermined time.

  According to the feature D14, even when the discharging operation is performed for the first time, when the detecting unit detects that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring unit is a predetermined state, that is, If the return ball is not completely discharged, the discharging operation is further executed. For this reason, complete discharge operation can be expected.

Feature D15.
Any of the features D2 to D14, comprising warning means for giving a predetermined warning based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is the predetermined state. Game machines.

  According to the feature D15, since it is possible to warn the player, it is possible to alert the occurrence of the return ball.

Feature D16.
The discharge means is provided in the launch path forming means (launch rail 74), and is configured by a notch or an opening that can discharge the game ball to the outside of the launch path configuring means (fire rail 74). The gaming machine according to Feature D1, which is characterized.

  A feature D16 is a feature extracted from the fifth embodiment. According to this feature D16, the return sphere can be discharged out of the launch path forming means using the notch or the opening. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the gaming machine can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

Feature D17.
The discharging means is
It consists of a notch or an opening provided in the firing path constituting means (firing rail 74), and the game ball on the firing path constituting means (firing rail 74) is discharged to a flow path outside the firing path constituting means. Possible drains, and
An open state in which the discharge unit is opened to allow the game ball on the launch path configuration unit to be guided to a flow path outside the launch path configuration unit, and the game on the launch path configuration unit is closed A closed state in which a sphere cannot be guided to a flow path outside the firing path constituting means, and an opening / closing means for selectively executing,
With
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, further comprising operation means capable of performing an opening operation for changing the open / close means in the closed state to the open state.

  According to the feature D17, the player can discharge the game ball (return ball) on the firing path configuring means (the launch rail 74) to the outside of the firing path configuring means by performing an opening operation on the operating means. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the gaming machine can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

Feature D18.
The discharging means is
Support means capable of changing between a support state for supporting a game ball disposed at a launch position provided in the launch path configuration means and an unsupported state for not supporting a game ball;
An operating means for operating the supporting means in the supported state to be in an unsupported state;
With
The gaming machine according to claim D1, wherein the game ball on the firing path configuring means can be discharged out of the firing path configuring means based on the support means being in the unsupported state. .

  According to the gaming machine of feature D18, the player can reliably discharge the game ball (return ball) on the firing path constituting means (the firing rail 74) outside the firing path constituting means by operating the operating means. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the gaming machine can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

Feature D19.
The launch path constituting means (fire rail 74) includes:
A first path portion that is arranged to be inclined toward the launch direction;
A second path portion on which the upper end side is rotatably supported by the rotation fulcrum provided on the lower end portion side of the first path portion;
The second path part is
A first state that is arranged on substantially the same straight line as the first path part and constitutes a launch path of a game ball that is launched together with the first path part;
Based on the rotation fulcrum, it can be executed alternatively with the second state rotated so as to be in a downwardly inclined or hanging state from the rotation fulcrum,
Operating means for operating the second path portion to change the state from the first state to the second state;
The feature D1 is characterized in that, based on the state of the second path portion becoming the second state, the game ball on the launch path configuring unit can be discharged out of the launch path configuring unit. Game machines.

  According to the gaming machine of feature D19, the player can reliably discharge the game ball (return ball) on the firing path constituting means (the firing rail 74) outside the firing path constituting means by operating the operating means. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the gaming machine can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

Feature D20.
The launch path constituting means (launch rail 74), which is arranged in an upwardly inclined manner toward the launch direction, and which is a movable portion whose at least a lower end side is movable toward the launch direction;
Support means capable of supporting a game ball arranged at a launch position provided in the launch path constituting means;
Operating means for operating the movable part to move in the direction opposite to the firing direction,
Based on the movement of the movable part toward the launch direction, the game ball on the launch path configuration means can pass through the lower end of the launch path configuration means and be discharged out of the launch path configuration means. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine of feature D20, the player can reliably discharge the game ball (return ball) on the firing path constituting means (the firing rail 74) outside the firing path constituting means by operating the operation means. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the gaming machine can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced. The feature D19 may include any one of the same feature as the feature D6, the same feature as the feature D7, and the same feature as the feature D8.

Feature D21.
The launch path constituting means (fire rail 74) arranged in an upwardly inclined manner toward the launch direction;
Launching means for firing the game ball at the launch position and movable in a direction opposite to the launch direction;
Operating means for operating the firing means to move in a direction opposite to the firing direction;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D17 to D20, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine of feature D21, the player can reliably discharge the game ball (return ball) on the firing path constituting means (the firing rail 74) to the outside of the firing path constituting means by operating the operation means. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform electrical control to process the return ball, the mechanical structure of the gaming machine can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced.

Feature D22.
Detecting means for detecting the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means;
Warning means for performing a predetermined warning based on the detection means detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is a predetermined state different from a normal state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D17 to D21.

  According to the feature D22, since it is possible to warn the player, it is possible to alert the occurrence of the return ball. In particular, in a mode in which an opening operation is performed on the operation means, the player can perform the opening operation based on a warning. Therefore, the game ball (return ball) on the firing path constituting means (the firing rail 74) can be discharged more reliably outside the firing path constituting means.

Feature E1.
A game area provided on the game board;
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75);
A launch path configuration means for configuring a launch path of a game ball;
First control means (main control device 81);
Second control means (power and launch control device 98);
With
A gaming machine launched using the launching means passes through the launch path constituting means in a predetermined launch direction, reaches the game area and flows down,
The first control means is capable of transmitting to the second control means a possible signal corresponding to the launch permission or a not signal not corresponding to the launch permission based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
The second control means is configured to send a game ball to the launch position of the launch path construction means by the ball feed means (ball feed device 76) based on receiving the signal, and to the launch position. The launching operation of launching the sent game ball by the launching means can be executed in this order,
Detecting means for detecting the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means;
Based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is a predetermined state different from the normal state, the ejecting action is performed to eject out of the firing path constituting means. Action execution means;
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the discharge operation executing unit is driven, the first control unit transmits the rejection signal to the second control unit regardless of whether the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine of feature E1, the first control means can smoothly perform the discharging operation by transmitting a no signal to the second control means regardless of whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, the second control means can perform the firing operation, the ball feeding operation, and the discharge operation only by determining whether the signal transmitted from the first control means is a possible signal or not. Therefore, the structure of the second control means is not complicated, and the control burden is not increased.

Feature E2.
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein when the discharge operation is started before the launch operation is performed after the ball feeding operation is performed, the launch operation is prohibited.

  According to the feature E2, it is possible to reliably prevent the launching unit from performing the launching operation on the game ball remaining on the launching path constituting unit after the discharge operation is started.

Feature E3.
A support means capable of changing between a first state of supporting the game ball arranged at the launch position and a second state of not supporting the game ball;
The discharge operation executing means changes the state of the support means to the second state based on detecting that the state of the game ball on the launch path configuring means is the predetermined state, A discharge operation of discharging the game ball of the launch path constituting means is performed,
A state determination unit for determining whether the state of the support unit is the first state or the second state;
After the support means is in the second state, a predetermined condition (e.g., elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied, and when the state determination means determines that the state of the support means is the second state, the launching The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein operation is prohibited.

  According to the feature E3, it is possible to prevent the firing operation from being performed when the state of the support means has not returned to the first state after the discharge operation. Here, the prohibition of the launch operation can be performed, for example, by the first control unit transmitting a rejection signal to the second control unit regardless of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Feature F1.
A game area provided on the game board;
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75);
A launch path configuration means for configuring a launch path of a game ball;
First control means (main control device 81);
Second control means (power and launch control device 98);
With
A gaming machine launched using the launching means passes through the launch path constituting means in a predetermined launch direction, reaches the game area and flows down,
The first control means is capable of transmitting to the second control means a possible signal corresponding to the launch permission or a not signal not corresponding to the launch permission based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
The second control means is configured to send a game ball to the launch position of the launch path construction means by the ball feed means (ball feed device 76) based on receiving the signal, and to the launch position. The launching operation of launching the sent game ball by the launching means can be executed in this order,
A detecting means for detecting the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means;
Based on the fact that the detection means detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is a predetermined state different from a normal state, the second control means performs the first control over the first time. A gaming machine, wherein the ball feeding operation is prohibited between the ball feeding operation and the launching operation.

  In the case of the feature F1, when the state of the game ball on the launch path configuration means becomes a predetermined state (when a return ball is generated), the ball feeding operation is prohibited during the first period. It is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating. That is, if the launching operation is continued in a state where the ball feeding operation is prohibited, there is a possibility that the game ball on the launch path configuring unit does not exist from above the launch path configuring unit and the return ball is eliminated.

  For example, when a plurality of game balls that existed on the launch path configuration means are launched by the launch means, the ball strength becomes weaker than when one game ball that exists at the launch position is launched. There is a possibility that the gap portion (the distance portion 7D between the firing rail 74 and the guide rail portion 5E, that is, the foul ball collection port) cannot be overcome and may enter the gap portion (foul ball collection port). . In this case, since a plurality of game balls existing on the launch path constituting unit are collected, there is a possibility that the return ball can be collected.

Feature F2.
Based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means is the predetermined state after prohibiting the ball feeding operation for the first time, the firing path The gaming machine according to feature F1, further comprising a discharge operation executing unit that performs a discharge operation of discharging the game ball on the component out of the firing path component.

  In the gaming machine of feature F2, the discharging operation is performed when the returning ball cannot be collected even if the ball feeding operation is prohibited over the first period. That is, it is possible to reliably perform the return ball processing while suppressing the execution frequency of the discharging operation.

Feature G1.
A game area provided on the game board;
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75);
A launch path configuration means for configuring a launch path of a game ball;
A movable member (supporting member 77 in FIG. 9) that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball on the firing path forming means is held on the firing path forming means and a second state that can be discharged out of the firing path forming means. Open / close member 674n of FIG.
With
A gaming machine launched using the launching means passes through the launch path constituting means in a predetermined launch direction, reaches the game area and flows down,
A detecting means for detecting the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means;
The state of the movable member is changed to the second state based on the detection unit detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting unit is a predetermined state different from a normal state. The game ball on the launch path configuration means can be discharged out of the launch path configuration means,
Comprising a state determination means for determining whether the state of the movable member is the first state or the second state;
The state determination means determines that the state of the movable member is the second state when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied after the state of the movable member becomes the second state. Then, the gaming machine is characterized by prohibiting the launch operation.

  According to the feature G1, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied after the state of the movable member becomes the second state (for example, even when the end time of the second state comes), the state of the movable member is changed to the first state. The purpose is to prevent the launching operation from taking place when it does not return.

Feature G2.
A game area provided on the game board;
Predetermined launching means (launching device 75);
A launch path configuration means for configuring a launch path of a game ball;
A first state in which a game ball on the firing path configuration means is held on the firing path configuration means; a movable member that can be changed to a second state that can be discharged out of the firing path configuration means;
With
A gaming machine launched using the launching means passes through the launch path constituting means in a predetermined launch direction, reaches the game area and flows down,
A detecting means for detecting the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting means;
The state of the movable member is changed to the second state based on the detection unit detecting that the state of the game ball on the firing path constituting unit is a predetermined state different from a normal state. The game ball on the launch path configuration means can be discharged out of the launch path configuration means,
Comprising a state determination means for determining whether the state of the movable member is the first state or the second state;
The state determination means determines that the state of the movable member is the second state when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied after the state of the movable member becomes the second state. Then, a gaming machine comprising warning means for giving a warning.

  According to the gaming machine of feature G2, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied after the state of the movable member becomes the second state (for example, when the end time of the second state comes), the state of the movable member is the first state. In the case where the state does not return to the 1 state, the warning means gives a warning, so that it is possible to call the attention of a player, a pachinko hall clerk or the like.

Feature G3.
By configuring the movable member in a predetermined manner, the movable member is configured by support means that can change from a support state that supports the game ball arranged at the launch position to an unsupported state that does not support the game ball.
The gaming machine according to claim G1 or G2, wherein the first state is configured by the support state and the second state is configured by the non-support state.

  According to the feature G3, when the state of the support means does not return to the first state, the launching operation can be prohibited (when the feature G1 is cited) or a warning can be given (when the feature G2 is cited). .

  The present invention can be used in the field of manufacturing and selling pachinko machines.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Actuation port, 34 ... Actuation port, 74 ... Launch rail as launch path construction means, 75 ... Launch device, 77 ... Support member, 77a ... Solenoid, PE ... Game area, 212 ... Display control device (First suggestion effect execution determination means, first suggestion effect execution means, selection means, second suggestion effect execution determination means, second suggestion effect execution means).

Claims (2)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to the allocated information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the grant determination target special information corresponds to the grant information;
Identification information change that starts display of change of identification information based on the result of the assignment determination, ends the change display when a predetermined change time elapses, and displays the result of assignment determination according to the final stop mode of the identification information Means,
For the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, first pre-specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination, First pre-identification means for identifying the predetermined special information before being subject to the grant determination;
First suggestion effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting the content of the first prior determination information with a determination probability based on the type of the special information that is the specific target;
When the first suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the first suggestion effect, the change display of the identification information based on the special information that is the specific target by the first prior specifying means is started. First suggestion effect execution means for executing the first suggestion effect before the change display ends,
A gaming machine comprising
When it is displayed that the special information is a grant non-correspondence result that does not correspond to the grant information according to the final stop mode of the identification information based on the special information that has been specified by the first prior specification means, In a case where special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, a selection unit that preferentially selects special information that does not have the lowest determination probability from the stored special information;
When the special information selected by the selection means is the target of the grant determination, the second prior specific information indicating the possibility of being determined as the grant determination result, the selected special information is the target of the grant determination A second pre-identifying means for identifying before
Second suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect indicating the content of the second prior determination information based on a determination probability set according to the type of the selected special information; ,
If the second suggestion effect execution determining means determines to execute the second suggestion effect, before the change display of the identification information based on the special information selected by the selection means is started, or the change display Second suggestion effect execution means for executing the second suggestion effect before the end of
A gaming machine comprising:   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special information whose decision probability is not lowest is the grant information.